Revit Structure 2009

Imperial Tutorials

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Chapter 1

Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Chapter 2

Express Workshops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Structural Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding New Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Structural Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Elements to Multiple Levels . . . . . . . . Adding Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View . . . . . . Placing a Detail in a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details . . . . Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library . Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section . . . . . Adding a Cantilever to a Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . Coping Beam Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Final Annotation and Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . 19 . 20 . 21 . 24 . 27 . 32 . 35 . 47 . 49 . 55 . 59 . 62 . 63 . 65 . 66 . 70 . 73 . 75 . 79 . 82 . 84 . 98

v

Chapter 3

Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Structural Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Structural Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 . 107 . 109 . 112 . 113 . 115 . 115 . 118 . 120 . 122 . 125 . 127 . 128 . 130 . 130 . 131 . 137 . 139 . 142 . 143 . 144 . 146

Chapter 4

Starting a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Importing/Linking Drawing Files . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File . . . . Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture Linking a Revit Architecture File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 . 149 . 151 . 154

Chapter 5

Creating a Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Creating a Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . Adding Horizontal Framing . . . . . . . . . . Adding Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Composite Deck . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Bracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shear Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Isolated Foundations . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 . . . Adding Cantilevered Beams . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck . . . Adding Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Shape-Modified Slab . . . . . . . . . Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab . . . . . Adding Miter Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Curved Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening in a Beam . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening to a Beam Family . . . . . Adding Foundation Walls . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Piers or Pilasters . . . . . . . . . . . . Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels . . Placing a Wall Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 . 162 . 167 . 171 . 173 . 180 . 182 . 184 . 186 . 188 . 188 . 194 . 196 . 199 . 201 . 205 . 216 . 224 . 229 . 236 . 239 . 241 . 246 . 249 . 250 . 257

vi | Contents

Chapter 6

Precast

Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 . 261 . 263 . 264 . 265 . 265

Creating a Precast Beam System . . . . . . . . . Adding a Beam System to the Structure . . Changing the Beam System Properties . . . Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing . Modifying the Precast Beam Family . . . . . . . Adding a Chamfer to the Beam . . . . . .

Chapter 7

Creating

Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 . 275 . 280 . 280 . 284 . 284 . 287 . 292 . 292

Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . Creating a Drawing Sheet . . . . . . . . Adding a Sheet to the Project . . . . . . Creating New Views to Add to Sheets . . Creating a Detail Library . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drafting View Detail Library . Importing Details from the Library . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8

Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Scheduling Beam Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Structural Framing Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Type Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing the Type Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Instance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create the Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Schedule Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 297 . 299 . 302 . 307 . 313 . 316 . 316 . 320 . 324 . 326 . 326

Chapter 9

Steel Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Setting Up Section Views on Sheets . . . . . . . . . Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets . Detailing Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Welded Bracing Detail . . . . . . . Creating a Bolted Angle Detail . . . . . . . . . Creating a Facade Support Detail . . . . . . . Creating a Drafting View Detail . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 . 329 . 333 . 333 . 339 . 341 . 344 . 345

Chapter 10

Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Concrete Modelling Examples . . . . . . . . . . Reinforcement in a Beam . . . . . . . . . . Reinforcement in a Column . . . . . . . . Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall . . Area Reinforcement in a Slab . . . . . . . . Path Reinforcement in a Slab . . . . . . . Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing . . . . Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 . 351 . 359 . 364 . 373 . 378 . 382 . 393

Chapter 11

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Contents | vii

Controlling Witness Line Location . . . . . . Modifying Dimension Properties . . . . . . . Working with Alignments and Constraints . . Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions . Working with Spot Dimensions . . . . . . . . Annotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Beam Tag . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 411 . 414 . 415 . 420 . 421 . 428 . 428 . 435

Chapter 12

Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Assigning Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making the Entire Workset Editable . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 . 439 . 445 . 448 . 453 . 457

Chapter 13

Project Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Coordination Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the Modified Revit Architecture Interference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . . . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . Add Remaining Revisions . . . . . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 . 461 . 468 . 474 . 474 . 475 . 476 . 480 . 481

Chapter 14

Structural Analytical Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analytical Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Loads to the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Project Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Documenting the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 . 486 . 494 . 496 . 505 . 507 . 509 . 512 . 514 . 531 . 534

Chapter 15

Exporting Revit Structure Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Exporting CAD Formats . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD . . Exporting Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture 2007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 . 535 . 539 . 540

Chapter 16

About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

Chapter 17

Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Creating Custom Families . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family . . . Customizing a Castellated Beam . . . . . . Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 . 551 . 563 . 565

viii | Contents

Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. 573 . 574 . 581 . 581 . 584 . 592

Chapter 18

Truss Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Working with Trusses . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Trusses to a Project . . . . . . Customizing Truss Parameters . . . . Modifying the Shape of a Truss . . . Creating a Custom Truss Family . . . Building a Truss with Drafting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 . 595 . 604 . 608 . 611 . 616

Chapter 19

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 . 626 . 636 . 643

Chapter 20

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 . 648 . 657 . 660 . 662 . 665 . 665 . 667 . 670 . 672 . 673

Chapter 21

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

Chapter 22

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 . 694 . 701 . 705 . 709 . 713 . 714 . 717 . 721 . 726 . 727 . 730 . 732

Chapter 23

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733

Contents | ix

Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 733 . 738 . 741 . 743 . 746 . 748 . 750 . 751 . 754 . 762 . 762 . 764 . 765

Chapter 24

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 . 769 . 777 . 781 . 784 . 784 . 787 . 790 . 790

x | Contents

Understanding the Concepts

1

In this tutorial, you learn the fundamental concepts of Revit® Structure 2009. You learn how Revit Structure works, the terms used when working with the product, and how to navigate the user interface. This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Structure tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Structure works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

1

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Structure tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Structure project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Structure Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Structure. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Structure.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Structure projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RST 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Structure project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 3

10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates. 11 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Structure templates. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding structure type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 12 Select Structural Analysis-Default.rte, and click Open. 13 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Structure is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Structure is built. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit Structure 2009?
The Revit Structure platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Structure model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Structure collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Structure parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Structure provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Structure: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Structure coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

Pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit Structure keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Structure immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Structure uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating structural changes. The

4 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
In projects, Revit Structure uses 3 types of elements:

Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the structure. They display in relevant views of the model. For example, structural walls, slabs, ramps, and roofs are model elements. Datum elements help to define project context. For example, column grids, levels, and reference planes are datum elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or document the model. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

There are 2 types of model elements:

Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, structural walls and roofs are hosts. Model components are all the other types of elements in the structural model. For example, beams, structural columns, and 3D rebar are model components.

There are 2 types of view-specific elements:

Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example, dimensions, tags, and symbols are annotation elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the structural model in a particular view. Examples include detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Structure elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Structure. In Revit Structure, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls, for example.

Understanding the Basics | 5

Understanding Revit Structure 2009 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Structure are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. However, some terms are unique to Revit Structure. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit Structure, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all information for the structural design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Structure makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, slabs, and beams. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the structure; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
South Elevation View of Structure

Element: When creating a project, you add Revit Structure parametric building elements to the design. Revit Structure classifies elements by categories, families, and types. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a structural design. For example, categories of model elements include columns and beams. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, a truss could be considered one family, although the web supports that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include slabs, dimensions, roofs, and levels. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit Structure predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a structural wall is predefined in the system. However, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

6 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

In the following illustration. In the steps that follow. such as a 30” X 42” title block. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the structure (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 7 . A type can be a specific size of a family. This creates a new project based on the default template. click . Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Structure is its ease of use. The Title Bar 2 Place your cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. you will soon feel comfortable learning this interface.Type: Each family can have several types. A type can also be a style. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. the user interface is labeled. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. The Revit Structure window is arranged to make navigation easy. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. specifically its clear user interface. Revit Structure uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. making it easy to understand what each button represents.

These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. There are 6 toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. and View. the Level 2 structural plan view is the default open view. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. You then click the command name to run the command. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. 8 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. click Toolbar. You can choose commands by placing the cursor over the menu name and clicking. the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit is ZF.By default. TIP For example. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. TIP The project template determines which view is opened and the view names as well. Edit. While working in the drawing area. The Menu Bar 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom. In addition.

The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. click Structural Column. First. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. For example. Select the drop-down list to view the list of beams. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains design options used to draw the structural wall. The Design Bar 10 On the Window menu. the Type Selector displays a list of beams available within the project. you can select a component type before you add it to the structural model. click Design Bars. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to beams. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. notice a beam type is specified. On the left side of the Options Bar. Within the drawing area.The Options Bar 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If you select the Beam tool. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 9 . 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. notice the list of columns that are available. You use the Type Selector in 2 ways. click Beam. the beam type active in the Type Selector is the beam type that is added when you insert it into the structural model. if you intend to add a beam. you can select any component and then change the type using the Type Selector. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the structural model. click Structural Wall. 6 On the Design Bar. The Show Design Bars dialog box is displayed. 9 In the Type Selector.

10 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . containing buttons grouped by function. 11 Click OK. There are 9 tabs in the Design Bar. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. immediately below the Type Selector. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the Menu Bar. click the tab.The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab — commands for creating most basic structural model components View tab — commands for creating different views in the project Architectural tab — commands for adding architectural components to your project Drafting tab — commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab — commands for creating rendered 3D images Site tab — commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab — commands for executing conceptual massing commands Modelling tab — all the commands to create structural model elements Construction tab — commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands within a tab. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog box.

Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 11 .The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. In the Project Browser. select Views (all).

double-click the name. and groups. 14 On the Settings menu. To open a view. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (structural plans.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. families. The browser is also dockable. delete. columns. reports.sign next to the name. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. sheets. schedules. family category (beams. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. 3D). You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. and groups of your current project. 12 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . 13 In the Type Selector. scroll through the sorting available for the Project Browser. click Browser Organization. and group name. You can right-click in the browser to add. You can expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or . and rename views. elevations. walls). families.

The cursor is displayed as a pencil. After you create a browser organization scheme. click Structural Wall. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog box. Do not click. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next." TIP The cursor tooltip that displays is identical to the note on the Status Bar. In the bottom left corner of the window. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. click Cancel. In this case. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 13 .You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area.

Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol so that it is highlighted. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol at the bottom of the drawing area. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. Revit Structure Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Structure 2009 Help. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. 20 Press TAB. find a keyword on the Index tab. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Structure session. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure In this exercise. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. press F1 to get help on that dialog. and click to get the topic associated with the window. After you are familiar with these tasks. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. When you place the cursor over a component. in conjunction with tooltips. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Dialog include Help buttons. regarding selected components within a view.You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. There are several tools that help you find information. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. press SHIFT+F1. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Structure Help window. Click the Help button. The Status Bar also provides information. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. 14 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . Windows: From any window. You can use this tri-pane. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. Tooltips: To see tooltips. it will be easier to work in Revit Structure and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. You can also press SHIFT+F1. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Structure tasks that are included in the tutorials. In the Status Bar. If there is no Help button displayed. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. click . notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: Building Elevation. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name.

the view zooms out from the structural model. For example. The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. click 3DViews ➤ 3D. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. In the following steps. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. 3 In the Project Browser. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. click Training Files. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x).rvt. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the structural model in the window. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure | 15 . and open Common\c_STR_Project_Phasing.Use zoom commands to adjust the view There are several ways to access zoom options. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. In the tutorials. In the drawing area. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or plan view in the view.

When you release the mouse button. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. 10 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. 8 Click in the drawing area. Revit Structure uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out.6 On the View toolbar. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. the view zooms in on the selected area. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. If you do not have a wheel mouse. The view of the structural model is sized to fit the available window. To modify or add snap increments. 16 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. NOTE As you zoom in and out. this is referred to as a crossing selection.

press ESC. click Settings menu ➤ Options. and then using the Zoom tool again. select the second item in the list. Move. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. and click the SteeringWheels tab. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. All changes you make to a project are tracked. 12 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 18 On the Undo menu. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure | 17 . on the View toolbar. To define settings for SteeringWheels. For more information about SteeringWheels. 14 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. and click Help. 13 Click and hold the mouse button. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. As you move the mouse. moving the wheel to the desired location. 15 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in.11 To display SteeringWheels. In this example. Undo commands 17 On the Standard toolbar. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 16 To exit the wheel. .

or press CTRL+Z. and click again to end it. 20 Click in the drawing area to start the line. End a command 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. 18 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Some commands. click Modify. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 22 Close the file without saving your changes. 21 To end the command. On the Design Bar. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. such as the Lines command. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. click the Undo command. Press ESC twice.Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. click Lines. on the Standard toolbar.

highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common structural workflows. and a concrete slab to the model. you copy the elements to multiple levels on the model. Each tutorial demonstrates tools that you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. you create a 5-story steel structure. you will create and name a new steel project. You then add structural walls. 19 . You start by linking a 2-dimensional architectural file into Revit Structure and using the drawing as a background template for grid and column locations.Express Workshops 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of Revit Structure 2009 functionality. When you finish these tutorials. beam systems. using the modelling tools provided in Revit Structure. columns. you will have a basic understanding of both the Revit Structure design and documentation tools. beams. You will also learn some of the practices that can help you efficiently design and develop a structural project. Structural Modelling In this lesson. Finally. Creating a New Project In this first exercise.

This is the project training file that is used for all remaining exercises in this tutorial. and click Open. click OK. On the Options Bar. click Browse. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. open the Imperial Templates folder. 4 In the New Project dialog.1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and double-click North. when a dashed line displays.rvt. i_RST_EW_Modelling. and for Offset. 20 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and save the new project as i_RST_EW_Modelling. 2 In the New Project dialog. Add levels 1 In the Project Browser. Adding New Levels In this exercise. 6 Navigate to a folder of your preference. Adding New Levels on page 20. and press ENTER. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Click the value (10' 0") for the Level 2 elevation. click the Level 2 reference line. ■ ■ In the drawing area. Save the new project 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. enter 12' 0". click Level. enter 12' 0". click (Pick Lines). click to create Level 3. 3 In the Choose Template dialog. you create additional levels for your structure. 3 Create additional levels as follows: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Elevations (Building Elevations). select Structural Analysis-Default .rte.

Importing/Linking a DWG File on page 21. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Press ESC.4 Repeat the previous step to create 2 new levels (Level 4. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 21 . and Level 5). each with the offset value set to 12' 0". you import and link a 2-dimensional (2D) architectural drawing (DWG format) to use as a background for creating your structure. Importing/Linking a DWG File In this exercise.

and click in the drawing area to display the architectural file. and draw a zoom box around the West elevation 22 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . do the following: ■ In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. i_RST_EW_Modelling. select Auto . For Colors. click symbol as shown.dwg. Click Open.Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Reposition elevation symbols 4 On the View toolbar. Select Current view only. (Zoom In). select Black and White. For Positioning. Import/Link an architectural file 1 In the Project Browser.Center to Center. Notice that Level 2 is bold. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 2. 3 In the Import/Link dialog. click Training Files. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area.rvt. ■ ■ ■ ■ You can ignore the Revit Warning. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. and select Imperial\i_RST_EW_Arch_floor_plan.

click Hide in View. and on the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 8 Select the imported drawing. 9 In the drawing area. select a single column. and click to place the symbol. click Query. Hide elements in the imported drawing 7 On the View toolbar. click drawing. drag it beyond the dimensions. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 23 .5 Click the elevation symbol. 6 Use the same method to relocate the remaining elevation symbols. . and in the Import Instance Query dialog.

(Undo). Notice that it is labeled 2. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Select the next horizontal grid line above grid line 1. 24 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 10 On the Toolbar. and a value of 1 appears within the grid bubble.rvt. Notice that the grid line is highlighted. click 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. 4 Select the first horizontal grid line. you use the imported drawing as a background for creating both vertical and horizontal grids. click Grid. click . i_RST_EW_Modelling. Adding Column Grids on page 24.Notice that all columns disappear. Place horizontal grids 1 Enter ZF (Zoom to Fit). 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding Column Grids In this exercise.

11 Select the first vertical grid line. As you select subsequent grid lines. NOTE When you select a grid line. The last horizontal grid line is labeled 6. 12 Click the value within the grid bubble. 7 On the Design Bar.6 Select the remaining horizontal grid lines using the zoom controls as needed. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Place vertical grids 8 Enter ZF. enter A. click Grid. 10 On the Options Bar. Notice that the grid line is highlighted. Click the check box near the bubble (as shown) to turn the bubble display on or off. and a value of 7 appears within the grid bubble. Make sure that all the grid bubbles are displayed on the right side of the drawing. labels display in numerical sequence. the bubble might display at the opposite end of the grid. and press ENTER. click . click Modify. Adding Column Grids | 25 .

dwg file. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Click the Imported Categories tab. Notice that the sequencing has changed from numeric to alphabetical. and then OK. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing additional structural elements. select i_EW_RST_Arch_floor_plan. 19 Enter ZF.13 Select the next grid line to the right of grid A. 15 On the Design Bar. Click Apply. 26 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Under Halftone. Change drawing visibility 16 Enter ZF. 14 Select the remaining vertical grid lines. 17 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. The last grid line is labeled G. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Modify.

Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. you add structural walls around the elevator shafts located in the center of the structure. For the remainder of this tutorial.rvt. Setup views 1 In the Project Browser. this view is referred to as the plan view. Adding Structural Walls on page 27. Adding Structural Walls | 27 . select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 2. i_RST_EW_Modelling. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Structural Walls In this exercise.20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

2 On the View toolbar. click Structural Wall. click the sketch line that represents the exterior face of the top elevator shaft. 10 Using the drawing as a guide. . select Finish Face: Exterior. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts located in he 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and for Loc Line. Place structural walls around the top elevator shaft 5 Click inside the plan view. click center of the drawing. and enter ZF. and place the first structural wall as shown. 9 On the Options Bar. 4 Close any additional windows that may have been opened accidentally. 8 In the Type Selector. The plan view and the 3D view are now displayed in separate windows in the drawing area. this view is referred to as the 3D view.8" Masonry. 3 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 11 Click the north exterior face of the elevator shaft to place the second structural wall. 6 On the View toolbar. click (3D). For the remainder of this tutorial. click . select Basic Wall : Generic . 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

12 Using the same method. 15 On the View Control Bar. place the remaining structural walls around the top elevator shaft. and click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading w/Edges. View the structural walls in 3D 14 Click inside the 3D view and enter ZF. 13 On the Design Bar. Adding Structural Walls | 29 . click Modify. click Detail Level ➤ Fine.

place structural walls for the middle and bottom elevator shafts on the west side of the structure. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 18 Draw a selection box around all 3 elevator shafts. and using the architectural drawing as a guide. Mirror the west elevator shafts 17 Click inside the plan view.Complete the elevator shafts on the west side of the structure 16 Using the same method and wall type used to place the first elevator shaft walls.

(Mirror).19 On the Toolbar. click 20 Click grid D. Adding Structural Walls | 31 . The elevator shafts from the west side of the structure are now mirrored on the east side.

22 Click File menu ➤ Save. These columns extend from Level 1 to Level 2. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. click Modify. Notice the completed elevator shafts are displayed in the 3D view. Adding Structural Columns on page 32. you add columns at specific grid intersections.21 On the Design Bar. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

5 Click grid location A6 to place the first column. 2 On the View toolbar. 4 In the Type Selector. select W-Wide Flange-Column : W14X43. B5 Adding Structural Columns | 33 . 6 Using the same method. . Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column so that it is perpendicular with grid line 6 as shown.Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling. click structure. place a column at the following grid locations: ■ ■ B6 A5. click Structural Column.rvt. Place columns at specific grid intersections 1 Click inside the plan view. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

click (Grid Intersection). 10 In the Type Selector. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and enter ZF. click Structural Column. and enter ZF.7 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Toolbar. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Place remaining columns using the grid intersection tool 8 Click inside the plan view. Columns are placed at each grid intersection. click Finish. click Modify. select W-Wide Flange-Column : W14X43. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 Draw a selection box around the entire view to select all grid lines. 14 Click inside the 3D view.

click Chain. Adding Structural Beams In this exercise. You also set the offset value of the steel beams to allow for the concrete slab that will be added in a later exercise. Adding Structural Beams | 35 . select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. 4 In the Type Selector. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. . i_RST_EW_Modelling. 5 On the Options Bar. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding Structural Beams on page 35.15 Click File menu ➤ Save. click structure. you add structural beams to level 2 to form the steel framework of the structure. click Beam. Add beams using the chain tool 1 Click inside the plan view. 2 On the View toolbar.rvt.

36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . place additional beams in the upper-left bay of the structure. enter 5' 0". press CTRL. Create sloped beams 9 Select the beam between grid locations A6 and B6. and select the beam between A6 and A5. 10 Click the column at grid location A6.6 Move the cursor over the column at grid location A6 until a triangle is displayed. A5. that is. click the midpoints of the columns at grid locations B5. 7 Click the midpoint of the column at grid location B6 to specify the beam endpoint. and then click to enter the beam startpoint. and press ENTER. and A6. The triangle indicates the midpoint of the column. 8 Using the same method.

13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click . 11 On the Toolbar. 15 On the Options Bar.Notice the 3D view displays the sloped beams based on the new offset height. 16 Draw a selection box around the entire view to select all grid lines. 14 In the Type Selector. Adding Structural Beams | 37 . Add remaining beams using the grid intersection tool 12 Click inside the plan view. click Beam. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. click . NOTE The method used to create sloped beams is shown for demonstration purposes only. and enter ZF. This project does not require sloped beams.

18 Click inside the 3D view. click Finish. 21 On the View toolbar. click through A5. . 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and press DELETE. and draw a zoom box around the beams at grid locations A2 22 Select each beam. Delete beams outside the drawing floor extents Six beams that were placed at grid locations outside of the floor extents of the architectural drawing need to be deleted. Beams are placed within the grid.17 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. Notice the beams are deleted in the 3D view. and enter ZF. 20 Click inside the plan view.

26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click the intersection of the beam on grid line 2 and the centerline of the wall to establish the beam startpoint. 29 Click the beam on grid line 3 to establish the beam endpoint. between grid lines G2 and G5. 24 Click inside the plan view. 25 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Beams | 39 . select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. Add new beams within the drawing floor extents The new beams are placed within the floor extents of the architectural drawing. and draw a zoom box around the southeast side of the structure. click .23 Using the same method. delete the beams on grid locations G2 through G5. click Beam. 27 In the Type Selector. 28 Using the architectural drawing as a guide.

40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . place 2 additional beams between grid lines 3 and 5.30 Using the same method.

35 Select the beam between grid lines G5 and G6. 32 Select grid line A for the center of the mirror reflection. Notice the new beams are displayed in the 3D view. click . and press DELETE. Delete beams inside the northeast and southwest stair shafts 33 Click inside the plan view. and draw a zoom box around the northeast stair shaft.31 Select the 3 new beams. 34 On the View toolbar. and on the Toolbar. click . Adding Structural Beams | 41 .

and enter ZF. click . 38 Click inside the 3D view.36 On the View toolbar. 37 Select the beam between grid lines A1 and A2. and press DELETE. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and draw a zoom box around the southwest stair shaft.

39 Click inside the plan view.Add 3 beams above the elevator shaft walls These beams will support a beam system that is added in the next exercise. This is the endpoint for the first beam. This is the startpoint for the first beam. 43 Click the existing beam on grid line 2. click center of the structure. Use the architectural drawing to locate the outline of the elevator shaft wall. Adding Structural Beams | 43 . . and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts located in the 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. 44 Click the existing beam on grid line 3. click Beam. 42 In the Type Selector. 40 On the View toolbar.

click Modify. 46 On the Design Bar. This is the endpoint for the second beam. click . and on the Toolbar. 47 Click the second beam to establish the startpoint for the third beam. Mirror the elevator shaft beams 49 Select the 3 new beams. Use the architectural drawing to locate the outline of the outside wall of the elevator shaft. This is the endpoint for the third beam. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .45 Click the existing beam on grid line 4. 48 Click the beam on grid line D .

Notice the new beams are displayed in the 3D view. Adding Structural Beams | 45 . 52 Draw a selection box around the entire model. Set the beam offset value The offset value for all beams is lowered to accommodate the slab that will be added in a future exercise.50 Select grid line D for the center of the mirror reflection. 51 Click inside the 3D view.

Notice the beams have been lowered in the 3D view. under Constraints. select Other. click ■ ■ ■ . do the following: For z-Direction Justification. select Structural Framing (Joist). and then click OK. Under Category. Only the structural framing elements (girders and joists) are highlighted. 54 In the Filter dialog. do the following: Click Check None. Under Category. For z-Direction Offset Value. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). enter -0' 5". 55 On the Options Bar. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .53 On the Options Bar. Click Apply. select Structural Framing (Girder). 56 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK.

3 On the Options Bar. Adding Structural Beam Systems on page 47. click of the structure. select Maximum Spacing. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . For Maximum Spacing. For Beam Type. and draw a zoom box around the bays on the northeast side 6 Select the beam between grid locations A5 and A6 to set the beam system direction. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Under Pattern. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Adding Structural Beam Systems | 47 . Adding Structural Beam Systems In this exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling. 5 On the View toolbar. 58 Proceed to the next exercise. for Layout Rule. select 3D. and enter ZF.57 Click File menu ➤ Save. Click OK.rvt. you add multiple structural beam systems to the steel frame on Level 2. enter 9' 0". . select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. click Beam System. Automatically create multiple beam systems 1 Click inside the plan view.

9 On the Design Bar. 10 Click inside the 3D view.The beam system location displays with a blue dashed line. and enter ZF. Notice the beam system displays in the 3D view. 7 Click to place the beam system. place a beam system in the remaining bays of the structure. 8 Using the same settings and method. do not place a beam system in the bays for the stairs in the northwest and southeast corners of the structure. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Also. NOTE Some beam systems might include 2 beams based on the size of the bay. click Modify.

and enter ZF. click Slab.11 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Adding a Structural Slab on page 49. 3 On the Design Bar. You are now in sketch mode. you sketch a concrete slab on Level 2 by tracing the outside edge of the architectural drawing. You create the sketch lines for the left side of the slab. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Trace the architectural drawing floor plan 1 Click inside the plan view. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and use the mirror tool to complete the sketch. i_RST_EW_Modelling.rvt. Adding a Structural Slab In this exercise. click Lines. Adding a Structural Slab | 49 .

6 Place the first sketch line along the exterior edge of the architectural drawing. and draw a zoom box around the northwest corner of the 5 Click the edge of the floor outline to start the slab sketch. and make sure there are no duplicate sketch lines. 8 Continue sketching the slab until you reach grid line D. 7 Continue sketching lines along the drawing perimeter using the exterior-most model lines of the imported drawing. zoom in and out as needed. click structure. use (Trim/Extend) on the Options Bar. When sketching the slab.4 On the View toolbar. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . . and DELETE to remove unwanted lines and to clean up line intersections. If necessary.

10 Draw a selection box around the left half of the view to select all sketch lines. 11 On the Toolbar.Use the mirror tool to copy the slab sketch 9 Enter ZF. Adding a Structural Slab | 51 . 12 Select grid line D for the center of the mirror reflection. click .

14 Enter ZF. click Lines. 16 On the Design Bar. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Modify. Complete the slab sketch 15 On the View toolbar.13 On the Design Bar. click line D. and draw a zoom box around the top of the slab sketch at grid 17 Draw a single line to join the 2 halves of the slab sketch. .

19 On the Design Bar. click structure. and draw a zoom box around the southeast corner of the Adding a Structural Slab | 53 . 21 Enter ZF. 22 On the View toolbar. . and draw a zoom box around the bottom of the slab sketch at 20 Draw a single line to join the 2 halves of the slab sketch. 23 On the Design Bar. . click Lines.18 On the View toolbar. 24 Modify the slab sketch until it appears as shown. click grid line D. click Lines.

26 Enter ZF. click Lines. click Modify. 29 Modify the slab sketch until it appears as shown. 31 On the Design Bar. click structure. click Finish Sketch. . and draw a zoom box around the northeast corner of the 30 Enter ZF. 54 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 27 On the View toolbar.25 On the Design Bar. 28 On the Design Bar.

Copying Elements to Multiple Levels In this exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling. Notice the completed slab is displayed in the 3D view. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. you copy columns. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels | 55 .In the Revit dialog. beam systems. 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. beams. click No when asked if you would like walls that go up to this floor level to attach to its bottom. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. and the slab from Level 2 to the remaining levels of the structure. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels on page 55.

2 Draw a selection box around the entire view. and then click OK. select Walls.Extend the elevator shaft walls up to Level 5 1 Click inside the plan view. click ■ ■ 6 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. and enter ZF. Under Category. under Constraints. 3 On the Options Bar. do the following: For Top Constraint. . Notice the elevator shaft walls are displayed in the 3D view. do the following: Click Check None. click ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). 4 In the Filter dialog. Click Apply. 5 On the Options Bar. select Up to level: Level 5. 56 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

For Top Offset. select Structural Columns. Click Apply. click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. enter 4' 0". click ■ ■ ■ 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Copy columns up to Level 5 12 With the columns still selected. do the following: Click Check None. under Constraints. 10 On the Options Bar. and then click OK. click ■ ■ ■ . Notice the columns are extended to Level 5 in the 3D view. Click OK. and then click OK.Extend columns up to Level 3 7 Click inside the plan view. 14 In the Select Levels dialog. 8 On the Options Bar. and draw a selection box around the entire view. Notice the columns are extended to Level 3 in the 3D view. 9 In the Filter dialog. . Copying Elements to Multiple Levels | 57 . 13 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. select Level 5. Under Category. do the following: For Top Level. select Level 3.

on the Options Bar. Click Apply. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click ■ ■ ■ . 22 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. do the following: For Base Offset. 19 On the Options Bar. Copy remaining structural elements up to Level 5 18 Click inside the 3D view. and draw a selection box around the entire structure. select Floors.Change the top and bottom offset values 15 With the columns still selected. and then click OK. Click OK. Structural Beam Systems. click ■ ■ . 24 Enter ZF 58 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . ■ 21 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Structural Framing (Girder). 17 On the Design Bar. and Structural Framing (Joist). For Top Offset. enter 4' 0". 23 In the Select Levels dialog. click Modify. under Constraints. 20 In the Filter dialog. while pressing CTRL. Under Category. and then click OK. enter 0' 0'. do the following: Click Check None. select Level 3 and Level 5.

Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 2 Enter ZF. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Foundations In this exercise. and then you add a slab foundation under the elevator shafts.rvt. Place isolated foundations under each column 1 In the Project Browser. i_RST_EW_Modelling. double-click Level 1. under Structural Plans. click Modify. you add an isolated foundation under each structural column.25 On the Design Bar. Adding Foundations | 59 . Adding Foundations on page 59.

select Footing-Rectangular : 72" x 48" x 18". All the structural columns are highlighted. The structural columns are now supported by isolated foundations. 7 On the Toolbar.3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 5 On the Options Bar. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. click . Notice the footings located between the elevator shaft walls. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts. Delete 2 footings near the elevator shaft 9 On the View toolbar. 6 Draw a selection box around the entire structure. 4 In the Type Selector. 60 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Finish. click (Structural Column).

13 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Foundations | 61 . click Lines. You are now in sketch mode. 16 Click above the upper-left corner of the elevator shaft walls and sketch the slab so it surrounds the walls and columns as shown. select 12" Foundation Slab. and click OK. Place a slab foundation under the elevator shafts 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The foundation is now displayed in 3-dimensions. (3D).10 Select both footings. click Floor Properties. click Finish Sketch. 17 On the Design Bar. and press DELETE. click 19 Enter ZF. 12 On the Design Bar. click (Rectangle). for Type. click Foundation ➤ Slab. 15 On the Options Bar. 18 On the View toolbar. 14 On the Design Bar.

20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Finally. and modify its line properties. incorporating its line styles within the Revit Structure workflow. Structural Detailing In this lesson. you learn to import and modify an AutoCAD DWG file. 21 Proceed to the next lesson. Structural Detailing on page 62. You then import detail views from a Revit detail library project and place them in a new sheet. you create and annotate model-based details in a section view. You begin by importing an AutoCAD drawing as a reference section. Next. you place it in an existing project sheet. You have completed the Structural Modelling Express Workshop tutorial. 62 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 7 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. and open \Imperial\i_RST_EW_Working_with_AutoCAD.dwg. click Training Files. 3 Save the Import Line Weight file as line. do the following: ■ Select the Link option. but do not open it. 8 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. and select \Imperial\ i_RST_EW_Free_Standing_Wall_Section. Specify the DWG/DXF Color Number 7 to a line weight of 9. 2 In the Import Line Weights dialog. you import and link a 2-dimensional (2D) architectural AutoCAD drawing (DWG format) to use as a detail reference in a sheet. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Name the view Typical Wall Section. Import the DWG file 6 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. You begin by setting Revit Structure to associate line weights to the DWG/DXF color numbers of the imported AutoCAD file. Map line weights to DWG/DXF color numbers 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Setting ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. do the following: ■ ■ Specify the DWG/DXF Color Number 4 to a line weight of 5. Click OK.txt in the Data folder of the Revit Structure installation directory. Select a scale of 1/4”= 1'-0".rvt. ■ Click Save As. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 63 . Create a new drafting view 4 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 5 In the New Drafting View dialog.Importing/Linking a DWG File In this exercise.

Notice the imported detail is linked into the Typical Wall Section drafting view with the mapped line weights. select Auto . 64 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . This is the project training file that is used for all remaining exercises in this tutorial.rvt. select Black and White. For Positioning.■ ■ For Colors. ■ Click Open.Center to Center. 9 Enter ZF (Zoom to fit). 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View on page 65. and save the new project as i_RST_EW_Detailing. 11 Navigate to a folder of your preference.

click . This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. i_RST_EW_Detailing. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 1. select 1/4" = 1'-0". Select the Reference other view option.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Create the section reference 1 In the Project Browser. click Section. 2 On the View toolbar. Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View | 65 . Notice that Level 1 is bold. and draw a zoom box around grid locations A2 and A3. From the adjacent drop-down list of views. you create a section that references an existing detail view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. select Drafting View: Typical Wall Selection.Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View In this exercise.

2 In the Project Browser. move the cursor down.Unnamed. Placing a Detail in a Sheet on page 66. expand select Sheets (all). Add the detail view to a sheet 1 Close all views except for Level 1. and double-click S. Placing a Detail in a Sheet In this exercise. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt.5 Click outside the wall between grid lines 2 and 3. and click inside the north wall to place the section. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.1. 3 Enter WT (Tile Windows). 66 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . i_RST_EW_Detailing. you place the imported detail view on an existing sheet.

expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).Unnamed and the Level 1 structural plan views are now aligned horizontally in the drawing area. 6 Release the mouse button. and draw a zoom box around the empty space to the right of 5 In the Project Browser.Sheet S-1 . . Placing a Detail in a Sheet | 67 . click Level 1 on the sheet. 4 On the View toolbar. and drag Typical Wall Section onto the sheet view.

7 Move the cursor to align the detail outline in the empty space of the sheet. 68 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .Notice the detail drawing outline. 8 Click to place the detail.

In the structural plan view of Level 1. change it to S-1. . and click ENTER. click corner of the sheet.0. and draw a zoom box around the title block in the lower-right 10 Double-click the sheet number. Placing a Detail in a Sheet | 69 . Change the sheet number in the title block 9 On the View toolbar. notice the section callout has updated according to the detail and the sheet number.

Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 70 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . you change the line properties of the imported AutoCAD drawing to display differently in Revit Structure. i_RST_EW_Detailing. Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details on page 70. notice the section callout has updated according to the new sheet number. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details In this exercise. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save.In the structural plan view of Level 1.rvt.

click . 4 Click one of the lines representing the exterior surface of the wall cross-section. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 2 Click on the detail drawing. Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details | 71 . 3 On the Options Bar.Determine the drawing layer of the line 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Typical Wall Section.

13 Click Apply. 12 Click OK. 9 Click the CONT5 row.5 In the Import Instance Query dialog. Change the weight of the line 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 11 In the Line Graphics dialog. 8 Click the Imported Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 6 Click OK. 14 Click OK. 10 Click the Override button in the Lines column of the CONT5 row. for Weight. select 4. notice the Layer value CONT5. 72 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

TYPICAL CONCRETE WALL CONTROL JOINT DETAIL ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK. Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library | 73 . do the following: ■ ■ For Views. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library In this exercise. select Show all views and sheets.Notice that all lines associated with the CONT5 layer are now set to a line weight of 4. i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt.TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTING DETAIL Drafting View 002 . 16 Proceed to the next exercise.TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTINGS AT UTILITY OPENING DETAIL Drafting View 004 . and select \Imperial\ i_RST_EW_Typ_slab_detail_library. Import detail views from a Revit Structure detail library 1 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views.TYPICAL PLAN OF HORIZONTAL REINFORCING OF CONCRETE WALLS DETAIL Drafting View 009 . 3 In the Insert Views dialog. you import multiple detail views and place them on a new project sheet. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save.TYPICAL SLOPE BETWEEN FOOTING DETAIL Drafting View 003 . Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library on page 73.TYPICAL CONCRETE FOOTING WITHOUT PIER OR PILASTER DETAIL Drafting View 007 . click Training Files.rvt. 2 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. Select the following views to insert: ■ ■ ■ Drafting View 001 .

6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and drag 001 . 11 Click to place the detail.4 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 10 Move the cursor to position the detail outline on the sheet. Add the detail views to a sheet 8 In the Project Browser. 7 Click OK. 74 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click OK. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. 12 Use the same method to place the remaining views that were imported earlier in this exercise.TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTING DETAIL onto the sheet view. 9 Release the mouse button. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Notice the imported details are listed In the Project Browser under Views (All) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) Create a new sheet 5 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.

Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. i_RST_EW_Detailing. expand Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans. double-click Level 3 .O.rvt. 2 On the View toolbar. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section on page 75. and close all other views.. click .13 Click File menu ➤ Save. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section | 75 . 14 Proceed to the next exercise. Prepare a section view 1 In the Project Browser. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section In this exercise. and draw a zoom box around grid locations C1 and D1.S. you create a section view and crop it so that it can be displayed side by side with a related structural plan.T.

3 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 4 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 3/4" = 1'-0". 5 Click outside the wall, halfway between grid lines C and D, move the cursor to the right, and click inside the west wall to place the section.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Sections (Building Section), and double-click Section 1.

76 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

7 In the section view:

Locate the double-arrow control at the top of the crop area, and drag it down to just above the Level 3 - T.O.S. elevation line.

Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section | 77

Click and drag the double-arrow control handle at the bottom of the crop area to just below the Level 3 - T.O.S. elevation line.

Click the double-arrow control handle to the left of the crop area, and drag it to the right to reduce white space.

78 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

8 On the View Control Bar:
■ ■

Click Click

(Hide Crop Region). (Detail Level: Fine).

9 On the View toolbar, click wall.

, and draw a zoom box around the beam connection, slab, and

10 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans, double-click Level 3 - T.O.S., and close all other views. 11 Enter WT. Level 3 - T.O.S. and Section 1 are now aligned horizontally in the drawing area. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 13 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Cantilever to a Slab on page 79.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab
In this exercise, you add a cantilever to the existing slab using section and plan views. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt. Select a slab and enter sketch mode 1 In the section view to the right, select the slab.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab | 79

Notice the slab is highlighted in the plan view to the left.

2 On the Options Bar, click 4 Click Open View.

.

3 In the Go to View dialog, select Structural Plan: Level 3 - T.O.S. Notice the plan view has entered sketch mode. Add the cantilever 5 In the plan view, while pressing CTRL, select the vertical and arc segments of the slab.

80 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

6 On the Option Bar, for Cantilevers : Concrete, enter -9", for Steel, enter -2". 7 Press ENTER to apply the setting. 8 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Notice that the cantilever now extends from the slab. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. 10 Proceed to the next exercise, Coping Beam Connections on page 82.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab | 81

Coping Beam Connections
In this exercise, you will cope a beam where it joins a perpendicular beam. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt. Extend the beam flush to the connection 1 In the section view, select the beam as shown.

2 Unpin the selected beam by clicking on the pin.

3 Drag the control at the left of the selected beam to the left so the end of the beam is flush to the center of the perpendicular beam, as shown.

82 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

4 On the Toolbar, click

(Coping).

5 Select the newly extended beam, as shown.

6 Select the perpendicular beam, as shown.

Coping Beam Connections | 83

Notice the beam is coped to the shape of the beam it joins.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Detail Components on page 84.

Adding Detail Components
In this exercise, you will add a shear connector, a structural angle, an expansion bolt, and an L-angle welded connection to the section view. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt.

84 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

Add a shear connector 1 Close the Level 2 plan view, and maximize the Section 1 view. 2 On the View toolbar, click and slab. , and draw a zoom box around the top of the beam connection

3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 4 In the Type Selector, select Shear Connectors-Side : 3/4”. 5 Move the cursor to the top center of the beam as shown.

6 Click to place the shear connector.

Adding Detail Components | 85

Add a structural angle 7 In the Type Selector, select AISC Angle Shapes-Section : L8x6x7/16. 8 Move the cursor to the empty space below and to the right of the beam as shown.

9 Press the SPACEBAR once to rotate the angle 90° counterclockwise. 10 Click to place the angle. 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 12 Select the angle.

86 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

13 Click the vertical flip control.

Adding Detail Components | 87

14 On the Toolbar, click

(Align).

15 Click the bottom segment of the beam, as shown.

88 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

16 Click the angle, and then click the lock for the alignment.

Adding Detail Components | 89

17 Click the interior segment of the exterior wall, as shown.

90 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

18 Click the angle, and then click the lock for alignment.

Adding Detail Components | 91

as shown. click Detail Component.Add an expansion bolt 19 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 20 In the Type Selector. select Expansion Bolts-Side : 3/4”. 21 Move the cursor into the drawing area near the angle. 92 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 23 Align the bolt halfway along the left side of the angle. 22 Press the SPACEBAR twice to rotate the bolt 180° counterclockwise.

click Modify. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding Detail Components | 93 .24 Click to place the bolt. as shown. click (Move). 27 Click the center of the interior segment of the bolt head. 26 On the Toolbar.

94 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . as shown.28 Move the cursor to align with the outer segment of the angle.

29 Click to move the bolt flush with the angle. Adding Detail Components | 95 .

32 Move the cursor into the drawing area to the right of the beam connection.Add an L-angle connection 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 96 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . select L-Angle-Welded Connection-Elevation : L4x4x5/16. 31 In the Type Selector.

36 On the Options Bar.33 Click to place the L-angle. click (Align). click 38 Click OK. . 35 Select the L-angle. click Modify. 42 Click the left segment of the L-angle. change the value for L to 10” 40 On the Toolbar. 41 Click the right segment of the perpendicular beam. and then click the lock for the alignment. as shown. Adding Detail Components | 97 . as shown. 39 Click on the L-angle and drag it to the middle of the beam. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

Adding Final Annotation and Detailing on page 98. i_RST_EW_Detailing.43 Click File menu ➤ Save 44 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing In this final exercise. 98 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .rvt. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. you will add break lines and annotation to the section view. Add break lines 1 Enter ZF.

click Detail Component 3 In the Type Selector. 8 Click to place the break line. 9 Move the cursor onto the slab.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 99 . The crop area for the section view will be adjusted later. 7 Press the SPACEBAR twice to rotate the break line 180° counterclockwise. 4 Move the cursor onto the exterior wall above the slab. as shown. Notice the white space beneath the break line and the continuation of the wall beyond it. to the right of the coping detail. below the structural angle and expansion bolt. 5 Click to place the break line. 6 Move the cursor onto the exterior wall. as shown. as shown. select Break Line.

click ■ ■ (Show Crop Region). 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Drag the right double-arrow control to the left to obscure the slab and beam to the right of the break line. 100 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 13 On the View Control Bar. 11 Click to place the break line. 14 Select the crop region and adjust it as follows: Drag the bottom double-arrow control upward to obscure the wall below the break line. click Modify.10 Press the SPACEBAR 3 times to rotate the break line 270° counterclockwise.

Click to finish the first leader segment. as shown. ■ Type STRUCTURAL SLAB (SEE PLAN). click Text. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 101 . Click to finish the second leader segment. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor to the right. click Add annotation (Hide Crop Region). 18 Click in the drawing area. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Two Segments). and do the following: Click on the top segment of the slab. Move the cursor up and to the right. 17 On the Options Bar. away from the text box.15 On the View Control Bar.

click Modify. 20 Click on the bottom segment of the beam and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and to the right. 22 Click on the leader. 102 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click (Add Left Leader). Move the cursor to the right.19 Click the right drag handle and move it to the left to resize the text box. as shown. 23 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click to finish the first leader segment. Click to finish the second leader segment. Type STL BEAM (SEE PLAN).

25 Drag the dot control at the right of the text box to the left to resize the box. as shown.24 Drag the dot control of the new leader down so that it meets the bottom segment of the beam. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 103 .

31 On the Options Bar. and do the following: Click on the exterior segment of the wall. Type CMU WALL (SEE FOUND. Type L8X6X3/16 (LLH) x ‘1-0” LONG CLIPS 2 4’-0” O. click Text.26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. 104 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Move the cursor to the left. away from the text box. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Two Segments). (One Segment). Click to finish the second leader segment. and do the following: Click on the bottom segment of the structural angle. as shown. Move the cursor to the right. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Right). 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. away from the text box. click Text.C. click 32 On the Options Bar. 29 Drag the dot control at the right of the text box and move it to the left to resize the box. ANCHORED TO WALL USING 2-3/4” DIA. Click to finish the leader segment. SECTIONS FOR REINF. Move the cursor down and to the right. 33 Click in the drawing area. Click to finish the first leader segment. INFO). 28 Click in the drawing area. EXPANSION ANCHORS.

as shown. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save You have completed the Structural Detailing Express Workshop. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 105 .34 Drag the dot control at the left of the text box and move it to the right to resize the box.

106 .

they are not saved to project or template files. notification preferences. click Training Files. 9 In the New Project dialog. Notice that the drawing area is black. In the second lesson. Modifying General System Options In this exercise.rte. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Structure working environment. 2 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. 8 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you learn how to modify your Revit Structure 2009 working environment. you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Structure. under Template file. and your username when using worksets. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. 107 . 6 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project. you create an office template. and click OK. click the Graphics tab. which is independent of the project settings. select Invert background color. you modify the system environment. These settings control the graphics. you modify project settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within that project. 7 In the New Project dialog. 4 In the Options dialog. selection default options. journal cleanup options. Set graphics settings 1 Open Revit Structure. 5 Under Colors. Finally.Modifying Project and System Settings 3 In this tutorial. and set it as your default template. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. click OK. click Browse. and open Imperial\i_Tutorial_Default. In the first lesson.

For Tooltip Assistance. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Save Reminder interval. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. click Training Files. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 21 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. click the Graphics tab. 15 Under Notifications. click Structural Wall. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. select One hour. 11 In the Options dialog. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. 16 Click OK. 13 In the Color dialog. the elements causing the error display using this color. Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None. select One hour. click No. 20 On the Design Bar. Setting Options 25 Click File menu ➤ Open. 26 In the left pane of the Open dialog. This setting controls only the tooltips that display within the drawing area. select None. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. and open Imperial\i_RST_Settings. When an error occurs. select yellow.10 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and select the wall. 19 On the Design Bar. 14 Click the General tab. For Save to Central Reminder Interval. 22 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars. 24 When prompted to save. and click OK. 18 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area.rvt. click Modify. click the value for Selection Color. 108 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Modify. 12 Under Colors.

click Browse. Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template. 4 Click Cancel. and click Browse to select a template. For Selection Color. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). you specify your default file locations. 5 Under Default path for user files. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 29 Click the General tab and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. select the folder to save your files to by default. 6 In the Browse for Folder dialog. under Default path for family template files. Under Windows Username. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. click the File Locations tab. ■ ■ 30 Click OK. click Browse. 31 Click File menu ➤ Close. Your login name displays by default. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 3 Under Default template file. the family libraries. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify.27 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. do not save the changes. and select Normal for Tooltip Assistance. and click Open. Specifying File Locations on page 109. select your preferred Save Reminder interval. and the family template files. as well as the material and rendering libraries. Under Journal File Cleanup. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Structure session. If prompted. TIP To view a template. Specifying File Locations | 109 . These settings control location of important Revit Structure files such as your default project template. NOTE Revit Structure Journal files are normally found in C:\Program Files\Autodesk Revit Structure\Journals. 2 In the Options dialog. clear Invert background color. click Browse. These files are used primarily in the software support process. select Red. click the Graphics tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Graphics. you can start a new project with that template. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Structure sessions. 7 In the Options dialog. 28 In the Options dialog. The path may vary depending on your operating system or where you installed Revit Structure.

and change the name to My Library. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. click Place. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. However. and click on the right-side of the field. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. In the following illustration. (Add Library Path) that displays 110 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and you can create new libraries. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. centralized. 12 Click in the Library Path column for My Library. 11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. You can modify the existing library names and path. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane. saving. or loading a Revit Structure file. 8 Click Cancel. such as in a large. NOTE When you are opening. click (Add Value). 10 Under Libraries. structural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. Each library path points Revit Structure to a folder of families or training files. and notice the list of library names.This path is set automatically during the installation process.

and click Open. or families. Save. 22 Click (Remove Value) to delete the library. 14 Under Library Name. 16 Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. you may want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 17 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. click the My Library icon.13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Structure projects. 21 Under Libraries. Load. 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Notice that Revit Structure navigates directly to the library path. Specifying File Locations | 111 . templates. click My Library. 20 Click the File Locations tab. If you work in a large office. select My Library. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Structure Open. 15 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 18 Click Cancel. TIP The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog. and Import dialogs. and select it as the library path.

9 In the text editor. Specifying Spelling Options on page 112. 19 In the Options dialog. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 20 Under Settings. 4 Under Personal dictionary. 112 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 2 In the Options dialog. Click File menu ➤ Save. 5 In the text editor. click the Spelling tab. 11 In the Options dialog. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. to open a new Revit Structure project using the default 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click File menu ➤ Exit. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. scroll down the list of building industry terms. Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Structure. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 14 Click in the drawing area. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 23 In the Options dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the Spelling tab. This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 21 Under Personal dictionary. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Delete sheetmtl-CU. click Text. click Edit. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. click Edit. 3 Under Settings. click OK. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. click template. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click OK. 17 Click OK. do not save the changes. 12 On the Standard toolbar. If prompted.23 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 22 In the text editor. click Edit. click Modify. click Restore Defaults. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit.

Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 4 In the New Project dialog. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. Revit Structure uses the largest increment that represents less than 2 mm in the drawing area. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4'. Modifying Snap Settings on page 113. and open Imperial\i_Tutorial_Default. These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. click OK. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Browse. Modifying Snap Settings | 113 . 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. snapping reverts to the system default settings. 2 In the New Project dialog. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. and enter 1. In this exercise. You can turn snap settings on and off.. 8 In the Snaps dialog. As you zoom in and out within a view. 6 Under Dimension Snaps. work with snapping turned off. 7 Under Object Snaps. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project. click Training Files. you modify snap settings.rte. enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you perform an action. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. you modify snap increments. click Structural Wall.25 Proceed to the next exercise. under Template file. For example. click OK.

you can also use the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out. Notice that the dimension snaps at 4' increments. 16 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 114 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . If it does not. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 14 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. and move the cursor to the right. Sketch without snapping 12 While sketching the wall. zoom out until it does so. While sketching. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. This kind of dimension is called a listening dimension. 13 Click to set the wall endpoint. use the wheel button on your mouse.10 Click in the center of the drawing area. Notice that snapping is once again active. 11 While sketching a generic straight wall. it refers specifically to the dimension that appears while you are in the act of sketching. This is the increment that you added previously. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1'. If you do not have a wheel button. TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching. Use snapping shortcut keys 15 On the Design Bar. The listening dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and to numerical keyboard entries. and click Wall. and move the cursor to the right. Do not set the wall end point. click Modify.

and use it to complete the exercises. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. lines. You create and modify materials. 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. When you apply a material to a component. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 20 Move the cursor downward. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. 18 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. This list includes all materials available for use on model components. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 19 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 2 Scroll down. all materials that are part of that component family are also loaded into the project. and specify the wall endpoint.. Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. If you move the cursor along the wall. Modifying Project Settings on page 115. 25 Proceed to the next lesson. 3 Click (Duplicate). it will snap to the endpoints. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views. and object styles. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. and do not save the file. annotations. 23 Click OK. and open Imperial\i_RST_Proj_Settings. fill patterns.Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. and delete the value 1". 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. When a model component is loaded into a project. you create a new material and apply it to a model component. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. Finally. Using these options. the midpoint. and the wall edges. and select Concrete . 17 Enter SM. Modifying Project Settings | 115 . save the project file with a unique name. 22 Under Dimension Snaps. Make sure you also delete the semicolon.rvt. click Training Files.Precast Concrete for Name. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints.

Precast. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. The lower wall now uses the Concrete texture when you render it. click Edit/New. select Basic Wall: Foundation-Custom.O. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. In the steps that follow. and click . This layer represents the exterior finish of the wall. 10 In the Value field for Structure. 4 In the Duplicate Material dialog. 14 Click OK 3 times. 13 In the Materials dialog. 6 Select the lower exterior wall. and click OK. enter Concrete .Custom for the new wall name. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Apply the new material 5 In the Project Browser. It is currently assigned the material Concrete Cast-in-place concrete. click Modify. Fnd. 18 On the Design Bar. select Concrete-Precast for Name. click Edit. 17 In the Type Selector. and click OK. and select the remaining exterior walls. 11 Click in the Material field for Layer 2. 116 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Wall. 9 Enter Foundation . 8 Click Duplicate. . click This is the material you created previously. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. All of the exterior walls of this project are now changed to the new type. 16 Press CTRL. and click OK. 12 On the right side of the Material field. and double-click T.This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. 15 Select the left foundation wall.

22 In the Rendering dialog. right-click the Design Bar. the material that you created is displayed. Notice that the foundation walls are no longer gray and there is no material pattern applied in this view.19 On the View Toolbar. you create a pattern and apply it to this material. 20 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Creating and Applying Materials | 117 . and drag a zoom box around the area you want to render. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 118. The rendering process begins. do the following: ■ ■ For Quality Setting. zoom into the model. When it is finished. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. NOTE If you want to see the material in greater detail. Click Render. 21 In the drawing area. draw a pick box around the entire 3D image. In the following exercise. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the material was defined. click Rendering dialog. click . select Best. and select Rendering.

Notice that a concrete surface model pattern is not available. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. You can also dimension to model pattern lines.rvt. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. click Import. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. Drafting pattern density is fixed. expand Elevations. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. rotate. and double-click West. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. 24 Close the Rendering dialog. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. and save the file as i_Settings-in progress. click Show Model. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the wall. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. 8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Structure software.rvt. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a structure.23 On the Rendering dialog. such as steel. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 26 Navigate to a folder of your preference. you create a new pattern and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. click Custom. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 118. 118 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 3 Under Pattern Type. under Display. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. 5 Click New. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. choose Model. and move model patterns. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. You can align. i_Settings-in progress. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. 7 Under Custom. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

15 On the Options Bar. 10 Under Custom. It is currently assigned the material Concrete-Precast. Apply the concrete surface pattern 13 On the View Control Bar. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 119 . The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during installation. click Edit. 21 In the Fill Patterns dialog. select Concrete and enter 30 for Import scale. click Modify.TIP Typically. and click OK. click . 26 On the View Toolbar. your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RST 2009\Training. and click OK. The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog. select Model. adjust your zoom settings as needed. 11 Enter Concrete Surface for Name. select Model Graphics Style: Wireframe. . 17 In the Value field for Structure. click . This layer represents the exterior finish of the wall. 16 In the Element Properties dialog.pat from the Common folder. 27 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. 19 On the right side of the Materials field. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. 23 In the Materials dialog. to select a fill pattern. 24 Click OK 3 times. under Pattern Type. click OK. TIP If the pattern does not display. 12 Click OK. 22 Select the Concrete Surface model pattern. click 20 Under Surface Pattern. click in the Material field for Layer 2. 9 Select Concrete_Surface. 14 Select the wall. click . 18 In the Edit Assembly dialog. and click Open. click Edit/New. 25 On the Design Bar.

i_Settings-in progress. 120 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. you can change the type properties center chase width of one truss and then apply the change to all trusses. Apply object styles 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and double-click 3D. 2 On the keyboard. Controlling Object Styles on page 120. For example. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. use the shortcut keys ZF (Zoom to Fit) so the entire model fits in the drawing area. expand 3D Views.28 Click File menu ➤ Save. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each truss. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple components of the same type. there are often multiple trusses within a project. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings.

click Model Graphics Style. click Show categories from all disciplines. 8 In the Color dialog.3 On the View Control Bar. Controlling Object Styles | 121 . click OK. expand Walls. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. double-click the Line Color field. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Notice the line color is applied to the wall. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 122. 7 Under the Walls category. 5 In the Object Styles dialog. 6 Under Category. select Blue. and click Hidden Line. under Custom Colors. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save.

122 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Fnd. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the truss in plan view. expand Structural Framing. You then create a new line style to represent underslab drainage. now you must apply it. 8 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. enter Truss for Name. Click OK. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns.Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. Under Line Pattern.rvt. Apply the new line pattern 7 In the Project Browser. double-click T. There are 2 ways to apply the line style to the truss. 10 In the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.O. and click Hidden Line. Wall. and select Web Joist. select Truss. You have created a new line pattern. click New. or you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify the 3D view is active. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the truss appearance in a specific view. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. i_Settings-in progress. (example: plan view). click Model Graphics Style.

expand Structural Framing. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 123 . Select Blue for Line Color.11 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. This overrides the appearance of the truss only in the current view. Select Truss for Line Pattern. 15 Click OK twice. select Override and specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ Select 2 for Line Weight. 14 In the Select Line Style dialog. 13 Click Override for Line Style Projection. and select Web Joist for Visibility. 12 Click the Model Categories tab.

26 Draw 3 vertical lines. 24 Click outside the upper-left corner of the slab to begin the rectangle. 124 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . move the cursor to the bottom-right corner of the slab. equally spaced as shown below. under Floor Plans. 20 For the Underslab Drainage category. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Click . 25 In the Options Bar. Slab.O. double-click T. 21 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar.Create a new line style 16 In the Project Browser. Enter 2' 0" for Offset. and click to set the rectangle endpoint. Click . specify the following: ■ ■ Click Click . 19 Enter Underslab Drainage for Name. Select Red for Line Color. 18 In the Line Styles dialog. click New. 22 In the Type Selector. and click OK. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select 6 for Line Weight Projection. Select Double Dash 5/8" for Line Pattern. Click OK. 23 In the Options Bar. under Modify Subcategories. select Underslab Drainage. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. . click Lines.

4 Enter Linear . You also load a new beam annotation symbol and apply it to show the beam instance number rather than the beam type number. 32 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify the 3D View is active.rvt. 29 On the Model Categories tab. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save. 30 Click OK. 33 On the Model Categories tab. Modifying Annotations on page 125. click Duplicate. This turns off the visibility of the underslab drainage lines only in this view. and clear Underslab Drainage. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings.Imperial for name. and clear Underslab Drainage. i_Settings-in progress. expand Lines. and click OK. click . 34 Click OK. expand Lines. under Floor Plans. Modifying Annotations | 125 . Modifying Annotations In this exercise. 31 In the Project Browser. 28 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click the default value for Units Format. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 5 Under Text. double-click Level 1. Notice the underslab drainage lines appear in this view.27 On the View Toolbar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.

. click Tag ➤ By Category. Under Category. 21 Under Leader. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click T. 19 On the Design Bar. Fnd. and open Imperial\Structural Framing Tag. 15 Under Loaded Tags. A beam instance tag displays on the selected beam. click Structural Framing Tag. Structural Framing Tag. This tag is used when tagging using the Beams By Category option. verify that Create is clear. The remaining untagged beams are tagged. 22 On the View Toolbar. the other displays the instance value. Wall. click Dimension. click Training Files. 13 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. Notice that you can choose between the 2 beam tag types loaded into this project. notice the structural framing tag appears twice. Load a new beam tag 10 In the Project Browser. 7 Click OK twice. click Modify. and click OK. 126 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.rfa. 14 In the Tags dialog. Each tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. You have created a new dimension style. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.O. 17 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 Click Load. 20 Select the structural framing tag category with the loaded tag. under Floor Plans. Select Feet and fractional inches for Units. 18 Click a beam. scroll to Structural Framing Tag and notice that Structural Framing Tag is now the assigned tag. click Tag All Not Tagged. In the Type Selector. click 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. 16 Click OK.Imperial dimension available. notice that there is a Linear .

rvt. select Openings. 12 Click OK. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. you specify the project units of measurement . the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. 5 In the Format dialog. dimension values display using this setting. 3 In the Format dialog. click . Unless there is an override. and Detail Level Options | 127 . 8 Under Walls. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog. dimensions use these project settings. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. click the default value for Format. you modify the temporary dimension settings. click the default value for Format. Temporary Dimensions. Notice the 1/4" = 1' 0" view scale moved to the Medium column. select Centerlines 9 Under Doors and Windows. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. you modify the detail level assignments. select SF for Unit suffix. temporary dimensions now snap to the centerline faces and to the openings. Specifying Units of Measurement. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. In this table.Temporary Dimensions. In the first section. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.Temporary Dimensions. 6 Click OK. In this project. Specifying Units of Measurement. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. You do not select a view scale to move it. Specifying Units of Measurement. and click OK. In the second section.unless there is an override. select 0 decimal places for Rounding. 4 In the Project Units dialog. In the final section. and Detail Level Options on page 127. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. and click OK. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.24 Proceed to the next exercise. i_Settings-in progress. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. 2 In the Project Units dialog. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. under Length. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. and click OK. under Area. select To the nearest 1/16" for Rounding. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. When you create a new view and specify its view scale.

and open Common\c_Project_Browser. you open a project that was created using Revit Architecture to better demonstrate different phases of construction. Revit Structure project files do not include ceiling plans. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 128. NOTE In this exercise. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. and double-click Completed Project.13 Click File menu ➤ Save.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors 128 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 2 In the Project Browser. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. In this exercise.rvt. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is cumbersome. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Sheets (all). click Training Files.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order.

4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 14 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.■ Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. 16 Click the Views tab. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. under Sheets. and click OK. 21 In the Project Browser. 12 Click the Sheets tab. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. and click OK. and click New. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 8 Select Phase. expand Complete ➤ 3D Views and then expand Architectural and Structural. under Views. and click OK. click the Folders tab. On the Project Browser. select Discipline. select Type/Discipline. and click Apply. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. 6 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. notice that views are grouped based on phase. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 129 . In the Project Browser. expand each view type. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. expand each sheet set. 5 On the Views tab. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. and click OK. and click OK. expand both the Architectural and Structural category of views.

the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. and click Open. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. 5 Click OK. You can also save these settings in a template file. Depending on your needs. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from. Creating a Structural Template In this lesson. navigate to your preferred directory. and double-click Building Elevation. expand Views ➤ Elevations. Whenever you create a new project or template. and rendered scenes in a template. It is mostly conceptual and is designed as a road map with options for your consideration. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. If you want to save this file. If your work requires a variety of templates. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. and click OK. you select the starting point for your structural template. A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. When you create a new template based on an existing template. the same rules apply. Although Revit Structure provides many templates to choose from. When you create new projects. 3 Select the Structural Analysis-Default. In the lesson that follows. and Discipline. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. levels.Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. each is modified in a way to make it useful to a particular industry. dimensions styles. enter a unique file name. such as structural or construction. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. 4 In the New Project dialog. This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your structural template. a group of settings are used to specify the project environment. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. The lesson begins with choosing the right base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you would consider in order to make a template unique to your situation. In this lesson. named print settings. Type. 130 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .rte template. you create a Revit Structure template file and set it as your default template. preloaded families. and view names. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. when you create a new project. You can save Project Browser organization schemes. For example. you create an office template. select Project for Create new. Other than the default template. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. 2 Under Template File. 6 In the Project Browser. click Browse. The first step in creating your structural template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all.

TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise. there are additional commands on the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. such as the structural template. drag a zoom region around the level heads. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. Other templates. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. If you want to use a template other than the default. 8 In the Project Browser. 13 Click Open. If you have additional projects open. For example. Modifying Project Settings on page 131. select Project Template. Modifying Project Settings | 131 . close them. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. 12 Select a default template. 9 Click File menu ➤ Close. weights.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. In order to maintain office standards and reduce rework. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization View direction In addition to the list above. click Browse. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. Notice that the structural analysis template is more complex than the default template. you can select it now. are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. 14 Under Create New. you modify the project settings for your new template. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. When you create the material. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. 11 Under Template File. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. you can dictate its appearance in all views and renderings. and click OK. you can establish the settings that are common to most projects. in the drawing area.

14 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. see the previous lesson. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. Create and modify fill patterns 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. you can set line weights. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a structure. one for perspective model line styles. 7 Click OK when finished. and scroll through the list of categories. TIP When the material of a component is set to by category. 6 Create new fill patterns as needed. Modify line weights 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. specific modifications are not dictated.During this exercise. In the dialog. For more details on modifying these settings. 12 Click the Annotation Objects tab. or refer to the Help documentation. 132 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 3 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialogs. there are 3 tabs: one for model component line styles. and one for annotation symbol line styles. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry. You can add and delete view scales. 2 Scroll down the Name list. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. or modify existing patterns. The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of structural components. Observe the materials that are already defined. such as beams and columns in orthographic views. line patterns. 9 Click the Model Objects tab. 10 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. RELATED See Modifying Project Settings on page 115 for more information on creating new fill patterns. Modifying System Settings on page 107. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. rotate. 13 Modify categories. 5 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns. Specify object styles 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and materials for different categories and subcategories of components or imported objects. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. create new subcategories. line colors. In the Object Styles dialog. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. create and modify them as needed. 11 If necessary. You can align. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. and move model patterns. and create new subcategories as needed.

Modify line styles 29 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. angular. 25 Scroll through the list of line patterns. and specify the properties. 40 Select the Type drop-down list. 35 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. line color. Modify Dimension Styles 39 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 23 Click OK. click Duplicate. 27 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 32 Click OK. 38 Click OK. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. 37 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. 36 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 20 Modify existing line weights as needed. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. 19 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. create new line subcategories using line weights and line patterns previously modified or created. Modify arrowheads 33 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. modify the line weight. 30 For existing line categories. 22 Modify existing line weights as needed.The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects in perspective views. and dimensions. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. select it from this list. To see the details of a particular style. 42 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. Modifying Project Settings | 133 . 28 Click OK. select it from this list. 21 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 18 Add and delete view scales as needed. tags. and radial dimensions are modified separately. Modify line patterns 24 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. name the style. 41 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. 26 To modify a line pattern. 43 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. or line pattern as needed. 34 Select the Type drop-down list. such as section lines and dimension lines. To see the details of a particular style. name the style. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 31 If necessary. and click Edit. 16 Click the Model Line Weights tab. 17 Modify existing line weights as needed. Linear. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. and specify the properties. select it. click Duplicate.

Specify detail levels 61 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. Medium. and Angle settings. 62 Review the table. In the Tags dialog. 48 To load new annotation tags. when you add a structural framing tag with the tag option selected. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. 53 Click OK. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. click Format. 56 Click OK. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. 55 Specify the Slope option. For example. and choose a decimal symbol. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. 51 Under Length. TIP In the drawing area. Volume. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. 59 Under Doors and Windows. 54 Repeat the previous 2 steps for the Area. 58 Under Walls. 60 Click OK. 45 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. The detail level is based on view scale. and move view scales as needed. click Load. or Fine. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. Using the arrows between the columns. 134 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. 52 Modify the unit settings if necessary. the beam is tagged using the tag assigned to the structural framing category in this dialog. When you create a new view. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial.44 Click OK. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. 47 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. 49 After you have loaded the necessary tags. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. Specify project units 50 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. and click OK. Specify temporary dimensions 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. Modify loaded tags 46 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.

or Edit existing organization types. right-click any plan view of the Structural Plan Family. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is cumbersome. 74 In the Type Properties dialog. In a typical project. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. click View Direction. 69 Delete. or from the roof looking down (down direction).NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. engineers view plans using different orientations in different countries. In certain projects. you can view the project from the slab looking up (up direction). Modifying Project Settings | 135 . 68 Click the Sheets tab. 66 Delete. and select Properties. or Edit existing organization types. Rename. click the arrows between columns. click the Views tab. 71 Click OK. For example. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 65 In the Browser Organization dialog. click Edit/New. This parameter makes it possible for you to select a different view direction. 63 Click OK. 70 If necessary. Rename. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. create new browser organization types. 73 In the Element Properties dialog. 67 If necessary. To move the view scales. Modify project browser organization 64 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. Setting View Direction 72 In the Project Browser. create new browser organization types.

and framing tags. you may only want to add generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. Use the table below as a checklist. However. 136 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . In such a case. you can save rendered scene settings to a template. 76 Click OK to exit the dialogs. Links to associated tutorials are provided. and make modifications in each area as necessary. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 144. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 139. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. Additional project settings 77 On the Settings menu. This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. View Templates Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views. there are several additional commands that control the project environment. This could be useful for things such as title blocks. For example. Although these settings can be saved within a template.75 Use the down arrow to change the parameters to Up or Down. Each command is available on the Settings menu. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. You can find additional information in Help. If necessary.

3 To modify. select Load. select Edit/New. Modify beam type Create new beam type Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 137 . This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. select Edit/New. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. If you have not completed the previous exercise. modify. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. Depending on the intended use of this template. and click Open. you can set the symbolic representation settings for cutback distance. you can move onto the next component type. Modify type properties. enter a name. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. select it. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties to modify or add a new type. click Beam. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. Goal: Load new beam type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog.Settings Menu Command Structural Settings Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. do so before starting this exercise. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 137. 78 Proceed to the next exercise. In the steps that follow. Obviously. brace symbols. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. you do both. you would have to scroll through a lengthy list of beams every time you changed a beam within a project. Use the instructions in the table below to perform these steps. Click Duplicate. if you loaded every beam type you could find. If this selection is satisfactory. Although the options are endless. notice the list of beams is already loaded. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. See Modifying Structural Settings on page 142. create. and column symbols. Make modifications. 2 In the Type Selector. Although this is possible. Navigate to the directory containing the beam type. titleblocks. For example. If necessary. there are some important thoughts to consider. and click OK. or add to this selection. you should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. and click OK. you could load detail components. click on the Options Bar. It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file. and click OK. or load a new beam type. you may want to delete. and beams. You may want to modify slab types to add a more diverse selection within the template. or use the Project Browser to delete an existing type. However. In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In the Element Properties dialog. You can load any family or group into a template. In addition. For example.

load. Use Project Browser to modify families 7 In the Project Browser. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. Loading from the library is quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. 13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 139. right-click the component. Press ESC twice to return to the template. expand Families. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template you started with. 11 To load a titleblock. create. This titleblock is currently part of the template. and select the titleblock type. You may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. To do so. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types.) 9 Expand the titleblock. click Load. click Preview. Notice it has Revit in the upper-right corner. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. 8 Expand Annotation Symbols.4 Click OK. 12 Click OK. 138 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that each family category is listed. and click Delete.

right-click. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. select the view. 6 Click OK. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control the initial appearance of the views. you will first modify view templates. Discipline. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. TIP To select the view template directly from the Project Browser. You can also apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. and double-click Level 1. rename or duplicate the view template. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. 2 For Name. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. In addition. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. you create the views required for your template. and make modifications. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. View Range.Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. you created new projects using different templates. you save time and increase consistency. 3 Specify each value as needed. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list. and select Apply View Template. Detail Level. At any time. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. Modifying Views and View Templates | 139 . In this exercise. In this exercise. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. 4 If necessary. expand Views ➤ Structural Plans. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. select Structural Framing Plan. you can apply a view template to any view.

click View menu ➤ View Properties. If necessary. 28 Rename the 3D View. You can also duplicate or delete the view. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. the view is not linked to the template in any way. or delete this view. and select Rename. To do so. 21 In the Options Bar. When the view template is applied the view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. After the template is applied. click 26 In the Project Browser. under Elevations.Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. Create 3D views 25 To add 3D views to the template. 17 In the Project Browser. TIP To apply the template to multiple views. or delete them as needed. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. double-click Level 2. if desired. 18 In the Project Browser. duplicate. You can rename this view. 23 Rename and reposition the level as needed. under Structural Plans. This option means that every time a new plan view is created. and click OK. 19 In the Project Browser. Then right-click and select Apply View Template. click Level on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and notice the context menu includes options to rename. 140 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice the level names have blue titles for the associated plan views. Make sure you are still in the Level 2 view. and apply the appropriate template. under Floor Plans. 24 Create additional levels as needed. 20 To add additional levels to the template. review the existing floor plans. 27 In the Project Browser. and click OK. double-click Building Elevation. select Make Plan View. duplicate. right-click {3D}. right-click Level 1. click Apply. 11 Click Apply. open the view from the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. review the Structural plans and elevations. and press Ctrl while selecting additional views. 22 Add the new level within the elevation view. 12 In the Project Browser. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. The associated floor plan will use the Structural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. 9 Select the Structural Framing Plan template. 15 If you modified any other view templates. nor is there a limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. on the View toolbar. this view template will be used to set the initial view properties. Black levels have no associated views. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. expand 3D Views. 14 Select the Structural Plan template. select the view in the Project Browser. you may want to modify the view properties of any new views. Rename. under 3D Views. Create and modify views 16 In the Project Browser.

click . You may want to add schedules to a template. select and order required fields. 34 If you want to add schedules to your template. On the Filter tab. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. modify settings. and click OK. on the View toolbar. and modify their properties accordingly. Modifying Views and View Templates | 141 . select the category type. 31 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View icon and select Options.29 To create additional 3D views. Save the view 32 To save the view. you can modify the Steering Wheel visibility and appearance. click Dynamically Modify Views 30 On the View toolbar. click Schedule/Quantities. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. This tool provides freeform navigation for exterior and interior viewing. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. This can save time and ensure office standards are maintained. Create and modify schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Using this dialog. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views ➤ 3D Views. click . supply a view name. assign filters. and click OK. The Steering Wheel is displayed in the drawing area.

modify settings. click the Symbolic Representation Settings tab. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock.■ ■ On the Formatting tab. and click OK. 40 To rename or renumber the sheet. You are prompted to select a titleblock. and click Rename. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. select one. select the titleblock and delete it. Modifying Structural Settings on page 142. 142 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click the sheet in the Project Browser. beams. You can still add views to the sheet. You may want to add symbolic settings to a template. and click OK. 36 Click OK. 37 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. You can also create custom brace symbols for use in plan views and for parallel line offset distances. On the Appearance tab. You may want to consider adding the settings that you use most often. 41 Create new sheets as needed. This can save time and ensure office standards are maintained. Create custom symbolic representations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. and columns. After the sheet is created. click Sheet. select the default titleblock. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. If you have already loaded your titleblocks into the template. 39 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. Modifying Structural Settings You can create custom cutback distances for braces. To do so. Add sheets to the template 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. or on the sheet itself. double-click the sheet number. To later add a titleblock to a sheet. and modify their properties accordingly. modify settings.

The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers.3 Under General.) Parallel line offset: Enter the symbolic distance for the parallel line offset. ■ 4 Under Brace Symbols. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. Revit Structure presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. enter the desired values for the following cutback distances: ■ Symbolic brace/beam cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the brace/beam to the center of the adjoining beam. ■ 5 Click OK. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN. Symbolic column cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the column to the beam endpoint. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program installation directory. Modifying Import/Export Settings | 143 . Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. and are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 143.txt). The Export Layers command maps Revit Structure categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. specify the desired line representation and offset as follows: ■ Plan representation: Select the desired symbolic line type for plan representation (Line or Line with Angle. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. When you import a DWG or DXF file.

name the file. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayersdgn. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. Using shared parameters.txt) for MicroStation.16). When you import a DWG or DXF file. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program installation directory. name the file. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 144. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Structure line weight. click Save As. and unlike shared parameters. They cannot be shared with other projects. and so on. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. and click Save. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight (values from 1 . doors. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. you could use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. and related multi-category tags and schedules. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. 9 Click Save As. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. 5 For each category. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. windows. name the file. and click Save. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. you refine the template further by setting up shared parameters. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer Name and Color ID Cut Layer Name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. For example. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. and click Save. you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. Multi-Category Tags employ shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. When you create a multi-category schedule. 144 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . for example. These settings are retained within the project template. 8 In the dialog. they cannot be used to tag objects. Project parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. therefore. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. they become the set mappings for the project. When scheduling. When you save these mappings to a text file. project parameters.2 For each category. click Save As. and so on.

and select a shared parameter. 2 Click Create. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. 22 Add project parameters as needed. This allows you to name the external parameter file. Create and load multi-category tags 29 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. click New. under Groups. and click OK. 17 Under Discipline. click New. 20 Select the element categories to which this parameter applies. 11 For each parameter group. detailed instructions are not supplied because each office has a unique set of needs. add required parameters. 6 Create as many groups as needed. select Project parameter. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK when finished. 21 Click OK. and specify the categories to which this parameter applies. 24 Click Select. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters.In this exercise. 28 Add shared project parameters as needed. 23 To add a shared project parameter. select a parameter discipline type. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. enter a parameter name. 14 Click Add. Creating Named Print Settings. 26 Specify whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter. If this template will be used by multiple people within an office. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 27 Click OK. 18 Under Type. you can create a list of parameters. 3 Name and save the file. For each parameter group. 19 Specify whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 145 . 25 Click OK. select a group to which you want to add parameters. and specify the Type. After the file is named. 16 Under Name. If a file already exists. click Add. 8 Under Parameters. 10 Click OK. and select Shared Parameter. 7 Under Parameter group. you can skip this exercise and move on to the last exercise of this lesson. 5 Enter the group name. you may want to save the file to a network location. you can begin creating parameter groups. select a parameter value type. 9 Name the parameter.

or consult the Help documentation. 34 Under Name. you create named print settings. 33 Select <Multi-Category> for Category. 38 Proceed to the final exercise. 36 When you have completed the schedule. The tag is now part of the template. and add them to your default template file. and click OK.For information on creating multi-category tags. enter a name for the schedule. Creating Named Print Settings In this exercise. select the tag. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. Creating Named Print Settings on page 146. paper placement. Create multi-category schedules 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 Under Name. 146 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are included under Available fields. make minor modifications if necessary. 31 Navigate to the directory that contains the tag you want to load. For each printer. By creating named settings within the template. you need only select a setting. and click Open. This can be beneficial if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. select the first printer for which you want to create named settings. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. and the percent of actual size. You can also create named settings for printing to a DWF writer. After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor. click OK. 37 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. 30 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 35 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. and print. click Schedule/Quantities. you can load them into the template. you can set options such as sheet sizes.

7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. and create additional settings as needed. 4 Click Save As. Creating Named Print Settings | 147 . 6 Modify the printer settings.3 Under Settings. click New. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. 5 In the New dialog. click Setup. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer.

Use the template 16 To use the template. 22 Next to Default template file. click Setup. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. 15 Name the template. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. 19 Click OK. 18 Select the template. 21 Click the File Locations tab. The only remaining task is to save it. loaded components. click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 23 Navigate to the template location. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Open. 11 Click OK when finished. and saved them to a template. This can provide a good starting point for a template. and save it as a template file. 14 Under Save as type. 17 Select Browse. Your template is complete. If you need to share this file with others. click Browse. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. and create new settings for this printer. and click Open. you modified settings. you should save it to a network path. In this lesson. 24 Click OK. 148 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . You can also set this template as your default template. select Template Files (*. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. TIP Another way to create a template is to delete all model geometries from an existing project.rte). you help ensure the office standards are maintained and reduce repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. In addition. By investing the time to individualize your template. select a different printer. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF writer. and click Save. Set the template as your default template file 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.9 In the Print dialog. select it.

AutoCAD Architecture. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to import or link a 2-dimensional (2D) drawing created in AutoCAD for use as a background. Notice that Level 2 is bold. by importing or linking an existing Autodesk architectural project created in AutoCAD. 149 . 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. and Revit Architecture. In the next tutorial Creating a Structural Model on page 161. you use these columns to complete the structural framing. and select Imperial\i_STR_CSM_Level2. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.dwg. click Training Files. click Training Files.Starting a New Project 4 In this tutorial you begin your structural model in Revit Structure 2009. Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File In this lesson. NOTE For training purposes. The imported file is used as a background template for creating the structural elements of the model. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans. Importing/Linking Drawing Files In this lesson.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to import or link to files from different drawing programs. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ Select Link and Current view only. some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction with architectural columns. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_1. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area.

Selecting Link (instead of import) allows you to view.NOTE Selecting Current View Only prevents the DWG file from appearing in all views. copy. For Positioning. select Auto . 5 In the drawing area. stairs and elevator opening symbols. click the imported/linked file. The file becomes view specific and will behave like an annotation. ■ ■ ■ For Colors. and rotate the view as one object. select Black and White. However. drag.Center to Center. you cannot select individual elements in the linked model. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. paste. 6 On the Options toolbar. click drawing area. Click Open. Exterior facade outlines. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 150 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project .

In the next tutorial. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_1. and click OK. Notice that Level 2 is bold. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. and select Imperial\i_RST_Import_ADT. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File | 151 . select Export to AutoCAD. click Training Files.dwg. and select the latest available format. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. Before exporting the file from AutoCAD Architecture. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. NOTE For training purposes. you learn how to import a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in AutoCAD Architecture for use as a background. 9 Select Halftone for the value of i_STR_CSM_Level2. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns. Bind all external reference files (xrefs) to make the architectural data visible to the engineer after export. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File In this lesson. a new training file is supplied.rvt. expand Views (all). On the File menu. the file should be prepared as follows: ■ ■ Proxy graphics should be enabled by setting the system variable to 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the Imported Categories tab. In the next tutorial.dwg. select each file and select Insert for Bind Type. and expand Structural Plans. In the Xref Manager dialog. some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction with architectural columns. ■ Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you use these columns to complete the structural framing.7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. You can save the open file if you wish. click Training Files.

Exterior facade outlines. select Auto . 6 On the Options toolbar. stairs. click the Imported Categories tab. 5 In the drawing area. click the imported/linked file. For Positioning.Origin to Origin. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. click Revit Structure drawing area.4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Colors. and elevator opening symbols. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 152 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . select Invert. Click Open. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view.

11 In the drawing area. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ . Under Constraints. click Partial Explode. enter -1' 0' for Base Offset.9 Select Halftone for the value of i_RST_Import_ADT. and click OK. click the linked file. 10 On the View toolbar. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click . Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File | 153 . and on the Option Bar. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns.dwg. 13 Select any column. 12 On the Options toolbar.

walls. Link a Revit Architecture file 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. You also learn how to use the Copy/Monitor feature to provide project coordination between architects and structural engineers. In the next tutorial. select a template file. select Project under Create New.Origin to Origin. Linking a Revit Architecture File In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_STR_CSM_Revit. Open a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. you learn how to link to a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in Revit Architecture for use as a background. 6 Click Open. click Training Files. levels. and floors from the original design and monitor any changes made to those elements. and click OK. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. Notice that Level 2 is bold. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. You can save the open file if desired. 15 Close the Element Properties dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. 4 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog.Notice the column adjusts to the change. select Auto . 5 In the Add Link dialog. a new training file is supplied. 154 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . for Positioning.rvt. You can copy grids. columns.

9 On the Options toolbar. Linking a Revit Architecture File | 155 .Exterior facade outlines. click the linked file. 11 Click the imported Revit drawing. The Design Bar changes to Copy/Monitor mode Set options 12 On the Design Bar. This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. stairs and elevator opening symbols. click Options. 8 In the drawing area. click Revit Structure drawing area. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 10 Click Tools menu ➤ Copy/Monitor ➤ Select Link. 7 Enter ZF.

14 In the Columns dialog. Copy grids 16 In the Project Browser. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. click OK to close the Copy/Monitor Options Dialog. Also. you can exclude element types you do not want to copy. and while pressing CTRL. Therefore. Elements available for monitoring are separated into 5 categories (Levels. under Additional Copy Parameters. under Structural Plans. 17 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. Walls. 13 In the Copy/Monitor Options dialog. click the Columns tab. select Split Columns by Levels. and Floors). When finished. 18 Click the grid to be copied/monitored. click Copy. select Level 2.The Copy/Monitor Options dialog opens. Grids. 15 Set the other parameter as desired. Each tab provides various parameters that can be set for that specific element. Columns. A column may span from level 1 to level 10 of a structure and may present a problem when the analytical model is generated. NOTE Architectural columns typically extend through multiple layers of a model. columns need to be split at each level. On each tab the Original Type column identifies the type for the Revit Architecture file. 156 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . and the New Type for the corresponding element available in the template selected. To select more than one grid. make selections.

After you select the grid. NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. press CTRL. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. and that the type from the new project will be used. Copying levels 19 In the Project Browser. click OK. and that the type from the new project will be used.NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. double-click Building Elevation. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. and select each level. The warning can be ignored. click Copy. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. click OK. 20 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. 21 Click the level to be copied/monitored. Linking a Revit Architecture File | 157 . under Elevations (Building Elevation). To select more than one level.

The warning can be ignored. under Structural Plans. 24 Click the structural elements to be copied/monitored. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. 158 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . and columns 22 In the Project Browser. click Copy. click Finish Mode. The warning can be ignored. To select more than one element. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. Change the structural usage of the copied elements 26 Select a structural wall to be copied/monitored. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. press CTRL. Copy structural walls. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. and on the Options Bar.After you select each level. 25 On the Design bar. click . and that the type from the new project will be used. 23 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. floors. select Level 1. NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. and select each element. click OK. After selecting each element.

the structural usage parameter must be changed in the Element Properties dialog. NOTE For all copied/monitored structural walls. so that Revit Structure will enable the analytical projection plane feature for those elements.27 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 In the Manage Links dialog. and floors. 28 Select a floor to be copied/monitored. columns. and click OK. The linked Revit file is displayed. Click OK. click the Revit tab. and click OK. check the value for Structural. ■ Select Overlay. Links will appear in the file they are linked into. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ Linking a Revit Architecture File | 159 . click . The link will not follow the host if it becomes linked into another file. Manage links 30 Click File menu ➤ Manage Links. and on the Option Bar. click Reference Type. 31 In the Manage Links dialog. select Bearing for Structural Usage. Select Attachment to make a link visible when its host document is linked into another file.

Project Coordination on page 461. NOTE All copied elements are monitored for possible changes. the updated Revit Architecture file is reloaded into Revit Structure. 34 Proceed to the next tutorial. In a later tutorial.33 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new training file is supplied. 160 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . In the next tutorial. You can save the open file if you wish. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. The coordination monitor function provides notification that updates have occurred.

Creating a Structural Model In this lesson. and then copy this framing to other levels. You copy columns and use the paste-align command to add structure to other levels. you begin by adding columns from Ground Level to Level 2. You also learn how to splice the columns. you create a structural model using the tools available in Revit Structure 2009.Creating a Structural Model 5 In this chapter. After you copy columns. you add horizontal framing to an area of Level 2. 161 .

the imported drawing is a halftone. click .Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing In this exercise. which you use as a background drawing for placing columns. . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 162 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Notice the grid line is highlighted with a blue value within the grid head. click Grid. and enter A. 5 Click the value in the grid head. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 Select the left vertical grid line. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. click Training Files. click structural model. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 1 On the View toolbar. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Grids.

. 9 On the View toolbar. Notice it is grid L. Zoom in and out as needed. The last vertical grid is K.As you select subsequent grid lines. 7 Select the remaining vertical grid lines moving from left to right. change the value to J. 8 When you get to grid I. Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 163 . click structural model. 6 Select the next vertical grid line to the right of grid line A. they are labelled in alphabetical sequence. and draw a zoom region around the upper-right corner of the 10 Select the upper horizontal grid line. Notice it is labeled B.

click Grid. and draw a zoom box around the atrium.11 Click the blue value within the grid line L head. The bottom grid should be grid 5. 13 Select the remaining 3 horizontal grids. click . 164 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Draw a grid using the arc tool 15 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). 16 On the View toolbar. 18 On the Options Bar. 19 Click the column to select the arc start point. and enter 1 for the new value. Notice that the sequencing has adjusted from alphabetical to numeric. 14 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click . 12 Select the next grid line below grid 1.

21 Click the column to set the arc radius.20 Click the column to select the arc endpoint. Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 165 .

24 Drag the arc endpoint approximately as shown. click Modify. 166 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Extend grid 23 Drag the arc start point approximately as shown. and select the grid.22 On the Design Bar.

The next exercise uses a new training file. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click Training Files.25 Click File menu ➤ Close. Adding Structural Columns on page 167. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Place columns at grid intersections 1 Enter ZF.rvt. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you load a new column type from the Revit Structure Library and add columns at each grid intersection. These columns extend from an elevation to a splice elevation just above Level 2. Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. To save changes. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. click File menu ➤ Save As. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Columns. Adding Structural Columns | 167 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

click Structural Column. 6 On the Options Bar. NOTE When you use the Grid Intersection tool to place columns. NOTE If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar does not display. select W-Wide Flange-Column: W10x33. Revit Structure places the tops of the columns at the current level and the bases of the columns at the level below. and click Modelling. 5 Select the entire grid by drawing a pick box around it. 4 In the Options Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. 168 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . right-click in the Design Bar.Level 2 plan view 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Finish. click .

Level 3 should be 10' 0" above Level 2. H5. click ■ ■ ■ . H2. Create new levels 13 In the Project Browser. Level 4 should be 10' 0" above Level 3 with an elevation of 30' 0". and press DELETE. K1 G2.7 Press ESC. C5 Specify base and top of column elevations 9 Right-click the column located at C2. Adjust location of the grid 18 Select grid head A. A new structural plan view by the same name is also created and listed within the Project Browser. K4 A5. Under Constraints. J5. and then specify the endpoint aligned with the existing level heads on the right side. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 16 Use the same method to create Level 4. Notice the new level is named Level 3. 11 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. you can adjust the height by clicking the temporary dimension and modifying the level elevation. Notice that columns are placed at each grid intersection. K5 K3. 8 Select the columns listed below. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding Structural Columns | 169 . 17 On the Design Bar. click Level. TIP You may have to zoom into the grid intersection to right-click one of the columns. click Modify. In addition. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. there are a few extraneous columns on grid line intersections that are exterior to the structure. J2. Click OK. and click Select All Instances. and double-click South Elevation. enter 2' 0" for Top Offset. H1. 19 Adjust the zoom settings so you can select the grid control below the grid head. J1. B5. K2 G5. specify a start point for the third level at a distance of 10' 0" above Level 2. click Modify. 15 On the left side of the elevation. enter 2' 0" for Base Offset. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ G1. which are outside of the structure footprint. NOTE If necessary.

25 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Adding Horizontal Framing on page 171. To save changes. and click OK. and click OK. click Check None. click . under Structural Plans. 170 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 31 Proceed to the next exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. All of the structural columns in the model remain selected. 29 In the Project Browser. 23 On the Options Bar. select Level 3 and Level 4. TIP Press and hold CTRL when making multiple selections. double-click South Elevation. double-click Level 2. 26 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. under Elevations (Building Elevation). select Structural Columns. 28 On the Design Bar. 27 In the Select Levels dialog. Copy the columns to new levels 21 In the Project Browser. 22 Draw a pick box around the entire structural model. click File menu ➤ Save As. click Modify. or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file.20 Drag the grid control above Level 4 as shown. Spliced columns display from Ground Level to Level 4 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. 24 In the Filter dialog.

double-click Level 2. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Framing. click Beam. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you frame 4 bays of Level 2 by adding horizontal members and a steel deck. Specify Girder for Usage. Add girders 4 On the View toolbar. Click Grid. Adding Horizontal Framing | 171 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Structural Plans. click Modify. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. click Training Files. TIP Place the cursor over a grid to display the grid name in a tooltip. Specify beam type 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. 6 Select grid lines H and J.rvt. click . 8 On the Design Bar. click Finish. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. 7 On the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure.Adding Horizontal Framing In this exercise.

delete the 2 small beam sections between grid lines 4 and 5.9 On grids H and J. select Other. for z-Direction Offset Value. 172 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 16 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Click OK. click Modify. NOTE In the following image. Under Constraints. 10 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Set top of steel 14 Right-click the girder between H3 and J3. enter -0' 7". 13 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Select Levels dialog. select Level 3 and Level 4. 11 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. click Beam. and double-click East Section . 15 On the Options Bar. for z-Direction Justification. Copy the girders to levels above 17 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 18 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Specify Girder for Usage. 12 Select a column center. expand 3D Views. framing the bays with girders.Perspective. and click Select All Instances. 21 In the Project Browser. click ■ ■ ■ . framing tag visibility was turned off and the beam visibility increased for training purposes. and draw a girder from column to column. 20 Click OK.

click Sketch. you can select the section crop view and drag its borders to adjust the extents of the view. The next exercise uses a new training file. select Fixed Distance for Layout Rule. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. 5 On the Design Bar. enter 6' 0". Notice the copied beams on Levels 3 and 4.NOTE If necessary.rvt. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. under Structural Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click Level 2. Sketch the beam system 1 In the Project Browser. click Structural Beam System Properties. you add beam systems to Level 2. Adding Beam Systems on page 173. select Center. 7 Click OK. Adding Beam Systems In this exercise. For Spacing. For Beam Type. click Training Files. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Adding Beam Systems | 173 . click Beam System. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams. click File menu ➤ Save As. For Justification. Under Pattern. or close the exercise file without saving changes. To save changes. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Beam_System.

9 Select the girder between H3 and J3. click Pick Supports. The longitudinal axis of the beam system members will be placed parallel to these lines.8 On the Design Bar. 11 Select the vertical girder between J2 and J3. NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the H3-J3 girder represent the beam system direction. In the next step you edit the beam direction. Then select the 3 girders that surround the upper-left bay. 10 On the Design Bar. 174 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Beam Direction.

click Finish Sketch.12 On the Design Bar. Adding Beam Systems | 175 . the framing tag visibility has been turned off for training purposes. NOTE In the image above and all subsequent images.

enter -0' 7" for Elevation. 15 On the Design Bar. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22.13 Use the same method to sketch a beam system for the bay to the right using the following beam system property values in the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. For Number of Lines. 14 When specifying the beam direction. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. select the girder between J2 and J3. click Finish Sketch. Under Pattern. 176 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . specify 2. For Beam Type.

click Beam System. 18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. For Number of Lines. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ .Automatically create a beam system 16 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. Click OK. specify 3. 21 Select the top girder in the lower-left bay. 20 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 23 Select the top girder in the lower-right bay. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. 22 Click to place the beam system. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. under Structural Plans. Under Pattern. For Beam Type. 19 On the Options Bar. 17 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams. Adding Beam Systems | 177 .

178 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Modify. and press TAB until the beam system highlights. Be sure that you have selected a beam system (not just a beam) when copying elements to other levels. 25 On the Design Bar.24 Click to place the beam system. NOTE A beam system displays with dashed lines. You will need to cycle through some of the elements in your model by pressing TAB as explained above. Copy the beam systems to levels above 26 Hold the cursor over grid line H of the lower-left beam system.

under 3D Views.Perspective.Beam system displays with dashed lines 27 Right-click on the beam system. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Adding Beam Systems | 179 . and save the exercise file with a unique name. double-click East Sections . Notice the copied beam systems. select Level 3 and Level 4. Adding a Composite Deck on page 180. or close the exercise file without saving changes. To save changes. 31 Click OK. click File menu ➤ Save As. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. The next exercise uses a new training file. and click Select All Instances. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 33 Click File menu ➤ Close. 32 In the Project Browser.

3 On the Design Bar. you add a composite deck to Level 2. Add composite deck 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Design Bar.rvt. under Structural Plans. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Floor Properties. 8 On the Design Bar. click Slab. select 3" LW Concrete on 2" Metal Deck. 5 Click OK. click Finish Sketch. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Under Constraints. 7 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior-most model lines of the glazing as snap points. enter -0' 2" for Height Offset from Level. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Deck. click Lines. click Training Files.Adding a Composite Deck In this exercise. double-click Level 2. and then sketch along the girders. 180 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

under 3D Views. The filled half-arrows of this symbol represent the span of the deck. 11 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and click OK. Adding a Composite Deck | 181 . Copy the slab to other levels 9 Select the slab. 14 In the Project Browser. 10 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. double-click East Section . select Level 3 and Level 4.Perspective. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 12 In the dialog. 15 Click File menu ➤ Close.Revit Structure provides a deck span direction symbol when the deck is placed.

select L-Angle: L8x6x5/8. click Brace. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Create the framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. you add vertical bracing to a bay. under Elevations (Interior Elevations). 7 Add a brace from Level 2 to Level 3: ■ Enter SE (keyboard shortcut for snap to endpoint).To save changes. Adding Bracing In this exercise. click Framing Elevation. 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Structural Plans. 4 In the Project Browser. 3 Move the cursor on or near the grid line between 4H and 4J. 6 In the Type Selector. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Bracing. click File menu ➤ Save As. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and when it highlights.rvt. double-click Level 2. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Elevation 1-a. Adding Bracing on page 182. 182 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and then click the left endpoint of the Level 2 beam for the start point. click to place the framing elevation symbol in the direction shown. click Training Files. The next exercise uses a new training file. Use the Status Bar to see the snap point.

8 Use the same method for the opposite brace. Adding Bracing | 183 . 9 Repeat these steps to add bracing from Level 3 to Level 4.■ Enter SM (keyboard shortcut for snap to midpoint). you can select the section crop view and adjust the left/right extents to see the columns on grids H and J. NOTE If necessary. and then click the midpoint of the beam at Level 3 for the endpoint.

Perspective. The next exercise uses a new training file. under 3D Views. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Shear_Walls.10 In the Project Browser. 184 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . To save changes. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding Shear Walls In this exercise.rvt. Notice the braces in the back/right of the structural model. double-click East Section . 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add shear walls 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. under Structural Plans. 2 Zoom in on the east stair in grid location F3-G4. click Training Files. you create shear walls that surround one of the stairwells. click File menu ➤ Save As. Adding Shear Walls on page 184.

For Depth. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Select Chain. you can select a wall and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the wall to a particular location.10" Concrete. 6 Sketch 4 walls. tracing over the centerline of the walls in the imported drawing file. click Structural Wall. select Basic Wall: Exterior . Adding Shear Walls | 185 . TIP After sketching the walls. specify Ground Level. 4 In the Type Selector.3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

9 On the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. under Structural Plans. To save changes. and click OK. or close the exercise file without saving changes. TIP During selection. and save the exercise file with a unique name. double-click Level 2. click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 On the View toolbar. 8 Select all 4 walls. click Training Files. click . Adding Isolated Foundations on page 186. click . 3 Draw a pick box around all structural elements. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Foundation. 186 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click . specify Up to level: Level 4 for Top Constraint. you add isolated foundations to column locations. The next exercise uses a new training file. 4 On the Options Bar. Adding Isolated Foundations In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you can use the TAB key to highlight the entire wall chain and select it with one click. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. Place isolated foundations 1 In the Project Browser. under Constraints.7 Press ESC twice to finish placing walls. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.

11 In the drawing area. NOTE In the following image. Click OK. the footing is placed at Ground Level. Adding Isolated Foundations | 187 . 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.5 In the Filter dialog. the curtain wall visibility was altered for training purposes. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. double-click Ground Level. click the midpoints of the columns where you have added horizontal framing to place an isolated footing at each location. Click OK. In your training file. . click Modify. 6 On the Options Bar. enter 0' 0" for Base Offset. select Ground Level for Bottom Vertical Projection. 8 In the Project Browser. By default. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Selector. click ■ ■ ■ ■ 7 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Select Structural Columns. Under Analytical Model. under Structural Plans. Under Analytical Model. the imported DWG file does not display in this view. select Level 2 for Top Vertical Projection. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. select Footing-Rectangular: 72"x48"x18".

double-click East Section . double-click Level 2. 3 In the Type Selector. bracing. 188 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you have added columns and horizontal framing to your model. you complete the horizontal framing of Level 2 by adding girders and beam systems. under 3D Views. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. and concrete wall framing. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 In this exercise. Completing the Structural Model on page 188. To save changes. In the exercises that follow. you complete the structural model.Perspective. Specify Girder for Usage. adding horizontal framing. under Structural Plans. Completing the Structural Model In previous lessons. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_2.rvt. click Training Files. click File menu ➤ Save As. The next exercise uses a new training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Beam.13 In the Project Browser. foundation. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Add girders using the grid tool 1 In the Project Browser. as well as cantilevers and outriggers. Click Grid. openings.

click Finish. ■ Around the perimeter of the rotunda. using the Grid tool does not duplicate girders at these locations. click Modify. 6 On the Options Bar. 10 Add girders between the perimeter columns that were not captured by the Grid tool. 5 Draw a pick box around all the grids. zooming in and out as needed: ■ Above grid line 1 between B and E. TIP You can also press CTRL and select all grid lines manually. complete the framing of this bay. 7 On the Design Bar. Add beam chains to the following locations. Manually add additional beams 8 On the View toolbar. click model. Use the W-Wide Flange: W18x40 beam type for the 5 new beams. .NOTE Although you previously added girders to the structural model. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 189 . and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 9 Using the framing skills you have learned in previous exercises.

■ Between the column just above K4 and over to F5.■ Between the column below the midpoint of H2-H3 and the corner of the stairwell shear walls. 190 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . ■ Between the lower-left corner between A4 and D5.

click of the model. click ■ ■ ■ . . enter 3. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ .Specify the top of steel 11 On the View toolbar. Select W-Wide Flange: W14x22 for Beam Type. 19 In the bay adjacent to the upper-left stairwell. 20 Click to place the beam system. click Beam System. For Number of Lines. Click OK. enter -0' 7". 13 Right-click. and draw a zoom box around the bay in the upper-left corner 12 Select the girder between A2 and B2. for z-Direction Offset Value. Add a beam system to the bay 16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Under Pattern. for z-Direction Justification. 17 On the Options Bar. Under Constraints. 15 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. and click Select All Instances. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 191 . enter -0' 7" for Elevation. Click OK. select Other. 14 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. select the top girder. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule.

click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . enter 3. trace the outline of the bay. Select W-Wide Flange: W14x22 for Beam Type. Under Pattern. For Number of Lines. Click OK. click Finish Sketch. 23 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 22 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. click Beam System. click Sketch. 25 Using the sketch tool. 26 On the Sketch Design Bar.Sketch a beam system 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. 192 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

ignore it. If a warning appears indicating that pinned objects were deleted. 28 Click File menu ➤ Close. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 193 .27 Select the beam that spans the middle of the stairwell and delete it.

2 On the View toolbar.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In addition.NOTE You can save the open file if you wish. Adding Cantilevered Beams In this exercise. Lastly. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 194 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click model. In this new training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. beam systems have been added to all bays. click Training Files. the structural framing on Levels 3 and 4 (that you built in the first lesson of this tutorial) has been deleted for training purposes. The visibility of structural framing tags has been turned off in the Level 2 plan view. double-click Level 2. . Rather than having you add beam systems to the dozens of bays within this model. Adding Cantilevered Beams on page 194. a new training file is provided in the next exercise with the beam systems added as shown. under Structural Plans. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Add cantilevered members and outriggers 1 In the Project Browser. you add cantilevered members and outriggers to Level 2. the base offset of the structural columns on the lower level has been set to zero so they will attach to the footings. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_3.

7 Move the cursor to the left and select a perpendicular point on the inside face of the exterior glazing as the endpoint. Click OK. 4 On the Options Bar. Adding Cantilevered Beams | 195 . click ■ ■ ■ . for z-Direction Justification. Add cantilevers at columns 6 Select column A1 as the beam start point. 5 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. click Beam. enter -0' 7".3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. for z-Direction Offset Value. Under Constraints. select Other.

Add an outrigger 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 12 Select the left endpoint of the adjacent cantilever at A2 as the endpoint of the outrigger. Add intermediate cantilevers 13 Sketch intermediate beams between the outrigger and the beam between A1 and A2. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck In this exercise. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. you add a concrete slab with a metal deck to the model.8 Using the same method. 196 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 10 In the Type Selector. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck on page 196. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. add a cantilever beginning at column A2. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click File menu ➤ Save As. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. The next exercise uses a new training file. To save changes. click Beam. 11 Select the left endpoint of the cantilever at A1 as start point of the outrigger. or close the exercise file without saving changes.

and arced. enter -0' 2". picked. 6 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior lines of the glazing as snap points. additional cantilever beams and outriggers were added to the model. click Slab. the following new levels were added: 5. The pre-existing columns were paste-aligned to the roof level. click Floor Properties. click Training Files. 3 On the Design Bar. straight. 6. When sketching this deck. In addition. Add concrete slab with metal deck 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_4. Use Trim/Extend to clean up line intersections and close gaps. and Foundation. Roof. under Structural Plans. sketched. Click OK.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 2. 5 On the Design Bar.rvt. click Lines. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Floor Type. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you can use a combination of lines including. For Height Offset from Level. 7. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck | 197 . select 3" LW Concrete on 2" Metal Deck. Garage Level-1. In this training file.

and sketch a chain of continuous line segments. click . click File menu ➤ Save As. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close.TIP To sketch lines along the lower arced wall. The next exercise uses a new training file. select Chain on the Options Bar. 8 On the View toolbar. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 198 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 7 Click Finish Sketch. To save changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 9 Enter SD (keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges).

11 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Shafts on page 199.

Adding Shafts
In this exercise, you add 2 shaft openings on Level 2. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Adding_Shafts.rvt.

Add first stairway shaft opening 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. NOTE Make sure this view is using the Wireframe model graphics display style. If it is not, use the View Control Bar to make the change. 2 Enter WF (keyboard shortcut for Wireframe). 3 Zoom around the stairway in grid location F3-G4. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 5 On the Design Bar, click Pick Walls. 6 Select the 4 walls surrounding the stairwell.

7 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. For Base Constraint, select Foundation. For Top Offset, enter -1' 0". For Base Offset, enter -1' 0". Click OK.

Adding Shafts | 199

These settings ensure that the shaft extends through the structure without penetrating the roof or the foundation. 9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. Add second stairway shaft opening 10 Zoom around the stairway in grid location A1-B2. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 12 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 13 Sketch the opening surrounding the stairwell.

TIP When sketching the shaft, use the Lines tool in combination with the Pick option and select the external face of the walls imported with the DWG file. Use the Trim tool to clean up gaps and intersections. 14 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. For Base Constraint, select Foundation. For Top Offset, enter 1' 0". For Base Offset, enter 1' 0". Click OK.

16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 17 On the View toolbar, click .

200 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

18 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 19 Proceed to the next exercise, Duplicating Framing on page 201.

Duplicating Framing
In this exercise, you copy Level 2 framing to other levels. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Duplicate_Framing.rvt.

Copy Level 2 framing and deck 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. 2 Enter ZF, and draw a pick box around the entire model. 3 On the Options Bar, click .

4 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Girder, Joist, and Other), Structural Beam Systems, and Floors, and then click OK. 5 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 7 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 3, Level 4, and Level 5, and then click OK.

Duplicating Framing | 201

8 On the View toolbar, click
Copied levels with stair openings

.

Modify roof and framing 9 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 5. 10 Select the floor. 11 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 12 Delete the atrium arc, and use the Trim tool to close the gap.

NOTE In the image shown above, the weight of the sketch lines was increased for training purposes.

202 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 14 On the View toolbar, click 15 Select all framing and columns. NOTE Press and hold CTRL as you make multiple selections. , and draw a zoom box around the former atrium area.

16 Press DELETE. Ignore the warning that pinned objects were deleted. Add cantilever beams and outriggers 17 Zoom in on the former atrium area.

18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Beam. 19 On the Type Selector, select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. 20 On the Options Bar, specify Girder for Usage. 21 On the Options Bar, click .

Duplicating Framing | 203

22 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Under Constraints, for z-Direction Justification, select Other. Under Constraints, for z-Direction Offset Value, enter -0' 7". Click OK.

23 Add cantilever beams and outriggers to complete the new corner.

Extend the shaft to roof level 24 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. 25 Zoom around the stairway in grid location F3-G4. 26 Select the 4 walls surrounding the stairwell.

27 On the Options Bar, click
■ ■

.

28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following: For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. Click OK.

Copy roof framing and slab to Level 6 and 7 29 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 5. 30 Zoom out until you can see the entire model within the drawing area. 31 Draw a pick box around the entire model. 32 On the Options Bar, click .

204 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

33 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Girder, Joist, and Other), Structural Beam Systems, and Floors, and then click OK. 34 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 35 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 36 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 6, and Level 7, and click OK. 37 On the View toolbar, click .

Notice the atrium columns on Levels 5 through 7 need to be deleted. This is done for you in the next training file. 38 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 39 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Shape-Modified Slab on page 205.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab
In this new training file, beam systems have been added to the roof level to support a new shape-modified slab, and the footings added at the beginning of the tutorial have been deleted. In this exercise, you add a shape-modified slab to the new roof framing, and create a custom roof type with tapered insulation. In this exercise, you create a shape-modified slab above Level 7. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_5.rvt.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 205

Open the roof framing section view 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 2 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.

Notice the structural framing is sloped to provide for roof drainage. Create new roof type 3 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 4 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the upper roof framing.

206 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Slab. 6 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog, for Type, select 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - Tapered Insulation, and click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 9 In the Name dialog, enter 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - 4" Rigid Insulation, and click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 11 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for Layer 2, clear Variable, and click OK twice. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 3' 5 1/2", and click OK. Trace the outline of the roof

13 On the View toolbar, click structure. 14 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 15 On the Options Bar, click

, and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the

, and enter 5" for Offset.

16 Click the beam on the upper-left corner of the structure so the offset is placed on the outside of the beam.

17 Enter ZF. 18 Using the same method, click additional lines that outline the roof.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 207

19 On the Toolbar, click

(Trim).

20 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click one of the sketched lines, and then click each additional line to complete the roof outline.

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected. 21 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch.

208 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

22 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Atrium.

Edit the slab 23 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 24 Select the slab, and on the Options Bar, click Edit. 25 On the Design Bar, click Pick Supports. 26 Select specific supports.

27 On the Toolbar, click

.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 209

28 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click one of the sketched lines, and then click each additional line to complete the outline of the shape-modified slab.

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected. 29 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch. 30 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.

Notice the opening in the shape-modified slab. 31 On the View toolbar, click section view. , and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the

Notice the slab is not sloped towards the opening in the center of the slab. Pick supports for modifying the slope of the roof slab 32 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 33 Select the slab, and on the Options Bar, click (Modify Sub-Elements).

210 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

The corner points of the slab are highlighted.

34 On the Options Bar, click

(Pick Supports).

35 Click each of the 6 roof supports shown below in the order indicated.

NOTE The Pick Supports tool will create an elevation control point at the end of each of the 6 selected support location lines. 36 On the Design bar, click Modify. 37 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 38 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 211

Notice the roof deck is now resting on the roof supports. 39 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 40 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Slab. 41 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 42 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

For type, select 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - Tapered Insul Under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 2' 9 1/2". Click OK.

43 On the Design Bar, click Pick Supports. 44 Select specific supports.

45 On the Toolbar, click

.

46 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click each line to complete the outline of the shape-modified slab.

212 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected.

47 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch. 48 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 49 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view.

Notice the flat portion of the roof is now covered by the slab. Draw split line to slope the variable layer 50 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 51 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the roof.

52 Select the roof (that was just created) as shown.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 213

Press TAB to make sure the interior roof boundary is selected. 53 On the Options Bar, click (Draw Split Lines).

The corner points of the opening are displayed.

54 Sketch a split line.

55 Press ESC. 56 Select the split line that was just created. 57 On the Options Bar, enter 5" for Elevation. 58 Press ENTER.

214 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

60 Enter ZF. and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view. 65 Select the tapered roof. and on the Design Bar. Notice the tapered insulation tapers away from the split line support. 61 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. Join the geometry of the roof types 63 On the Toolbar. click Modify. click Modify. Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 215 . click (Join Geometry). 64 Select the existing flat roof to the left of the tapered roof.59 On the Design Bar. click . 62 On the View toolbar.

216 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 68 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 67 Click File menu ➤ Close.rvt. To save changes. Open the plan view 1 In the Project Browser. you add a shape-modified slab to the curved roof of the atrium. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Curved_Slab. 2 On the View toolbar.Atrium. and draw a zoom box around the atrium roof framing.66 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. double-click Level 5. The next exercise uses a new training file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab on page 216. double-click 3D . Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab In this exercise. using the slab shape edit tools. click File menu ➤ Save As. click Training Files. and save the exercise file with a unique name. under Structural Plans. click .

6 Click the center point of the slab arc. Sketch split lines 5 On the Options Bar. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 217 . The edge of the curved slab highlights. click (Modify Sub-Elements). click (Draw Split Lines). Notice that the shape edit tools display on the Options Bar. and is available for modification.3 Select the atrium curved slab. 4 On the Options Bar.

Place a single drainage point 8 On the Options Bar. 218 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 9 Click to place a drainage point approximately along the split line. click (Add New Points).7 Sketch a single split line to approximately the edge of the slab.

Delete split lines 13 On the Options Bar. Notice that the shape edit points display. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 219 .Place additional points 10 Click to place six additional points approximately along the edge of the slab. 14 Select the split lines. click Modify. and press DELETE. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 Select the curved slab. click .

The general shape of the curved slab displays. 220 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .Atrium. and draw a zoom box around the atrium roof. under 3D Views. 17 On the View toolbar.Set drainage point elevation 15 Click the drainage point elevation dimension. and enter -0’ 6”. double-click 3D . click . Notice that the edges of the curved slab display. View the atrium slab in 3D 16 In the Project Browser.

Set the curved edge condition 20 In the Project Browser. and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the Notice that the tapered insulation layer of the curved slab is sloped towards the drainage point. click Project to side. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 3D . double-click Level 5. and click OK. click section view. click OK. 22 On the Options Bar. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 221 . 24 In the Curved Edge Condition dialog. click Conform to Curve. for Curved Edge Condition.Atrium. double-click Section 3. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Complete the slab geometry 26 In the Project Browser. under Slab Shape Edit.View section view of slab 18 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. under Sections (Building Sections). 19 On the View toolbar. 21 Select the slab. under Structural Plans. . click .

enter SX (Snap to Point). enter SX. . 29 Click the center drainage point. click 28 On the Options Bar. click . and select the right endpoint of the curved slab.27 On the Options Bar. 222 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 30 Click the center drainage point. and select the left endpoint of the curved slab.

35 On the Options Bar. under 3D Views.Atrium. 34 Select the atrium curved slab. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 223 . double-click 3D . Verify the slab spot elevation 33 In the Project Browser. 32 In the Project Browser. 36 Select each point along the slab edge and verify that the spot elevation is set to 0' 0". under Structural Plans. click Modify. click .31 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 5.

click File menu ➤ Save As. Adding Miter Joins on page 224.rvt. click Training Files. or close the exercise file without saving changes.View the completed slab section 37 In the Project Browser. . double-click 3D . View the roof frame 1 In the Project Browser. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close. under Sections (Building Sections). 38 On the View toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 224 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 2 Select the slab. To save changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the Notice the tapered insulation layer slopes to the low point as a planar surface. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. you add miter joins to the beams on the roof frame to create a flush connection. Adding Miter Joins In this exercise. under 3D Views. double-click Section 3. click section view. The next exercise uses a new training file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Miter_Joins.View.

click . Adding Miter Joins | 225 . select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. Only non-concrete beams with shared end joins are available for edit. You can now use the Beam Join Editor. and draw a zoom box around the corner of the roof frame.3 On the View Control Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. click (Edit Beam Joins). The slab is now hidden. 4 On the View toolbar. Add the miter join 5 Click the beam on the west side of the roof frame.

7 Click the arrow control on the first beam. 8 Click the arrow control on the second beam. 226 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

The miter join is complete. The miter lock is used to lock geometry but allows symbolic manipulation (in Coarse View). Adding Miter Joins | 227 . 9 Click the padlock icon to lock the miter join.

select Detail Level: Fine.View the miter join in coarse view 10 On the View Control Bar. 228 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . select Detail Level: Coarse. 11 Click the arrow on the beam symbolic line. Notice the symbolic line is no longer joined. 12 On the View Control Bar. Notice the miter lock remains locked.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. To save changes. Adding Curved Beams on page 229.rvt. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. under Structural Plans. click Modify. click File menu ➤ Save As. click Training Files. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 2 On the View toolbar. Adding Curved Beams | 229 . and draw a zoom box around the atrium. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The next exercise uses a new training file. click . double-click Level 4. 13 On the Design Bar. Adding Curved Beams In this exercise. Zoom in on the atrium 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add a curved beam to the atrium.Notice the miter lock remains locked. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Curved_Beams.

6 Click the atrium column to select the beam start point. and click . 230 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . select Chain. 5 On the Options Bar. select W-Wide Flange: W14 X 22. 7 Click the column to select the beam endpoint. 4 In the Type Selector. click Beam.Place the curved beams 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

Adding Curved Beams | 231 .8 Click the grid line so the beam snaps to the grid.

The beam is placed. place additional curved beams between the atrium columns. Set the curved beam properties 11 Select one of the curved beams. 10 Using the same method. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 While pressing CTRL. 232 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 9 Press ESC twice. click . select the remaining curved beams.

21 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. for Layout Rule. double-click 3D . 19 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. select Top. 16 Select the floor. enter -0' 7" for Start Level Offset Under Constraints. under Structural Plans. Adding Curved Beams | 233 . select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. Click OK. For Beam Type.Atrium. For Elevation. 17 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the curved beams are visible. Under Pattern. and for Vertical Projection. 22 Select the bottom beam. 20 On the Options Bar. Click OK. and on the View Control Bar. select W-Wide Flange: W14 X 22. Notice the orange lines representing the curved beam analytical model are placed at the top of beam. under Structural Plans. enter -0' 7" for End Level Offset For z-Direction Justification. select 3D. enter 6' 0". For Maximum Spacing. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . select Maximum Spacing. double-click Level 4. click Beam System. Scroll down to Analytical Model. enter 0' 0". View the analytical model of the curved beams 15 In the Project Browser. Add a beam system to the atrium 18 In the Project Browser. select Top of Beam.14 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints.

234 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . place a beam system in the remaining bays of the atrium. 23 Using the same method.The beam system is placed.

Atrium. 25 Select the beam. and on the View Control Bar. 28 Select the floor. select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. NOTE When hard-points are enabled. Click OK. under Structural Plans. 27 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D . Adding Curved Beams | 235 . enter 0' 4".Approximate the curve of the analytical model 24 On the View toolbar. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Analytical Model. and draw a zoom box around one of the curved beams. . select Approximate Curve. the analytical model will end at points on the curve where other framing members are joined. Select Use hard-points. click . For Maximum discretized offset. and on the Options Bar. Additional line segments will be added to satisfy the Maximum Discretized Offset parameter.

click . and save the exercise file with a unique name. Notice the analytical line of the curved beam is represented by segments instead of a single curved line. The next exercise uses a new training file. you then copy the opening to each level. under Structural Plans. you add an opening (doorway) to the structural walls of the stairway. In the left pane of the Open dialog. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. Adding an Opening In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Openings. 2 On the View toolbar. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. click Training Files. Adding an Opening on page 236. 236 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . double-click Ground Level. and draw a zoom box around the stairway.29 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the curved beams are visible. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. To save changes. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.

3 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. click Door. Adding an Opening | 237 . 4 Click stairway wall to place the door opening approximately as shown. click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 Select the door opening.

select Level 7. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click stairway. 14 On the View toolbar. 8 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. so that levels 2-7 are highlighted. 10 While pressing SHIFT. under 3D Views. . and draw a zoom box around the opening created in the 238 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 11 Click OK. 12 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Select Levels dialog. 13 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the stairway is visible. select Level 2.. select 3D View.

under Structural Plans. 4 Select the beam that requires the opening. and draw a zoom box around any beam on an upper floor. Adding an Opening in a Beam on page 239.15 Click File menu ➤ Close. The next exercise uses a new training file. Add an opening (by face) to a single beam 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the View toolbar. Adding an Opening in a Beam In this exercise. you add an opening to the face of a single beam and add stiffener plates to the beam opening. click File menu ➤ Save As. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. You then add an opening to selected beams by creating an extrusion in the beam family. and double-click 3D View.rvt. click Opening ➤ Opening by Face. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Adding an Opening in a Beam | 239 . or close the exercise file without saving changes. Finally. To save changes. click . you import the revised beam back into the project. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.

select Linear Stiffener-Plate: Standard.Press TAB to make sure you are selecting the beam and not the floor or beam system. 8 In the Type Selector. click Component. click Modify. Make sure the opening forms a closed loop. 240 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Finish Sketch. 6 On the Design Bar. draw a stiffener plate on both horizontal surfaces of the opening. draw an opening in the beam approximately as shown. Add stiffener plates to the opening 7 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. 5 Using the sketch tools. 10 On the Design Bar. 9 Using the sketch tool.

Click OK. 15 Continue with the next exercise. Finally. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family on page 241. under Structural Plans. and double-click 3D View. click . expand 3D Views. 13 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Dimensions. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. click ■ ■ . select both stiffener plates. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you open an existing beam family using the Family Editor. You then modify the beam by adding an opening. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you load the new family into the project. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam.rvt. for d. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family In this exercise.Change the stiffener plate properties 11 While pressing CTRL. enter 0' 2". Select the beam 1 In the Project Browser. or close the exercise file without saving changes. To save changes. click Training Files. click File menu ➤ Save As. 12 On the Options Bar. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 241 . and save the exercise file with a unique name. The next exercise uses a new training file. and draw a zoom box around any beam on a lower floor. 2 On the View toolbar.

click Edit Family. The beam is displayed in a new window. 12 Click the centerline of the beam.3 Select the beam. click . expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). 14 On the Family Design Bar. and double-click Front. Add an opening by extrusion 6 In the Family Project Browser. 5 In the Revit dialog. and draw a zoom box around the center line of the beam. 13 Press ESC. The Front elevation of the beam is displayed. click Yes to open the W-Wide Flange beam type for editing. and draw a circle approximately as shown. and click (Circle). click Name. 8 On the Family Design Bar. Open the beam family 4 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Work Plane dialog. 7 On the View toolbar. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. click located to the left of Offset. 242 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . under Specify a New Work Plane. click Modify. and select Reference Plane: Center (Front/Back). 10 Click OK 11 On the Options Bar.

NOTE Aligning and locking the centerline of the circle to the reference plane ensures the circle will remain in the center of the beam. 19 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle. and the select the centerline of the circle. select the Center Mark Visible parameter. click (Align). and select the centerline of the circle. 22 Select the horizontal centerline reference plane. 25 On the View toolbar. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. click The centerline of the circle is now visible.15 Select the circle. 21 On the Options Bar. 23 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 243 . and click OK. regardless of the length. click (Align). . 18 Select the vertical centerline reference plane. 17 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 20 Press ESC. click .

The extrusion is displayed as a cylinder. and save the revised beam family file as W-Wide Flange with Opening. Extrude the opening 28 Click the right directional arrow. 27 On the View Control toolbar. and slide the cylinder to the right so the extrusion passes through the beam. select Model Graphic Style: Shading w/Edges. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 30 Navigate to a folder of your preference.26 Select the circle on the beam. 244 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .rfa.

35 Click on the lowest beam located on the corner of Level 2.rvt located in the Imperial project file. and click OK.Load the modified beam family into the project 31 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Select the new beam family 37 In the Type Selector. 32 In the Load into Projects dialog. The project file reopens. 33 Enter ZF.rfa. select i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. click . 38 Click in the drawing area. select the modified beam type W-Wide Flange with Opening: W18X40. select the beams for Levels 2 through 4. and draw a zoom box around the beams for the lower floors. 36 While pressing CTRL. click Load into Projects. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 245 . 34 On the View toolbar.

click Training Files. and walls are generated downward to the foundation. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The next exercise uses a new training file. you add structural walls.rvt. To save changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. or close the exercise file without saving changes.The modified beams with openings display. the atrium columns on Levels 6 and 7 have been deleted. 40 Continue with the next exercise. In this new training file. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_6. In addition. Adding Foundation Walls In this exercise. a roof with tapered insulation has been added over Level 7. Adding Foundation Walls on page 246. 246 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . You add these walls using the Ground Level view. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close. click File menu ➤ Save As.

For Top Offset. select Wall Centerline. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Ground Level. Adding Foundation Walls | 247 . enter -0' 6". For Base Constraint. The imported DWG file was copied and paste-aligned to this level for you. 3 In the Type Selector. . select Foundation. for Location Line. click Structural Wall. Click OK. select Basic Wall: Foundation . 5 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. click 7 Click the arc line of the imported DWG file. 6 On the Options Bar.Sketch the atrium walls 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Structural Plans. click ■ ■ ■ ■ .12" Concrete.

13 Click File menu ➤ Close. 9 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to add foundation walls to the remaining perimeter of the model. click . you can use an arc or a chain of small wall segments. 11 In the Project Browser. Use the center of the curtain wall lines in the DWG file as an underlay to trace over. 10 Press ESC twice to finish the wall sketch. On portions of the south wall. under 3D Views. Sketch the remaining foundation walls 8 On the Options Bar. double-click 3D View. 248 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .A foundation wall is added and aligned with the wall centerline. and select Chain. 12 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the foundation wall is visible.

under 3D Views. click Modify. click Structural Column. and click Hide Element. such as the atrium. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Structural Plans. 3 In the Type Selector. click File menu ➤ Save As. Concrete pier centered on steel column 6 On the Design Bar. 8 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls. select Concrete-Square-Column: 18x18. 7 In the Project Browser. or close the exercise file without saving changes. you add piers or pilasters and concrete columns at each steel column location. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Piers. click Training Files. In addition. double-click Ground Level. press TAB. If you select all the grid lines and add columns to all intersections. and select the foundation wall chain. add a concrete column centered on each steel column location. select Foundation for Depth.To save changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. Adding Piers or Pilasters on page 249. Adding Piers or Pilasters In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 On the View Control Bar. click the Temporary Hide/Isolate control.rvt. TIP You can use the Grid Intersection tool to speed up this process. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. you will still need to manually add piers to the locations that are not on a grid line. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Options Bar. make sure you delete the columns outside the structure perimeter. Add concrete piers 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D View. 5 Within the perimeter of the structure model. Adding Piers or Pilasters | 249 .

sloped slabs.rvt Frame ground and parking levels 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_7. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels In this exercise. The foundation wall is displayed. 250 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Slab. and concrete beam framing. click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. under Structural Plans. click Floor Properties. and save the exercise file with a unique name. select 6" Concrete. enter 0. 5 On the Design Bar. Click OK. The next exercise uses a new training file. For Height Offset From Level. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 10 On the View Control Bar. double-click Ground Level. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels on page 250. click Pick Walls. click Training Files. you frame the garage and ground levels by adding slabs. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Type. To save changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. 3 On the Design Bar.This provides a better view of the new below-grade piers. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.

WARNING If an error dialog displays regarding the span direction component. under 3D Views. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 251 . double-click 3D View. click Delete Type. If necessary. use the flip controls to toggle to the exterior face. 9 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the slab is visible. click Yes. 8 In the Project Browser.6 Select the exterior face of the foundation walls. 7 Click Finish Sketch. TIP Press TAB to select the wall chain. NOTE When prompted whether you would like the walls that go up to this floor’s level to attach to its bottom.

double-click Ground Level. 20 On the Design Bar. and another between G4 and G5. click Grid. 16 On the Options Bar.Frame concrete girders 10 In the Project Browser. 252 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Finish. 12 In the Type Selector. click Modify. This prevents a beam being added between the atrium at G1 and G3. select the line. 18 Manually delete the beams added to the atrium. expand the warning and select the framing element. under Structural Plans. NOTE If you are warned of a problem with keeping elements joined. 14 Select all grid lines. 13 On the Options Bar. 19 Manually delete the beams placed between grid F2 and G2. 17 Manually add a beam between G3 and G4. click Beam. Resolve the problem by clicking the appropriate solution. It will display as selected in the drawing area. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Concrete-Rectangular Beam:16x32. It is most likely a segment that can be deleted or unjoined. 15 Remove grid line G from the selection: while pressing SHIFT.

click . and click OK. select Structural Framing (Girder. 29 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. 26 In the Select Levels dialog. under 3D Views. 28 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the concrete girders are visible.Copy the framing and slab to Garage Level -1 21 Drag a pick box around the entire model. 24 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 23 In the Filter dialog. NOTE The foundation walls have been hidden in this view so the girders are visible. click Check None. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 253 . Other) and Floors. and then click OK. double-click 3D View. 27 In the Project Browser. 25 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Modify. select Garage Level -1. Joist.

Add the garage entrance exit ramp 30 In the Project Browser. 32 Zoom in around the lower-left corner of the model. and click Hidden Line. enter 0. 43 Zoom in on the lower-left corner to see the ramp. 36 On the Design Bar. double-click South Elevation. 42 On the View Control Bar. select Garage Level-1. 254 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 31 On the View Control Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control. click Finish Sketch. click the Model Graphics Style control. enter 0' 6". and select Element Properties. and click Hidden Line. For Height Offset at Head. Click OK. select Ground Level for Level at Tail. 33 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 37 Sketch a slope arrow from left to right. under Structural Plans. click Slope Arrow. For Level at Head. 34 On the Design Bar. 38 Right-click the slope arrow. click Lines. double-click Garage Level -1. 39 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. For Height Offset at Tail. 41 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 40 On the Design Bar. click Slab. 35 Sketch the slab in the southwest exterior corner of the structure.

Completed ramp Add a sloped beam system under the ramp 44 In the Project Browser. 46 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. select Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 16 X 32. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 255 . 45 On the View toolbar. 53 On the View toolbar. under Structural Views. 55 Draw an outline of the ramp. click Set Work Plane. click Beam System. Under Pattern. and zoom in on the ramp. click 54 On the Design Bar. 52 In the Project Browser. For Value. under 3D Views. click . select Pick a plane. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule Value. 50 On the Design Bar. 47 On the Design Bar. 49 Select the underside face of the existing ramp. 48 In the Work Plane dialog. and draw a zoom box around the ramp. under Specify a new Work Plane. under Number of Lines. and click OK. select Structural Beam System Properties. Click OK. . 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Beam Type. select Ground Level. enter 5. double-click 3D View. click Lines.

You can immediately draw the rectangular opening. click Opening ➤ Wall Opening. Add a wall opening at the garage entrance 59 On the View toolbar. 60 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. When you are adding a wall opening. and zoom in on the ramp. double-click 3D View. 58 On the View toolbar. 57 In the Project Browser. 256 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . there are no drawing tools to select. under 3D Views. corner to corner. 61 Select the foundation wall that faces the short edge of the new ramp. click . 62 Sketch the opening. click .56 On the Design Bar. and zoom in on the wall that faces the end of the new ramp. NOTE Ignore the warning regarding the analytical point of the beam and slab.

66 Proceed to the final exercise. you add an isolated foundation beneath the piers. you may get a warning message that elements cannot remain joined.NOTE Depending on where you draw the opening. Placing a Wall Foundation In this exercise. you add a continuous foundation beneath the exterior walls of the structural model. Placing a Wall Foundation on page 257. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. In this case. To save changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. click Modify. and continue with the next step. 64 Select the garage opening. Notice that you can adjust the opening extents using the controls. In addition. 63 On the Design Bar. click File menu ➤ Save As. 65 Click File menu ➤ Close. Placing a Wall Foundation | 257 . click Unjoin Elements.

7 On the Options Bar.rvt. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. A continuous foundation is added. enter 1' 6". For Heel length. Under Dimensions. click Visibility/Graphics.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 14 Click the midpoint of each of the concrete columns to place an isolated foundation at each location. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Structural Plans. and click to select the foundation wall chain. select Footing-Rectangular: 72"x48"x18". 5 On the Design Bar. click Foundation ➤ Wall. click Edit/New. click Training Files. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. press TAB until the chain of walls is highlighted. double-click Foundation. and click OK. 13 In the Type Selector. For Foundation Thickness. click 9 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . Click OK twice. 2 Enter ZF. 258 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Modify. Place isolated foundation 10 On the View menu. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Wall_Foundation. Sketch the continuous foundation 1 In the Project Browser. Edit foundation properties 6 Select one of the foundation walls. 4 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. enter 1' 6". enter 1' 6". In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Visibility. for Toe length. clear Structural Framing.

In the next tutorial a new training file is supplied. under 3D Views. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. 16 In the Project Browser. 18 Proceed to the next tutorial. Precast Concrete on page 261. Placing a Wall Foundation | 259 . You have completed the Creating a Structural Model tutorial. double-click 3D View. You can save the open file if you wish. click Modify.15 On the Design Bar.

260 .

you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing structure. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. Adding a Beam System to the Structure In this exercise. You then modify the precast beam type within the Revit Structure family editor. you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing project.rvt. you add a precast beam system to the roof of an existing structure. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_RST_Precast_Concrete.Precast Concrete 6 In this tutorial. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Structural Plans. 261 . you work with precast concrete components using the tools available in Revit Structure 2009. Creating a Precast Beam System In this lesson. double-click Roof. In the first lesson. click Beam System.

262 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . The longitudinal axis of the beam system members will be placed parallel to these lines. enter 0' 1". For Clear Spacing. select Clear Spacing. under Pattern. do the following: For Layout Rule. 5 Select the top girder on the north side of the structure as shown. For Justification. select Precast-Double Tee: 8' x 20". under 3D Views. NOTE The dotted lines represent the beam system direction. Click OK. 6 Click to place the beam system. 7 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. For Beam Type. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . select Center.3 On the Options Bar. The beam system is displayed.

Changing the Beam System Properties In this exercise. 2 Click one of the precast beams as shown. Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. and draw a zoom box around the edge of the beam system as Notice the gap between the edge of the beam system and the concrete beam. . Changing the Beam System Properties on page 263. you change the construction properties so the beam system will extend to the concrete support beam. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Precast-in progress. 1 On the View Toolbar. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Changing the Beam System Properties | 263 .rvt. i_RST_Precast-in progress. click shown.8 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

7 Proceed to the next exercise. under Construction. click . Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. i_RST_Precast-in progress. Notice the spacing between each precast beam.3 Right-click the selected beam. 264 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . The beam system now extends to the concrete support beam. under Structural Plans. you change clear spacing of the beam system to adjust the gap between each beam. double-click Roof. for Start and End Extension. double-click Section 1. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 Select the beam system. Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing In this exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. and click OK.rvt 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter 0' 5". and click Select All Instances. under Sections (Building Section). Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing on page 264. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.

under Construction. 8 Proceed to the next lesson. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Clear Spacing. Modifying the Precast Beam Family on page 265. you open the precast beam within the family editor and add a chamfer to both beam supports. Notice the clear spacing between each precast beam is removed. enter 0' 0". click . 5 In the Element Properties dialog. you add a chamfer to the existing double-tee beam family. 6 In the Project Browser. double-click Section 1.4 On the Options Bar. Modifying the Precast Beam Family | 265 . and click OK. You then import the revised beam back into the project. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam In this exercise. under Sections (Building Section). Modifying the Precast Beam Family In this lesson.

expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). i_RST_Precast-in progress. 266 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . click Edit Family. Open the beam type for editing 1 Click one of the precast beams as shown.Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. and double-click Left. 5 Select the beam. 2 On the Options Bar.rvt. 3 In the Revit dialog. 4 In the Family Project Browser. The beam is displayed in a new window. click Yes to open the Precast-Double Tee Family for editing.

Click Apply. expand Families ➤ Profiles ➤ Double Tee-Profile. and then click OK. Zoom in on the left tee of the beam 11 On the View Toolbar. 8 In the Revit dialog. 12 Select each of the dimensions representing the slope length. 7 Right-click Double Tee-Profile. and drag them above the top horizontal surface of the beam profile as shown. click Dimensions and Reference Planes. click Yes to open the Double Tee-Profile for editing. 10 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click . Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 267 . The reference planes and dimensions are now visible. and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam. NOTE The dimensions should be visible under normal circumstances but are purposely hidden for this demo. ■ ■ Under Visibility.Open the beam profile 6 In the Family Project Browser. 9 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. click the Annotations Categories tab. and click Edit.

268 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . and click Modify. under Options. click Ref Plane.Draw horizontal reference plane 13 On the Design bar. and click OK. Draw vertical reference planes 20 On the Design Bar. 15 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 0' 2". 14 Draw a horizontal reference plane below the existing plane. select Not a Reference. click . 17 Select the horizontal reference plane. 16 Press ESC. click Ref Plane. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 On the Options Bar. for Is Reference. 21 Draw a vertical reference plane to the left of the center line as shown.

30 Add a dimension for the left vertical reference plane. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 269 . 24 Press ESC. Add dimensions to each reference plane 29 On the Design Bar. and click OK. under Options. and click the lock symbol next to the dimension to lock the distance. select both vertical reference planes. 26 While pressing CTRL.22 Press ESC. click Dimension. for Is Reference. select Not a Reference. 23 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 0' 2". 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 25 Use the same technique to draw a vertical reference plane to the right of center as shown. 27 On the Options Bar.

32 Add a dimension for the horizontal reference plane as shown. and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam. 33 Click the lock symbol next to the dimension to lock the distance. 270 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . Align the bottom horizontal surface of the beam 35 On the View Toolbar. click . 34 Press ESC. NOTE Make sure the top dimension line snaps to the horizontal reference plane and not the horizontal line of the beam.31 Repeat for the vertical reference plane on the opposite side as shown.

42 Repeat this technique for the inside of the same tee. 40 Click the lock symbol to lock the alignment. 38 For the align-to point. and drag the end point away from the angled line as shown. Sketch new profile 43 Select the angled line as shown.36 Click the bottom horizontal line of the beam. select the vertical reference plane as shown. 41 Press ESC. 37 Enter AL (this is the keyboard shortcut for Align). Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 271 . 39 Select the line representing the bottom surface of the beam as shown. Press TAB to make sure you are selecting the end point of the line and not the reference plane.

47 Press ESC. click Lines. 45 On the Design bar. Snap to the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes.44 Press DELETE. 46 Sketch the new profile for the beam as follows: ■ ■ ■ Snap to the end point of the lower horizontal plane. 48 Repeat this technique for the opposite side of the beam. Snap to the end of the top horizontal line. 272 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete .

Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 273 . 51 On the View Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the right tee of the beam. click . 50 Click the horizontal reference plane and drag it beyond the right tee of the beam as shown.Modify the right tee of the beam 49 Enter ZF (this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit).

Click Apply. click Load into Projects. Reload the family into the project 56 On the Design Bar. select Override parameter values of existing types. Align the bottom horizontal surface. Creating Drawings on page 275. Add dimensions to each reference plane. click Family Types. and click Yes. and then click OK. enter 6' 0". The beam should adapt to all changes. fix any problems with alignment or constraints. 57 In the Reload Family dialog. 274 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Tee Width. 54 In the Family Types dialog. enter 10' 0".52 Repeat the following techniques for the right tee of the beam. 55 Click Edit menu ➤ Undo Family Type to undo the dimension changes. Flex the design 53 On the Design bar. For Width. Sketch the new profile. If it does not. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam updates with the latest changes. 58 Proceed to the next tutorial. ■ ■ ■ ■ Draw vertical reference planes.

which are a type of view in a project. usually contain a title block. how to add views to the sheets. you create a drawing sheet that includes a plan view. Sheet views update automatically when you modify your model. 3D view. Depending on the type of drawing that you want to create. you can add different views of the model directly to the sheet. and are accessible from the Project Browser. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. and three-dimensional (3D) views. section. elevation. Creating a Drawing Sheet In this exercise. The project used in the following exercises is the same one used in the previous lesson.Creating Drawings 7 In this tutorial. Sheets are defined by borders. 275 . and how to create new views from a model. To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your structural model. begin by first creating sheets. The model views that you can add to sheets include plan. and section views. you learn how to create drawings from a building information model using Revit Structure 2009. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Structure project.

click Sheet.rvt. and open Imperial\i_RST_Drawings. Create a sheet 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The text fields in the title block family (shown below) contain labels that automatically display the corresponding project information that you entered. 2 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter J. and click OK. 276 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . 5 Specify the remaining instance parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. click Training Files. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. 6 Click OK. enter Office Structure. and click View. 3 In the Edit Text dialog box. 4 Click OK. For Project Status. Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. For Project Number. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. enter 2006-01. Anytown. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. MA 12345. For Client Name. 8 In the Select a Title block dialog box. click Edit for Project Address. For Project Name. enter 31 March 2006. Smith.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter Initial Draft. enter the following address: 123 Main Street. right-click.

Add a plan view to the sheet 14 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Structural Plan: Level 2. expand Sheets (all). 15 In the Views dialog box. Creating a Drawing Sheet | 277 . and click Add View to Sheet. enter Plans and Elevations. 11 When the title block highlights.Unnamed. on the Options Bar. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name S-2 . Change the sheet name and number in the title block 10 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Project Browser. 13 Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ .NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. The sheet name and number are displayed in the title block and in the Project Browser. click Add View. click Modify. and select the title block. and click to place the view. Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet name. Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet number. enter S-1. 16 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet.

and click Add View to Sheet. 27 Drag the title line under the elevation view. 23 Click on the lower half of the sheet to place the view. and click OK. and click View Properties.0" for View Scale. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. clear Crop View. select Elevation: South Elevation. 24 With the view selected. right-click.17 With the view selected. right-click. right-click.0" for View Scale. The scale of the view on the sheet changes. you would see that the scale plan view is now 1/16" = 1'0". do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. 22 In the Views dialog box. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. 28 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. Click OK. 19 Drag the view to the upper-left corner of the sheet. If you were to open the Structural Plan: Level 2. NOTE If necessary. and click Element Properties. specify 1/16" = 1'. click Add View. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Extents. specify 1/16" = 1'. under Graphics. and click Element Properties. 20 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 278 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . Add an elevation to the sheet 21 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 26 Position the view below the Structural Plan: Level 2.

NOTE If necessary. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. 32 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. click Add View. and click Add View to Sheet. 31 Click on the upper-right corner of the sheet to place the view. Adding a Sheet to the Project on page 280. Add a 3D view to the sheet 29 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position.rvt. select 3D View: East Section . 30 In the Views dialog box. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating a Drawing Sheet | 279 . and save the file as i_RST_Drawings-in progress.NOTE If necessary. 34 Navigate to a folder of your preference.Perspective.

i_RST_Drawings-in progress. enter Section Views for Sheet Name. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Add a new sheet to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and then add them to a new drawing sheet. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and click OK. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets on page 280. under Identity Data. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Sheet. and adjust the scale of the view. 280 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 Select the title block. 2 In the Select a Title block dialog box. you add a new sheet to the project.rvt. add a section view.Adding a Sheet to the Project In this exercise. The new sheet. and on the Options Bar. you learn how to create a new section view and a new callout view. under Sheets (all). incrementally named S-2 Section Views. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets In this exercise. Section Views is displayed in the title block as the sheet name. and click OK. click . is displayed in the Project Browser.

and add it to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser under Structural Plans. click Section. 2 On the View Toolbar.rvt. select 1/16" = 1'. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 281 . double-click Level 2.0" for Scale. and zoom in on the east area of the structure as shown. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. Create a section view of Level 2. i_RST_Drawings-in progress.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 5 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building: ■ Click between grid lines G and H to place the start point of the section line and the section head (section tag). click . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

11 In the Element Properties dialog box. right-click. Create a callout view. 282 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . and click OK. NOTE If necessary. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. under Graphics. 8 In the Views dialog box. double-click S-2 Section Views. and click Properties. 12 Drag the title line under the elevation view.0" for View Scale. 9 Click on the upper-left corner of the sheet to place the view. under Sections (Building Sections). under Sheets (all). specify 3/16" = 1' . 13 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Add View to Sheet. 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and add it to the sheet 14 In the Project Browser. 10 With the view selected. double click Section 1. select Section: Section 1. click Add View.■ Move the cursor to the right and click between grid lines J and K to place the section tail and complete the section line.

24 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view.15 On the View Toolbar.0" for View Scale. as shown. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. specify 3/4" = 1'. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 283 . click . double-click S-2 Section Views. 16 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sections (Building Sections). click Callout of section 1. click Callout. under Sheets (all). 20 In the Project Browser. under Graphics. 21 With the view selected. and click Properties. and zoom in on the lower floors of the structure. 17 Draw a box around the column of Garage Level 1. and position it approximately as shown. 23 Drag the title line under the elevation view. 19 In the Project Browser. right-click. 18 Select the drag bar attached to the callout balloon. and drag the view onto the sheet.

you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. you will learn how to save both the individual views and complete detail sheets as a new detail library and then import these details into a different project.TYPICAL DETAILS. and double-click S. expand Sheets (all).rvt. 284 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . Creating a Detail Library on page 284.NOTE If necessary. and open Imperial\i_RST_Save_Detail. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library In this exercise. Creating a Detail Library In this lesson. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Save a group of views to the library 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save.1 . you learn how to create a detail library of components that can be imported into different projects. you begin by opening a project that contains common drafting view details. Instead of having to draw these details for every project.

Creating a Drafting View Detail Library | 285 .1 . 4 In the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Locate a common drive that can be accessed by all team members. 2 Click File menu ➤ Save to Library ➤ Save Views. and click OK.Notice there are 3 typical detail views on this sheet. Open the new folder. 3 In the Save Views dialog. Click the icon to the right of Save In to create a new Folder. Enter Detail Library for the folder name.TYPICAL DETAILS. select Drawing Sheet: S.

Revit Structure will save views that contain 3D objects. when you insert these views into a new project. Select both Footing Section views. For File name. enter Footing Section. Click OK. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close. do the following: ■ ■ In the list of views. however. Save individual views to the library 5 Click File menu ➤ Save to Library ➤ Save Views. NOTE When you save your file. ■ ■ 7 In the Save As dialog.1 . only the 2D elements will be inserted. select Show drafting views only. clear Drawing Sheet: S. enter Typical Column Beam and Girder Details. Click Save. Click Save. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. Importing Details from the Library on page 287. Only the drafting views will be displayed. 6 In the Save Views dialog.TYPICAL DETAILS. navigate to the Detail Library folder created in step 4.■ ■ Under File name. 286 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . Under Views. 9 Proceed to the next exercise.

a duplicate types dialog displays. 2 In the Open dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Look in. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library on page 284 before proceeding. 3 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ ■ Select Drawing Sheet: S. Insert drawing sheet from the library 1 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project.rvt. close the warning dialog that appears.rvt. Importing Details from the Library | 287 . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. select the Detail Library folder you created in the previous exercise. you learn how import details from the newly created library. and open Imperial\i_RST_Insert_Detail. Select the file TYPICAL COLUMN BEAM AND GIRDER DETAILS. Click Open. Click OK. 4 Once the drawing sheet opens.Importing Details from the Library In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK.TYPICAL DETAILS. click Training Files.

select the folder Detail Library you created in the previous exercise. 8 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ Under Views. Insert separate footing sections from the library 6 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. 288 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings .TYPICAL DETAILS. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Look in. Select the file FOOTING SECTION. select Drafting View: FOOTING SECTION. expand Sheets (all).rvt. 7 In the Open dialog.5 In the Project Browser. and double-click S. Click Open.1 .

Importing Details from the Library | 289 . Click OK. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project. a duplicate types dialog appears.■ Click OK.

rvt. select the folder Detail Library you created in the previous exercise. 10 In the Open dialog: ■ ■ For Look in.9 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. 290 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . Select the file Footing Sections.

Importing Details from the Library | 291 . select Drafting View: Footing Section 2. a duplicate types dialog appears. Click OK. Click OK. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project.■ Click Open. 11 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ ■ Under Views.

component legends are often called schedules (beam schedule. On construction documents. You have created a library of common drafting details that can be shared by each member of the structural team. On construction documents. Finally. Legends list and identify components such as weld symbols and rebar tags. Using Legends on page 292. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. you add the completed symbol legend to a sheet for the construction documents. concrete schedule. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. You have also imported both individual detail views as well as the entire detail sheet into an existing project. and so on). Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers which are paired with text that identifies them. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. 292 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings .12 Click File menu ➤ Close. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various structural components and annotations used in a project.

rvt. 6 Add the following symbols to the legend view. and click Rename. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Section Head .Spacer: Spacer Weld Symbol-w-Preparation: Melt Thru Creating a Symbol Legend | 293 .Filled Span Direction Fixed: 1/2” Rebar Tag Weld Symbol: Both Weld Symbol . 4 In the Rename View dialog box. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the drawing area as shown. expand Legends. click Symbol. i_RST_Drawings-in progress. Add symbols to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. enter Symbol Legend for Name. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 Right-click Legend 1. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and click OK.

On the Design Bar. 9 On the Options bar. select Text: 1/4" Arial text. Add text to the legend 13 In the Type Selector. and click OK twice.Create a text type 7 Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. 8 In the Type Selector. you create a text type with the necessary size. 14 Enter Level Marker (Level Name/Elevation) or the text note. 294 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. enter 1/8" for Text Size. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. You do this by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. click Text. click . enter 1/8" text for Name. verify that Text: 1/8" text is selected. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. and click OK. 12 Under Text.

17 In the Project Browser. click Symbol Legend.15 Working from the top down.Spacer Weld Symbol .Plans and Elevations to open it in the drawing area. 18 On the Design Bar. and double-click S-1 . click Modify to end the command. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet.Melt thru Place the symbol legend on a sheet 16 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Span Direction Fixed: 1/2” Rebar Tag (Tag#) Weld Symbol Weld Symbol . and click to place it. Creating a Symbol Legend | 295 .

The symbol legend is added to the sheet. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. 20 You can save the open file if you wish. In the next tutorial, a new training file is supplied. 21 Proceed to the next tutorial, Scheduling on page 297.

296 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings

Scheduling

8

In this tutorial, you learn how to create a customized schedule of structural framing elements in your Revit Structure 2009 projects.

Scheduling Beam Quantities
In this lesson, you learn how to create a beam schedule for the structural model as shown below. When you schedule structural components in Revit Structure, you can list each component as a separate line item (an instance schedule), or you can group components of the same type into a single line item (a type schedule).

Creating a Structural Framing Schedule
In this exercise, you learn how to create a structural framing concrete beam schedule. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Framing.rvt.

Create the schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 2 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Structural Framing, and click OK. Choose which fields to include in the beam schedule 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab.

297

4 Under Available fields, select Mark, and click Add. The Mark field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same process, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■

Comments Reference Level Family and Type

NOTE The width and depth parameters will be added to the schedule in the next exercise, Creating Shared Parameters. 6 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click Add Parameter. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Data, enter REBAR for Name. Under Type of Parameter, select Text. Click OK.

NOTE Rebar is now a project parameter that can also be found in the properties of all structural framing components including beams. 8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. A schedule is created that includes all structural framing elements in the project.

298 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

10 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 11 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Shared Parameters on page 299.

Creating Shared Parameters
In this exercise you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional elements that are usually not included in the beam schedule when it is created within the project template. Shared parameters can be added to any family, regardless of category, and are defined and stored in an external file, ensuring consistency across families and projects. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Structure multi-category schedules. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add width and depth information in a concrete beam schedule. This requires assigning the existing width and depth parameters originally defined as family parameters to shared parameters in the beam family. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters and adding them to a family. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules.rvt.

Editing the family parameters 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Ground Level. NOTE Some beams have been added to this view to better demonstrate the scheduling tool. 2 Select one of the concrete beams as shown.

Creating Shared Parameters | 299

3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 4 Click Yes when prompted about opening the beam for editing. NOTE You are now in the Family Editor. The selected beam family is displayed in the drawing area. 5 On the Family design bar, click Family Types. 6 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, select the b parameter, and click Modify.

7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared Parameter, and click Select. 8 When asked if you want to choose a shared parameter file, click Yes. 9 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click Create. 10 In the Save As dialog, specify a location for the file, and enter Project Shared Parameters for name. Click Save. 11 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Groups, click New. 12 In the New Parameter Group dialog, enter Dimensions for name, and click OK. 13 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, click New. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■

Under Name, enter b. Under Type of Parameter, select Length.

300 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Click OK.

15 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, click New. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Name, enter h. Under Type of Parameter, select Length. Click OK.

17 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click OK. 18 In the Shared Parameter dialog, select the b parameter, and click OK. 19 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK. 20 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, select the h parameter, and click Modify. 21 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared Parameter, and click Select. 22 In the Shared Parameter dialog, select the h parameter, and click OK. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK. 24 In the Family Types dialog, click OK. NOTE The b and h parameters, which were originally family parameters, are now shared parameters. They will appear in the structural framing schedule field once they are reloaded into the project file. 25 On the Family design bar, click Load into Project. 26 When prompted to overwrite the existing version of the family, click Yes. Remove Family and Type parameter 27 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click Structural Framing Schedule, and select Properties. 28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog, under Scheduled fields (in order), select Family and Type, and click Remove. The Family and Type field is removed from the Scheduled fields column. Add depth and width parameters to the beam schedule 30 Under Available Fields, select b (Width) and h (Depth), and click Add. The b and h fields are moved under Scheduled fields. 31 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

Creating Shared Parameters | 301

32 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 35 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Type Schedule on page 302.

Creating a Type Schedule
In this exercise, you learn how to create a type schedule. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Custom.rvt.

Modify the table elements 1 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Structural Framing Schedule. 2 Modify the schedule headings as follows:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Select Mark, and enter MARK. Select b (Width), and enter W. Select h (Depth), and enter D. Select Comments, and enter REMARKS. Select the title, and enter GROUND LEVEL CONCRETE BEAM SCHEDULE.

NOTE Under the Project Browser, click Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the schedule name has changed. 3 Select headings W and D. 4 On the Options bar, click Group.

302 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

A new blank cell is created above columns W and D. 5 Click the new heading, and enter SIZE.

Select a filter 6 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Filter, click Edit. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Click the Filter tab. Select Reference Level for Filter by. Select Ground Level. Click OK.

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Notice the schedule is filtered and shows only the structural framing elements of the ground level.

Format units 10 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Formatting tab. 13 Under Fields, click b, and click Field Format. 14 In the Format dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Clear Use project settings. Under Units, select Fractional inches. Under Rounding, select To the nearest 1/2".

Creating a Type Schedule | 303

Click OK.

15 Using the same method, format units for field h. 16 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Columns W and D now display fractional inches.

Add structural usage parameter to the beam schedule 18 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click the Ground Level Concrete Beam Schedule, and select Properties. 19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 21 Under Available Fields, select Structural Usage, and click Add. The Structural usage is moved under Scheduled fields. 22 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

304 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

23 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 24 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The schedule now displays the structural usage of each item.

Sort by Structural Usage 25 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Sorting/Grouping, click Edit for Value. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog ➤ Sorting/Grouping tab, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Sort by, select Structural Usage. Select Header. Select Footer.

Creating a Type Schedule | 305

■ ■

Select Blank Line. Click OK.

28 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The schedule is updated to provide both a header and footer for each type, sorted by structural usage.

29 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 30 Proceed to the next exercise, Customizing the Type Schedule on page 307.

306 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Customizing the Type Schedule
In this exercise, you first add mark information to identify each beam type, you then sort the schedule by mark, hide specific columns, and finally, you add rebar information. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Custom_Type.rvt.

Add mark data 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Ground Level. 2 On the Window menu, click Tile. The screen is split into two separate windows, showing both the beam schedule and Ground Level view. NOTE Close any additional views that may be opened. If prompted to save the changes to the beam family, click Yes, and provide a location for the new family file. 3 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

4 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

5 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B1 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 307

6 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

7 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

8 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B2 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

308 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

9 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

10 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

11 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B3 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 309

Sort and filter the schedule by mark 12 Maximize the schedule window. 13 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Sorting/Grouping, click Edit for Value. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■

Clear Footer, Header, Itemize every instance, and Grand totals. Under Sort by, select Mark.

16 In the Schedules Properties dialog, click the Filter tab, and do the following:

Under Filter by, select Mark, then select contains, and enter B.

310 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Click OK.

17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Notice the schedule is not itemized and does not show each beam, but instead groups all the beams of the same mark in a single row.

Hide/unhide columns 18 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Fields, select Reference Level. Under Field Formatting, select Hidden field. Click OK.

21 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The Reference Level column is now hidden. NOTE To show all hidden columns, right-click the open area next to the schedule, select Unhide All Columns. You can also hide a column by right-clicking the desired column, and selecting Hide Column(s) from the drop-down menu. Rename existing rebar parameter 22 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 311

32 In the Element Properties dialog. Add new rebar parameter 26 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. Under Type of Parameter. click Add Parameter. This parameter provides text information that is added to all beams within the model. Rebar will not be added to the model with the data entered in this dialog. select Text. Click OK. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog. The new rebar field is added. under Fields. 312 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . click Edit for Value. Click OK. enter Bottom Bars. enter Top Bars for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Fields. and click View Properties. Under Heading. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. select REBAR. 30 Under Scheduled fields. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. 31 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click OK. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. The Rebar field is renamed.24 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click OK.

Group rebar columns 33 Select both the Bottom Bars and Top Bars headings. The schedule is updated with the joist information. select2-#5C. enter 2-#6A 1-#6B. For Joists B2. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close. under the Fields parameter. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Creating an Instance Schedule In this exercise. 34 On the Options bar. For Joists B3. A new blank cell is created above the columns. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you create a formula to calculate the unit cost for each joist instance. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. select 2-#5C. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Bottom Bars. Enter rebar data 36 Enter the following rebar set information for each rebar instance as follows: ■ ■ ■ For Joists B1. Creating an Instance Schedule on page 313. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. To save changes. Creating an Instance Schedule | 313 . click File menu ➤ Save As. and under Top Bars. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Bottom Bars. and under Top Bars. under Bottom Bars. enter 2-#5 C. 2 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. and enter REBAR. under Schedules/Quantities. 35 Click the new heading. and click View Properties. double-click Ground Level Concrete Beam Schedule. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Formula. click Edit for Value. as well as the total cost of all structural items for the ground level of the structure. enter 2-#5A 1-#5B. Create the formula 1 In the Project Browser. enter 2-#7A 1-#7B.rvt. The next exercise uses a new training file. click Group. and under Top Bars.

6 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Enter Volume*Cost/1'^3 for Formula. the value will be applied to all elements of the same type. ■ Click OK. 8 Under Joist B1. click OK. Click Calculated Value. Under Available Fields. and click Add. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Available Fields. and press ENTER. The schedule will calculate the total cost for all joists. select Cost. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Total Cost for Name. Because cost is a type parameter. enter 3 for Cost. click OK. select Volume. Note that the formula will calculate the total cost based on a volume unit of 1 cubic yard.4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog. 314 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . and click Add. Select Number for Type.

and click View Properties. Under Field formatting. Under Fields. under Formatting. Under Field Formatting. under Formatting. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Formatting tab. select Calculate totals. click Edit for Value. select Total Cost. Under Units. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Formatting tab. and click View Properties. 16 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click OK. clear Use default settings.5 for Cost. click Field Format. 10 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. 9 Under Joist B2. Under Rounding. Under Fields. select Currency.NOTE The cost value represents a random value chosen for demonstration purposes only. In the Format dialog. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating an Instance Schedule | 315 . select 2 Decimal Places. and press ENTER. select $. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Unit Symbol. The schedule now includes the sum for Total Cost. click Edit for Value. Click OK. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Also notice that the Total Cost parameter does not have a unit value assigned. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Format total cost to include currency value 14 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. enter 1. select Total Cost.

click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. 20 Proceed to the next lesson. The next lesson uses a new training file. 17 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Creating a Graphical Column Schedule In this lesson.rvt. you learn how to create a graphical column schedule for the current project. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Create_GCS. Creating a Graphical Column Schedule on page 316. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 316 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . 18 In the Element Properties dialog.■ Click OK. click OK. click Training Files. To save changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. Create the Graphical Column Schedule In this exercise you learn how to create a graphical column schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The Total Cost column displays a currency value in Dollars.

Garage Level . click OK. NOTE These levels will not appear on the graphical column schedule. 4 In the Levels Hidden dialog. 6 On the Toolbar. under Other. Create the Graphical Column Schedule | 317 . click . click Graphical Column Schedule. and Ground Level. and zoom in on the schedule. click Edit for Hidden Levels.1.Create the schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and select View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 2 Right-click the column schedule. Notice that the first level on the schedule is Level 2. select Foundation. The schedule is created automatically. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.

The schedule also provides the nearest grid intersection and the value for the offset distance between the grid and column.NOTE The graphical column schedule includes columns located at off-grid locations as shown below. Columns located at off-grid locations 318 | Chapter 8 Scheduling .

In the Graphical Column Schedule Properties dialog. enter 3". and click OK. click Edit. select Group Similar Locations. under Horizontal Widths. Create the Graphical Column Schedule | 319 . and select View Properties. click OK. ■ In the Element Properties dialog. enter 3".Columns displayed in plan view Grouping and formatting off-grid columns 7 Right-click the schedule. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. for Below Bottom Level. Notice that all columns located at off-grid locations are now grouped together under a single column. and for Grid Appearance. under Vertical Heights. For Column Locations.

and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Customize_GCS. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 4 In the Graphical Column Schedule Properties dialog. To save changes. select Arial Black from the drop-down list. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.Include/Exclude columns at off-grid locations In the graphical column schedule view. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. click Training Files. For Level text. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Change the Schedule Appearance In this exercise. and select View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Right-click the schedule. and select View Properties. click File menu ➤ Save As. do the following: ■ ■ For Title text. and then select Bold and Italic. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. Change the Schedule Appearance on page 320. under Graphical Column Schedules. Notice the schedule view only displays those columns located at grid intersections. clear both Include Off-Grid Columns and Group Similar Locations. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. you learn how to add a title to the schedule and how to customize text and graphic appearance. Customize text 1 In the Project Browser. The next exercise uses a new training file. and then select Bold. and click OK. select Courier New from the drop-down list. you can include or exclude columns located at off-grid locations. under Text Appearance. click Edit for Value. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 320 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . double-click Graphical Column Schedule 1. 2 Right-click the schedule. under Graphics.

8 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Steel Column Schedule for Title. 9 Click OK. 7 Click OK. Change the Schedule Appearance | 321 . 6 Under Horizontal Widths: ■ ■ Enter 2" for Column Locations. under Identity Data.5 Click the Grid Appearance tab. Enter 2" for Level Names.

select Vertical. and clear Leader. 17 On the Options bar. Under Orientation. 16 Draw a pick box around the entire schedule. click Vertical. click . 11 On the Options bar. 15 Enter ZF to fit the entire column schedule in the drawing area. 13 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Structural Columns. click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 18 In the Filter dialog. Click OK.Tag the columns 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click Apply. 322 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . select Structural Column Tags. click Tag ➤ By Category. and click OK. 12 Click any column on Level 7 to place the tag. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.

Change the Schedule Appearance | 323 .19 On the Toolbar. click . and move the tags until they are positioned approximately as shown. click 20 On the Toolbar. and select View Properties. . Split the column schedule 21 Right-click the schedule. and zoom in on one of the column tags.

and save the exercise file with a unique name.22 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the Project Browser. you create multiple sheets for the graphical column schedule. click ■ ■ ■ . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. or close the exercise file without saving changes. To save changes. Create a sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.0". do the following: Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name. 23 Click OK. and click OK. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser. do the following. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule In this exercise. enter Steel Column Schedule. enter 1/4" = 1' . select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Modify.rvt. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. enter 10. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select the titleblock. Under Sheet Number. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Multiple_Sheets_GCS. A titleblock and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. click Sheet. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule on page 324. 324 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . 5 On the Options bar. enter S-3. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Column Locations per Segment. The schedule is split into multiple segments with 10 column locations per segment. expand Sheets (all). click Training Files. click File menu ➤ Save As. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. The next exercise uses a new training file. Click OK. ■ ■ Under View Scale.

16 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 Select the schedule. and click to place the view. Click OK. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. click Sheet. 17 Repeat previous steps to add 2 additional sheets. under Extents. expand Sheets (all).The sheet name and number are displayed in the titleblock and in the Project Browser. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. and double-click Sheet S-4. click . and click Add View to Sheet. and click OK. and select the titleblock. 15 On the Options bar. click OK. Add the column schedule to the sheet 7 On the View tab of the Design bar. enter 1 for Segments in Viewport. select Graphical Column Schedule. 14 On the Design Bar. click Add View. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. do the following: Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name. Place remaining views 18 On the Project Browser. enter S-4. click ■ ■ ■ . Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule | 325 . Under Sheet Number. The first segment will be placed on Sheet S-3. and enter S-5 and S-6 for sheet numbers. Enter Steel Column Schedule for name. select Steel Column Schedule. 13 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 8 In the Views dialog. Add additional sheets 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

under Graphical Column Schedule.19 On the Project Browser. click the File Data Source tab. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. 326 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . 25 On the Project Browser. and click to place the view. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). 3 Click New. 22 On the Project Browser. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. or close the exercise file without saving changes. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compliant database. 8 In the New Database dialog. and drag it onto the sheet. 28 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click Next.mdb. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Create. 24 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. and double-click Sheet S-5 23 On the Project Browser. and drag it onto the sheet. and click to place the view. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. enter Revit_Project. and click Next. 10 When the confirmation message displays. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access on page 326. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Export_Project_Info. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. and drag it onto the sheet. 6 Click Finish. and double-click Sheet S-6. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. The next exercise uses a new training file. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. and then open the database in Microsoft Access. and click to place the view. click OK. 21 Position the schedule as necessary. under Graphical Column Schedule. 9 Under Directories. click OK. click Training Files. Export the schedule 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ ODBC Database. under Database. click File menu ➤ Save As. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. and click OK to create the database. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. under Database Name. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. 20 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. 27 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. select a location for the database file. under Graphical Column Schedule. expand Sheets (all). you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. To save changes. expand Sheets (all). 26 On the Project Browser.

13 Click File menu ➤ Close. click File menu ➤ Save As. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. 14 Proceed to the next tutorial. and one that lists all of the element types in a project (see below). The next tutorial uses a new training file. For example. and some instance tables include a Room ID column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. instance tables include a Type ID column containing the ID of the instance’s type. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 327 . To save changes. so that each table of elements includes an ID column. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Steel Details on page 329.Revit Structure creates 2 tables: one that lists all of the element instances in a project.

328 .

Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you begin with a framed model as the basis of your details. and how to create a drafting detail using the tools provided (drafting-detail). you learn how to use Revit Structure 2009 to create steel details from the structural model (model-based). 2 Select . click Training Files. revise a callout view. This tutorial comprises the following model-based steel detail exercises: ■ ■ ■ Welded Brace Connection Bolted Angle Connection Glazing Support Connection Setting Up Section Views on Sheets In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Detail drawings describe how particular pieces of the structure go together and are typically created in the middle to later portion of the design process after the general building shape and structural elements have been decided upon.rvt. Structural Plans. and double-click Level 4. revise an existing elevation view.Steel Details 9 In this tutorial. and draw a zoom box around the northwest stair opening as shown. 329 . and open Imperial\i_RST_DET. and add these views to a sheet. You cut a section in plan. Prepare the welded brace elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all).

Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 330 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . double-click Level 4. 8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Section. and drag the controls to resize such that only the Level 4 area is visible. 7 Select .3 Double-click the elevation bubble to open the elevation view. 4 In the elevation view. Create the section view 6 In the Project Browser. 5 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. select the elevation crop view.0". and draw a zoom box around grid line intersection 1-E. and select 3/4" =1' . Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under Structural Plans.

16 Double-click on the callout head to open the view. and zoom in on the south wall at Level 4. and select 1/2" =1' . 13 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. 12 Select the section crop view. Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets | 331 . under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Modify.9 Draw a section as shown. 15 Select . Revise the callout view 14 In the Project Browser. and drag the view controls so that only Level 4 is visible. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 10 On the Design Bar.0". 11 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. double-click West Elevation. A callout symbol is located in this view at the south wall.

enter Steel Details for Name. 25 Move the cursor onto the sheet. and click to place the view. select Elevation: Callout of West Elevation. and click Add View. and click OK. 28 Move the cursor onto the sheet. 26 In the Project Browser.17 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. and click to place the view. select Section: Section 1. and click Rename. right-click S-6 . and callout views on the sheet 18 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. 29 In the Project Browser. and click OK. elevation. 332 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 21 Right-click S-6 Unnamed. and click Add View to Sheet. and click Add View. 19 In the Select a Title block dialog. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. select E1 30x42 Horizontal. 20 In the Project Browser.Steel Details. 27 In the Views dialog. 31 Move the cursor onto the sheet.Steel Details. right-click S-6 . Create a sheet and place the section. 22 In the Sheet Title dialog. and click Add View. 24 In the Views dialog. right-click S-6 . and click Add View to Sheet. select Elevation: Elevation 1-a. 23 In the Project Browser. and click to place the view.Steel Details. expand Sheets (all).0". and select 3/4" =1' . 30 In the Views dialog.

double click Elevation 1-a. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. The first part of the exercise involves adding a plate to the underside of a beam to support the bracing. Sketch line work 1 In the Project Browser. You will sketch the lines in a model view. and a facade support detail to the model. Detailing Steel In this lesson. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_DET-in progress. . a bolted angle detail.32 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click braces meet at Level 4. and draw a zoom box around the midpoint of the beam where the Detailing Steel | 333 . 2 On the Toolbar. i_RST_DET-in progress. Detailing Steel on page 333. under Elevations (Interior Elevation).rvt. 33 Proceed to the next lesson.rvt. you add a welded bracing detail.

click Detail Lines. and drag the shape handle (two small triangles at the brace end) to move the brace so it is not touching the beam flange.3 Select the left brace. TIP After establishing the line direction. 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Sketch a vertical line down 1' -1 3/8" from the bottom flange as shown. 5 Place the cursor near the bottom flange of the beam. 334 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . and enter SM to snap to the midpoint. enter the value.

12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Offset. enter 2' 6" for Offset. 8 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. you create 2 detail lines that are offset from this vertical line. and select Copy. A line displays that is offset from the highlighted line.Next. 14 Place the cursor on the bottom flange of the beam as shown. and enter 1' 8" for the Offset value. 11 Repeat the same steps to place a vertical line on the opposite side. click . 9 Place the cursor near the vertical line to highlight it. and click to place the detail line. 10 Click to place this line. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail | 335 . select Numerical. 7 On the Options Bar.

and select the horizontal detail line. click Modify. 336 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 16 Enter 3' 9" for the temporary dimension value as shown.15 On the Design Bar. and sketch 2 detail lines to connect the horizontal line to the vertical lines as shown. click Detail Lines. 17 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

The weld symbol has 4 numerical parameters that are currently set to 0. and click to place it. and enter 3/8.18 Select the middle vertical line that you used as a reference line. and press DELETE to delete this element. and enter a period. expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ Select Both. click Add a Leader. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail | 337 . 24 On the Options Bar. 20 Click Modify. click the left top weld annotation. and select the weld symbol. drag it into the view as shown. click Modify. 21 Select the weld symbol. 25 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown. 23 On the Design Bar. Add weld symbols 19 In the Project Browser. Repeat for the right bottom value. 22 Click the right top weld annotation. Repeat for the left bottom value.

26 Use the same technique to add another weld symbol as shown. Under Graphics. select Weld Contour-Empty for Top Symbol. and click Properties. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. select Weld All Around. 27 Right-click the new weld symbol. Click OK. 338 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Structural.

Creating a Bolted Angle Detail on page 339. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. 30 On the Options Bar. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail | 339 . 31 Draw a text leader to the plate. click . In the first part of the exercise. click Text. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser.Label the angles and the plate 29 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click Section 1. you add 2 angles to the model using an angle family that has been loaded into the project. click Text. and enter 3/8" PL for text. 32 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 34 Draw a leader to the brace and enter L8x8. 33 On the Options Bar. i_RST_DET-in progress. TYPICAL for text as shown. under Sections. click . Then you add some annotations.

6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.2 In the Project Browser. select L4x4x5/16. click Text. 3 Drag the family onto the grid line in the view as shown. 7 On the Options Bar. Add annotations 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 Sketch a vertical line through the center of the left set of bolts as shown. click Detail Lines. under Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ L-Angle-Bolted Connection Section. click . 340 | Chapter 9 Steel Details .

i_RST_DET-in progress.8 Enter the text notes as shown. and draw a zoom box around the callout at the intersection on Creating a Facade Support Detail | 341 . under Elevations (Building Elevation). Creating a Facade Support Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click West Elevation. 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating a Facade Support Detail on page 341. In this exercise. . 2 On the Toolbar.rvt. you add members to support exterior wall glazing. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. click Level 4 at Grid 4.

and click to place it.3 Double-click the callout head to open Callout of West Elevation. 8 On the Edit toolbar. 7 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the channel twice. 342 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . click . select C5x6. 5 Drag the channel onto the drawing area. 4 In the Project Browser.7. and select the left side of the column as shown. expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ C-Channel Section. move it to the position shown. 6 Click Modify and select the channel. On the right side of the view is an imported symbol that represents a curtain wall. You will attach a channel in section to the outrigger for use as a member of the facade support system.

9 Next. select the back of the channel as shown. Creating a Facade Support Detail | 343 . 10 Continue to use the align tool to align the channel to the bottom of the outrigger as shown.

14 Click near the bolt and enter 3/4" DIA. you learn how to create a drafting view detail for a deck span transition using the drafting tools provided in Revit Structure. select the bolt. 344 | Chapter 9 Steel Details .11 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Project Browser. Creating a Drafting View Detail In this lesson. 18 Proceed to the next lesson. In the next lesson. and drag it onto the outrigger and channel as shown. Add annotations 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Text. 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. double-click S-6 Steel Detail to view the results of your work in the sheet view. expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ Bolt-Section. a new training file is supplied. 15 Press ESC twice to exit the Text tool. under Sheets. You can save the open file if you wish. Creating a Drafting View Detail on page 344.7. A325 BOLT. 13 Click the open area outside of the channel and enter C5x6.

Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 345 .Deck Span Transition. 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. expand Drafting Views. Align the bottom of the joist seat with the top of the beam as shown. select Detail Component. select Detail Component. and open Imperial\i_RST_Deck_Span_Detail.Section: W18x35. enter Typical Detail . 5 In the Type Selector.Side: 14K3. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Name. Load detail components 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Design bar. 2 In the New Drafting dialog.Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Project Browser.0". click Drafting View. 10 Position the joist on the right side of the beam. select AISC Wide Flange Shapes . select 1 1/2" = 1' .rvt. 9 In the Type Selector. click Modify. Create the drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Typical Detail . select K-Series Bar Joist . Click OK. Under Scale. 7 On the Design bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 6 Click the drawing area to place the component.Deck Span Transition. click Modify.

Section: HSS2-1/2x2-1/2x. select Roof Decking-Side: 1. 21 On the Design bar. select Repeating Detail. 24 Align the bottom of the decking with the top of the joist and move the deck to the left approximately as shown. click Modify. 16 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the orientation of the deck. 19 In the Type Selector. 346 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 17 On the Design bar.5 WR 22. 13 In the Type Selector. and continue to move the pointer to the right until the deck is drawn as shown. 14 Click the end of the joist. select Repeating Detail : Metal Deck. 20 Place the tube on the top flange of the steel beam directly next to the end of the joist seat as shown. select Detail Component.125. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Detail Component. 23 In the Type Selector. select AISC Tube Shapes .12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 15 Move the pointer to the right to begin placing the deck.

select Field Weld. select K-Series Bar Joist-Section: 14K3.25 On the Design bar. change the following instance parameters: Under Structural. 28 Place the joist to the left of the beam. 32 Select the weld symbol. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Detail Component. Click OK. click Modify. click Modify. click Modify. and click to place it. 27 In the Type Selector. clear Symbol Left. 31 On the Design Bar. Under Other. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . and select Symbol Right. drag it into the view as shown. Enter 3/16" for Bottom Weld Size. and align the top of the joist with the bottom of the deck as shown. Add weld symbols 30 In the Project Browser. expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ select the bottom. Enter 2 @ 12 for Bottom Weld Length. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 347 . 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 On the Design bar. and on the Options Bar.

36 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown. click Text. click . 40 On the Design bar. 348 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 41 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 39 Draw a text leader to the steel deck and enter STL DECK SEE PLAN for text. 38 On the Options Bar. 35 On the Options Bar. click Add a Leader. Add text to the detail view 37 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and select the weld symbol. 42 Repeat the previous steps to add the remaining text and leader to the detail view as shown. click Modify. click Text.34 On the Design Bar.

43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 44 Proceed to the next tutorial. Concrete Reinforcement Modelling on page 351. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 349 . and navigate to a folder location of your choice.

350 .

351 . using the Revit Structure rebar shapes library. you model reinforcement in a concrete beam. you learn how to use Revit Structure 2009 to model concrete reinforcement from the structural project. This tutorial comprises the following concrete reinforcement modelling exercises: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Reinforcement in a Beam Reinforcement in a Column Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall Area Reinforcement in a Slab Path Reinforcement in a Slab Sketching Reinforcement in a Footing Sketching Reinforcement in a Structural Wall Concrete Modelling Examples In this lesson. you learn how to model reinforcement using the sketching tools and rebar library provided with Revit Structure.Concrete Reinforcement Modelling 10 In this tutorial. Reinforcement in a Beam In this exercise. Each exercise shows how specific reinforcement elements are built while demonstrating the modelling capabilities of Revit Structure.

The active rebar shape is highlighted and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. and draw a pick box around the section view of the beam located in the center of the drawing area.rvt. click . and open Imperial\i_RST_Concrete_Reinf. click Training Files. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. Launch the rebar shape browser 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. 352 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . positioned to the right of the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the Toolbar. under Detail Views (Detail). Open detail view 1 In the Project Browser. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click Beam Detail. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel.

and select Rebar Shape: S3.NOTE You can open or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking on the Options Bar. Reinforcement in a Beam | 353 . select Rebar Bar: #4. The library is located in the Rebar Shapes folder in the Imperial Library. the Rebar Shape Library is already loaded in this training file. Place rebar parallel to the beam face 4 In the Type Selector. 7 Click the bottom edge of the beam to place the rebar. scroll down the list of available shapes. 5 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. 6 Hover over the section view. Notice that the rebar shape changes as you select a different beam edge. For training purposes.

For Spacing. Set rebar spacing 11 Select the rebar shapes that you placed in the previous steps. 354 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . and select Rebar Shape: 01. scroll down the list of available shapes. and on the Options Bar. 9 Click the top edge of the view to place the rebar. click Modify. Place rebar perpendicular to the beam face 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. approximately as shown. click Modify. 13 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. 14 Place 2 rebar in the detail view. scroll down the list of available shapes. and select Rebar Shape: T9. 10 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 17 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. 15 On the Design Bar. enter 0’ 6”. and select Rebar Shape: 01.8 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. select Maximum Spacing. scroll down the list of available shapes.

enter 4. 21 On the Design Bar.18 Pace a single rebar at the bottom of the detail view. click Modify. click Modify. select Rebar Bar: #6. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. and on the Options Bar. select Fixed Number. Set rebar visibility 22 Draw a pick box to select the rebar as shown. Reinforcement in a Beam | 355 . Set rebar spacing 20 Select the single rebar that you just placed. approximately as shown. For Quantity. For Layout. 19 On the Design Bar.

under 3D Views. 28 On the View Control Bar. click . 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit for View Visibility States. under Graphics. 25 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. 30 On the Toolbar. and click OK. and draw a zoom box around the beam as shown 356 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . View rebar in 3D 27 In the Project Browser. click OK. 29 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible. double-click 3D. select Detail Level: Fine. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. for 3D View. click . select both View unobscured and View as solid.23 On the Options Bar.

Modify the rebar length 31 On the Toolbar. click 32 Select the rebar as shown. .Notice that the rebar sets are visible. Reinforcement in a Beam | 357 . and draw a zoom box around the end of the beam.

or close the exercise file without saving changes. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. The next exercise uses a new training file. Reinforcement in a Column on page 359. and save the exercise file with a unique name.33 Click and drag the rebar shape handles to change the length of the rebar as required. To save changes. 358 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click File menu ➤ Save As. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close.

click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel.Reinforcement in a Column In this exercise. click Training Files. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes.rvt. Reinforcement in a Column | 359 . click . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. you model reinforcement in a concrete column. Open detail view 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_RST_Concrete_Reinf. positioned to the right of the drawing area. under Detail Views (Detail). NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. 2 On the Toolbar. using the Revit Structure rebar shapes library. Launch the rebar shape browser 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. The active rebar shape is highlighted and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. double-click Column Detail. and draw a pick box around the section view of the column located in the center of the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

5 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser.NOTE You can open or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking on the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. Place rebar parallel to the column face 4 In the Type Selector. select Rebar Bar: #4. and select Rebar Shape: T1. 7 Click the bottom edge of the column to place the rebar as shown. The library is located in the Rebar Shapes folder in the Imperial Library. For Layout. the Rebar Shape Library is already loaded in this training file. enter 0’ 3”. 6 Hover over the section view. For training purposes. For Spacing. 8 On the Design Bar. Set rebar spacing 9 Select the rebar that you just placed. scroll down the list of available shapes. Notice that the rebar shape changes as you select a different column edge. select Maximum Spacing. select Rebar Bar: #4. 360 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .

do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. scroll down the list of available shapes. Set rebar spacing 14 Select the single rebar. For Layout. 18 Click the rebar centerline as the copy starting point. and select Rebar Shape: 00. Copy the rebar 16 Select the rebar.10 On the Design Bar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. select Fixed Number. enter 3. click Modify. For Quantity. 13 Click to place a single rebar as shown. click Modify. click (Copy). Place rebar perpendicular to the column face 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Rebar Bar: #8. 17 On the Edit toolbar. Reinforcement in a Column | 361 . 15 On the Design Bar. as shown. and on the Options Bar. 12 Click on the Rebar Shape Browser.

362 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. Set rebar visibility 21 Select the rebar in the detail view as shown.19 Move the cursor to the opposite side of the column to select the copy end point as shown.

click . 28 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible. select both View unobscured and View as solid. 29 On the Toolbar. select Detail Level: Fine. double-click 3D. under Graphics. for 3D View. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. View rebar in 3D 26 In the Project Browser. click Edit for View Visibility States. and draw a zoom box around the column as shown Reinforcement in a Column | 363 . under 3D Views. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click .22 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 27 On the View Control Bar. 24 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The next exercise uses a new training file. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall on page 364.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. To save changes. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. 364 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click Training Files. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save As. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_Area_Reinf_Wall. you model area reinforcement in a structural wall.Notice that the rebar sets are visible.

Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 365 . 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar.0" for Scale. 6 On the View Control Bar. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the foundation wall is shown. click Section. select 3/4" = 1' . 7 In the section view. 5 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. 2 On the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the upper north wall of the structure. under Structural Plans. click . double-click Garage Level-1. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. select the crop view. 4 Add a section line that cuts through the north wall of the structure as shown.

double-click 3D. 9 In the Project Browser. 366 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .Sketch the area reinforcement 8 Select the foundation wall. under 3D Views.

click (Sketch Area Reinforcement) to enter sketch mode. The foundation wall will be highlighted as shown below. 11 On the Options Bar.10 Use the ViewCube to rotate the model so the north side of the structure is visible. 12 On the Design Bar. click Lines. and trace the outline of the foundation wall as shown. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 367 .

Bars will be placed parallel to the major direction near both wall faces. under Sections (Building Sections). To change the major direction. The area reinforcement is automatically applied to the selected foundation wall. 13 On the Design Bar.NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the vertical line of the outline represent the rebar major direction. and is indicated on the 3D view with an X as shown. click Finish Sketch. 368 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . and select one of the horizontal lines of the outline. on the Design Bar. click Major Direction Edge. adjacent to the major bars. 14 In the Project Browser. Minor bars will be placed perpendicular (inside position) to the major bars (outside position). double-click Section 3.

The area reinforcement for the foundation wall is displayed. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 369 . Remove the major bars 15 Select the area reinforcement.

and click OK. click . under Layers. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 370 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . clear the values for Exterior Major Direction and Interior Major Direction.Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at the base of the reinforcement. 16 On the Options Bar.

under Construction. under Layers. and that the minor bars move out to the clear cover setting for the wall. select Fixed Number. enter 30. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. Change the number of rebar for the exterior and interior layers 18 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 30. For Interior Minor Number of Lines. Reselect Interior Major Direction and Exterior Major Direction. for Value. For Exterior Minor Number of Lines. Click OK. and click OK. For Interior Major Number of Lines. enter 30. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Exterior Major Number of Lines. enter 30. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 371 .Notice the rebar for the major span direction of the foundation wall is deleted from the section view.

26 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag. click Modify. and click Zoom to Fit. click Tag ➤ By Category. move the area reinforcement tag approximately as shown. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Change bar type 21 Select the Area Reinforcement. under Layers. click Modify.Notice that additional bars are added to the section view. 20 On the Design Bar. click Add annotation 24 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area. and click OK. change all Bar Types to #4. 27 On the Design Bar. 372 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . . 28 Using the drag control. 22 On the Options Bar.

rvt. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. The next exercise uses a new training file. click File menu ➤ Save As. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 373 . and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and draw a zoom box around the circular foundation on the north side of the structure as shown. 2 On the Toolbar. click . and open Imperial\i_RST_Area_Reinf_Slab.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. Area Reinforcement in a Slab on page 373. you model area reinforcement in a concrete slab. Area Reinforcement in a Slab In this exercise. double-click Garage Level-1. under Structural Plans. To save changes.

0". For Model Graphics Style. select Shading w/Edges. select the crop view. select 1/4" = 1' . click Section. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the concrete slab on Garage Level-1 is shown. select Fine.3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 Add a section line that cuts through the circular foundation as shown. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 6 On the View Control Bar. 7 In the section view. 374 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. For Detail Level.

9 Select the concrete slab as shown. under Structural Plans.Sketch the area reinforcement 8 In the Project Browser. double-click Garage Level -1. draw an area reinforcement box as shown. 11 Using the line tool. to enter sketch mode. 10 On the Options Bar. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 375 . click .

13 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Building Sections).12 On the Design Bar. double-click Section 4. click Finish Sketch. 376 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .

under Layers. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. Change bar type 17 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. move the rebar tag approximately as shown. clear Top Major Direction. under Layers. click Modify. click Modify.The area reinforcement for the slab is displayed. 19 On the Design Bar. 21 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag. and click OK. 15 On the Options Bar. 24 Using the drag control. select Attached End. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. click . Change the area reinforcement properties 14 Select the area reinforcement. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 377 . Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at each end of the area reinforcement. 23 Select the rebar tag. and click OK. change all Bar Types to #4. Notice the bars in the top major direction are deleted from the section view. click . Add annotation 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

rvt. click . click Rebar ➤ Sketch Path Reinforcement. click Training Files. 4 Select the slab opening. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Structural Plans. you model path reinforcement in a concrete slab. The next exercise uses a new training file.25 Click File menu ➤ Close. or close the exercise file without saving changes. double-click Level 3. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Sketch the path reinforcement 1 In the Project Browser. 378 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Path Reinforcement in a Slab on page 378. and save the exercise file with a unique name. You are now in sketch mode. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and draw a zoom box around the slab opening on the north side of the structure as shown. Path Reinforcement in a Slab In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save As. To save changes. 2 On the Toolbar. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_Path_Reinf.

NOTE The lines you sketch for the path reinforcement box cannot intersect and must not form a closed loop. click Finish Sketch. Change bar type 9 Select the Path Reinforcement. 7 On the Design Bar. Path Reinforcement in a Slab | 379 . click . 8 On the Design Bar. 6 Draw a path reinforcement box approximately as shown. click Modify. The path reinforcement for the slab opening is displayed.5 On the Options Bar. and enter 1' 0" for Offset.

under Layers.0". click Create a section view . and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. select 1/4" = 1' . select Shading w/Edges. 13 Add a section line that cuts through the slab opening as shown. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 17 In the section view. select Fine. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the edge of the opening in the slab and the path reinforcement on Level 3 is shown. 380 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . select #4. select the crop view. For Detail Level. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. for Primary Bar . click Modify.10 On the Options Bar. For Model Graphics Style.Type. 14 On the Design Bar. 15 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 16 On the View Control Bar. click Section.

move the rebar tag approximately as shown. Change rebar properties 18 On the Toolbar. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. Add annotation 21 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 20 Click the toggle control to change the rebar hook type as shown. Notice the toggle hook orientation icon appears. click Tag ➤ By Category. Path Reinforcement in a Slab | 381 . and draw a zoom box around the edge of the slab opening. 22 Click the path reinforcement to place the tag. click 19 Select the rebar. 25 Using the drag control. click Modify. . and on the Options Bar.NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. 23 On the Design Bar. 24 Select the rebar tag. select Free End.

. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing In this exercise. and zoom in on the southwest corner of the 3 Click the section line. draw a pick box. The next exercise uses a new training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog.26 Click File menu ➤ Close. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 2 On the Toolbar. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Ground Level. you use the tools provided with Revit Structure to sketch reinforcement in a concrete footing. 382 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown.rvt. click structure. and open Imperial\i_RST_Footing_Detail. Open section view 1 In the Project Browser. and position the upper drag bar as shown. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing on page 382. To save changes. under Structural Plans. click File menu ➤ Save As.

4 Press ESC. click . The Section 1 view opens. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 383 . Add wall keys at the bottom of wall 6 On the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the wall footing as shown. 5 Double-click the section bubble.

click (Edit Cut Profile). 9 Select the boundary between the wall and footing. select Chain. and click (Line). select Boundary between faces. click Finish Sketch. 7 On the Toolbar. click (Draw).NOTE For training purposes. Sketch 3 lines as shown. 11 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. 384 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Model Graphics Style is set to Shading w/Edges (on the View Control Bar).

click Sketch. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. 17 On the Sketch tab. 15 Sketch a straight bar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor to the right as shown. 20 Select the continuous footing as the host element. 13 On the Options Bar. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 385 . Sketch rebar parallel to the footing and wall 18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The Design Bar changes to sketch mode. 16 Press ESC. 21 Sketch a rebar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor into the wall as shown. 14 Select the continuous footing as the host element. 19 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch.Sketch rebar parallel to the footing 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Sketch. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel.

for Hook At Start.NOTE Be sure to sketch from the footing to the wall. 386 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . This rebar will not be included in rebar estimates of the structural wall. 22 Press ESC. select Standard . click Finish Sketch. 23 On the Sketch tab.90 deg. NOTE Rebar only contributes to the estimated reinforcement volume of its host. under Construction. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. Add hook 24 Right-click the rebar you added in the previous steps. 26 Click OK.

click wall. 30 In the Type Selector. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 387 . Place rebar perpendicular 29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Mirror the rebar 27 On the Options Bar. 31 Select the end of the straight bar. and select the center reference plane of the structural 28 Click to place the rebar. and place the pointer between the hooked and straight bars approximately as shown. select Rebar Bar: #8. (Mirror). click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular.

enter 4". For Spacing. 38 Drag the shape handles so the rebar set aligns with the end of the horizontal rebar as shown. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. 37 Select the rebar set. 35 Press the SPACEBAR to change the direction of rebar placement.Notice the footing cover settings display when placing the rebar. 33 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select Minimum Clear Spacing. 36 On the Options Bar. 388 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Place rebar set 34 Select the single rebar. 32 Click to place the first rebar as shown.

(Pick Elements).39 On the Design Bar. click (Edit Rebar Cover). Set rebar cover by element 40 On the Toolbar. 41 On the Options Bar. Notice the default rebar cover settings are displayed in the section view as dotted lines. click Modify. click 42 Select the footing. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 389 .

47 Select the face of the structural wall. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Edit Cover Settings). do the following: Click Add. Click OK. (Pick Faces). click 46 On the Options Bar. enter Exposed/Cast against Earth. 390 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . enter 0' 2". For Description. Notice that the rebar cover has changed to the new setting. 44 On the Rebar Cover Settings dialog. Set rebar cover by face 45 On the Toolbar. .43 On the Options Bar. For Setting.

click Dimension. Click OK. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 391 . 49 On the Rebar Cover Settings dialog. do the following: Under Description. select Exposed/Cast against Earth. 50 Repeat the same process to set the rebar cover on the opposite face of the structural wall. Notice the rebar cover has changed to the new setting. 52 Move the cursor over the first rebar in the footing array as shown.48 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ . Check rebar clear spacing 51 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

Delete the dimension after verifying the clearance requirements have been met. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall on page 393. 54 Click to select this plane and place the dimension. 53 Click to select this plane.The vertical snapping plane of the bar is highlighted. The next exercise uses a new training file. 56 Proceed to the next exercise. 55 Click File menu ➤ Close. 392 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . or close the exercise file without saving changes. and move the cursor to the edge of the footing as shown. To save changes. NOTE The dimension is placed to check the clear space distance from the concrete face to the rebar array. click File menu ➤ Save As.

draw a pick box.1. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes.rvt.Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_Wall_Detail. 6 Click the section line. move the cursor down. Create section view 1 In the Project Browser. and click the outside wall to place the section as shown. 4 Click inside the wall between grid lines B and C. 2 On the Toolbar. click Modify. and zoom in on the southwest corner of the 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 393 . you use the tools provided with Revit Structure to sketch reinforcement in a structural wall. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and position the drag bar as shown. . double-click Garage Level . NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. click Training Files. 5 On the Design Bar. click Section. click structure. under Structural Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and select 3/4" = 1'. 8 Double-click the section bubble. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the foundation wall is shown. select the crop view. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.7 Press ESC.0". 10 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. 394 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 9 In the section view. The Section 2 view opens. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine.

select Rebar Bar : #7. the graphics style is used to display detail in the section view. 17 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. Place rebar set 15 Select the single rebar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 395 . do the following: ■ For Layout. 12 In the Type Selector. select Maximum Spacing. Place horizontal rebar 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. until a vertical line appears indicating the direction of placement. 13 Place the rebar at the base of the wall approximately as shown.NOTE For training purposes. as shown. 16 Press the SPACEBAR. click Modify.

1.■ For Spacing. enter 1' 6". Resize the rebar set 18 On the Toolbar. click (Mirror). and zoom in on the Ground Level of the structure. click Modify. 22 On the Edit toolbar. 19 Select the rebar set. The quantity of rebar adjusts to the extents of the structural wall on the garage level. 23 Move the cursor to the right until the center line reference plane of the wall appears as shown. draw a zoom box. 20 On the Design Bar. click . Mirror the rebar set 21 Select the rebar set. 396 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . and drag the rebar shape handle down to Garage Level .

click . click Sketch. 28 On the Options Bar. 27 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 29 Select the concrete wall as the rebar host. and draw a zoom box around the lower half of the wall. and click Zoom to Fit. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. Place vertical rebar 25 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 397 . 26 On the Toolbar.24 Click to place the rebar.

click Finish Sketch. 36 On the Edit toolbar. 32 Click to place the rebar.1.You are now in sketch mode. 33 Press ESC. 30 Click the base of the structural wall to establish the sketch start point. 34 On the Design Bar. click . Mirror the rebar 35 Click the vertical rebar. 31 Drag the sketch line up towards the top of the wall at Garage Level . Notice the cursor snaps to the rebar cover. 37 Move the cursor over the wall until the center line reference plane appears. 398 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .

38 Click to place the rebar. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 399 . Set rebar visibility 39 Select the outside vertical rebar as shown.

400 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .40 Press CTRL. and select the outside horizontal rebar as shown.

45 In the Project Browser. 46 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the garage ramp side of the structure is visible. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. click .41 On the Options Bar. and click OK. double-click 3D. 43 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. select View unobscured and View as solid. click OK. click Edit for View Visibility States. under 3D Views. for 3D View. under Graphics. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 401 . 42 In the Element Properties dialog.

Annotating and Dimensioning on page 403. select Maximum Spacing. 402 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . For Spacing.47 On the Toolbar. and on the Options Bar. Notice the rebar is visible. The rebar automatically extends the entire length of the garage wall. and save the exercise file with a unique name. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. click . click File menu ➤ Save As. Extend the vertical rebar for the garage wall 48 Select the single rebar. enter 1' 6". and draw a zoom box around the garage ramp. 50 Proceed to the next tutorial. To save changes. 49 Click File menu ➤ Close. or close the exercise file without saving changes.

Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components and select existing components. angular. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. dimensions are aligned and snap to wall centerlines. radial. Dimensioning In this lesson. click Dimension. In Revit Structure. and open Imperial\i_RST_Dimensioning. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. click Training Files. By default. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. The dimension types include aligned. 4 When the centerline of the wall highlights. baseline. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Floor. linear. Create permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser.Annotating and Dimensioning 11 In this tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. move the cursor over the north wall of the proposed North Building. you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions that you can add to your drawings. you learn how to annotate and dimension your Revit Structure 2009 projects. 403 .rvt. select it. and ordinate. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. 3 Without making any changes on the Options Bar. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. multi-segmented.

select it.5 Move the cursor toward the south wall and when the centerline of the wall highlights. 6 Move the cursor to the left. toward the empty space outside the wall. and click to place the dimension. 404 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .

and press DELETE. 14 Select the north and south walls of the North Building.The dimension displays in the drawing. A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it. click Modify. select Wall centerlines for Prefer. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the referenced walls without first unlocking the dimension. select Wall faces for Prefer. 10 On the Toolbar. click Create a multi-segmented dimension 12 On the Design Bar. and click to set the dimension location. indicating that the dimension can be modified. 9 Select the north wall and move it upward. click the lock to unlock it. and the distance between them does not change because the dimension is constrained. Notice that the south wall moves with the north wall. click Dimension. 11 Select the dimension. (Undo). 7 Click the lock. 17 Move the cursor to the left of the South Building. The lock displays as locked. 13 On the Options Bar. Creating Dimensions | 405 . 15 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the exterior faces of the top and bottom walls of the South Building.

21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 20 Dimension a curved wall of the North Building: Select the southwest corner wall to display the radial dimension. click ■ ■ (Create Radial Dimensions). and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. and click to place the dimension. 406 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Dimension. Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall. In addition. Create a radial dimension 18 On the Design Bar. an equal symbol with a slash through it is displayed. and draw a zoom box around the curved wall. 19 On the Options Bar.An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment. indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in length.

22 On the Design Bar. ■ (Create Angular Dimensions). Move your cursor to the right to size the dimension arc. and place the dimension as shown. 26 Adjust the zoom settings so that you can add a dimension to the upper-left portion of the North Building. Create an angular dimension 27 On the Options Bar. and press DELETE. the default dimension option. as shown. 25 Dimension the curved wall again: Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights. click ■ ■ . select the dimension line of the radial dimension. Select the inside face of the wall. and then select the inside face of the vertical wall below it. 24 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. and click to place the dimension. 23 On the Design Bar. and select Wall faces for Prefer. click Modify.The dimension is snapped to the wall centerline. click for Prefer. and verify that Wall faces is selected 28 Dimension the angled wall at the top left of the North Building: Select the inside face of the angled wall below the opening. ■ Creating Dimensions | 407 .

408 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar. click OK. select a point at the interior corner of the top left wall join. for Dimension String Type.Create a linear dimension 29 On the Options Bar. select Baseline. The dimension is always constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis. Create a baseline dimension 32 On the Toolbar. click Modify. 33 On the Design Bar. Click Apply. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to place the dimension. 38 Select the reference line for grid 1 to start the dimension string as shown. 34 On the Options Bar. 36 In the Type Properties dialog. Move your cursor to the right. click Edit/New. and zoom in on the footings located just outside the exterior wall of the south building as shown. . Select the interior corner of the bottom left wall join of the room. click . do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. click Dimension. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ ■ 31 On the Design Bar. and OK. You can override the cursor tracking by pressing the SPACEBAR. The linear dimension tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points. 30 Dimension interior walls in the South Building: ■ In the top room on the left side of the building. click (Create Horizontal or Vertical Dimensions). click . and depends on the cursor tracking behavior.

select Ordinate. click Modify. 40 Select the reference lines for grids 4 and 5 to place the remaining dimensions as shown. for Dimension String Type. click OK. click Edit/New. 44 In the Element Properties dialog.39 Select the reference line for grids 2 and 3 as shown. and OK. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. . Notice the multiple dimensions display the distance from the same baseline (grid 1). 43 On the Options Bar. Click Apply. Creating Dimensions | 409 . Create an ordinate dimension 42 Select the baseline dimensions placed in the previous steps. 41 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. click . 46 In the Element Properties dialog.

48 In the Dimension Text dialog. +/. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. click Modify.Notice the perpendicular dimensions display the distance from the origin point or datum (grid 1). 53 Proceed to the next exercise. do the following: ■ ■ For Below.rvt. 50 In the Dimension Text dialog.M. 49 Click the dimension text placed in the last step. 410 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .A.A. under Text Fields. (See Architectural Drawing).6" Click Apply and OK. to each additional element (grids 2 through 5).F. 52 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter V. Notice the new text appears below the supplemental text. do the following: ■ ■ Under Dimension value. click Replace with Text. Controlling Witness Line Location on page 411.I. Add supplemental text to a permanent dimension 47 Click the value for the ordinate dimension at grid 2. and enter S. Notice the dimension value is replaced with the new text S.D. Click Apply and OK. 51 On the Design Bar.

8 Move the cursor over the south wall of the North Building. 5 Alternate the cursor position over the inner and outer wall face. press TAB until the wall centerline highlights. in some cases. verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. whereas the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and select the exterior face. and select it. select it. Notice that only the wall faces highlight when you move the cursor over them. Controlling Witness Line Location | 411 . i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. 4 Move the cursor over the north wall of the North Building. but do not select anything. including the wall centerline. 10 Move the cursor to the south wall of the South Building. you may want to locate the 2 outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. Each time you press TAB. and press TAB repeatedly. 9 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall of the South Building. click Dimension. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example. 7 When the exterior face of the wall highlights. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. delete. 3 On the Options Bar. and select the exterior face. a different wall selection choice highlights. for a multi-segmented dimension. you learn to add.Controlling Witness Line Location In this exercise.rvt Override dimension defaults 1 Delete the multi-segmented vertical dimension that you placed along the left side of the building model in the previous exercise. However. 11 Place the dimension as shown. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. because the Prefer wall faces option is selected instead of the Prefer wall centerline option. 6 Position the cursor over the wall. and change the origin of dimension witness lines. When you place dimensions.

and control boxes display on each witness line.Edit dimension witness lines 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 13 Select the dimension that you just placed. The dimension highlights. 412 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .

The witness line moves to the wall centerline. The witness line is deleted. and click Delete Witness Line. Controlling Witness Line Location | 413 . but do not select it. 17 Right-click the control box. 15 Click the control box again. 16 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line that references the north wall of the South Building.14 Click twice on the control box on the witness line that references the south wall of the North Building. The witness line moves to interior wall face.

you learn to modify the type parameters of dimensions. IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line. 414 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Modifying Dimension Properties In this exercise. If you right-click the control box. click in the drawing area away from the floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and select the multi-segmented dimension that you modified in the previous exercise. and click Edit Witness Lines. i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress.rvt. a context menu with different options is displayed. click Edit/New. 2 On the Options Bar. Modifying Dimension Properties on page 414. 20 To end the editing command. Change the type parameters of the floor plan dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 19 Select the outside face of the north wall of the South Building. The full dimension string is displayed. click .18 Right-click the dimension line that references the face of the south wall of the North Building. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.

then Up for Read Convention. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. As you create components. In the next exercise. not the direction it is read.4 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. A locked alignment is a constraint that is maintained if any of the aligned components are moved or modified. Under Text. click Modify. You can save the open file if you wish. allowing you to lock the alignment of the walls. This controls which side (of the dimensioning arrow) the text is on. alignments can be made and locked with minimal effort. 7 Click File menu ➤ Close. select Right. Aligning components is similar to dimensioning components with a value of zero. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 415 . change the following type parameter values: ■ ■ Under Text. a lock symbol immediately displays. 5 Click OK twice. The dimension updates as shown.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. a new training file is provided. enter 3/16" for the Text Size. when sketching walls. Working with Alignments and Constraints In this exercise. you learn to align components and lock their alignment to better work with them in your drawings. Working with Alignments and Constraints on page 415. click Training Files. if 2 or more walls are colinear. For example. and open Imperial\i_RST_Alignment.

the first component that you select is the target and remains fixed in position. indicating the 2 walls are not constrained to each other. select Multiple Alignment. The shorter horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall. The cursor displays 2 arrows at its tip. 3 Click the lock. 2 Align the walls: ■ ■ Select the exterior face of the uppermost horizontal wall. indicating that the alignment of the 2 walls is now locked. The lock symbol displays as unlocked. 5 Select the lower center wall to define it as the target fixed wall to which the other walls will align. 416 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Select the exterior face of the shorter horizontal wall on the left. Align the 3 short horizontal walls 4 On the Options Bar. indicating that the Align command is active. click (Align). 6 Select the short wall to the left.Align the 2 uppermost horizontal walls in the floor plan 1 On the Toolbar. The symbol changes to a closed lock. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. while the second component moves to complete the alignment. When you align 2 components.

but the wall on the right does not because the alignment between the 2 walls is not constrained (locked). 9 On the Design Bar. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 417 . 10 Select the middle horizontal wall. 11 On the Toolbar. The wall on the left moves with the middle wall when you drag it.7 Click the lock to lock the alignment of the walls. click (Undo) once to undo the move. Do not lock this segment of the alignment. 12 Click the right wall. click Modify. and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall. 8 Select the short horizontal wall on the right. and drag it downward.

Align the windows on the floor plan 13 On the Toolbar. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Select the window in the upper horizontal wall on the left side of the floor plan.Move the walls to verify the alignment. 16 Select the window on the far left in the lower wall. click (Align). 418 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . clear Multiple Alignment.

Working with Alignments and Constraints | 419 . A lock is displayed. indicating the constraint. and select the dimension between the second window and the right wall. and align the windows.The 2 windows align. 21 On the Toolbar. The second window does not align because it is already constrained by a locked dimension. click Modify. as shown. 18 Select the far right window in the top wall. 22 Align the remaining windows. click . 19 To view the constraint. 20 Click the lock to unlock it. on the Design Bar. 17 Select the far right window in the bottom wall.

Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions on page 420. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. instead of selecting the wall and all the openings as dimension references.rvt. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. 420 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Alignment-in progress. you learn how to automatically dimension a linear wall with openings (windows) by selecting the wall. and notice that it includes 5 openings. 1 View the south wall. i_RST_Alignment-in progress.rvt.23 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions In this exercise. You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each opening displays in the dimension string.

click (Create Aligned Dimensions). select Openings and Widths. click Modify. Click Options. 9 Click File menu ➤ Close. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case. you learn how to use the spot dimension feature of Revit Structure. select Entire Walls. 3 On the Options Bar. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. In the next exercise. Working with Spot Dimensions | 421 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. The 2 vertical walls highlight. indicating the start and end of the dimension string. For Prefer. a new training file is provided. 5 Click OK. verify that Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick. 6 Select the south wall. the windows).2 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. Working with Spot Dimensions on page 421. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 7 Move your cursor below the south wall. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog. and click to add the dimension. click Dimension. You can save the open file if you wish. and that the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. Working with Spot Dimensions In this exercise.

click . select Current Level. and draw a zoom box around the upper view as shown.rvt. and double-click New Roof. and for Relative Base. Notice that the value of the spot elevation is displayed as the cursor is moved. 4 In the Type Selector. and open Imperial\i_RST_Spot_Dimensions_Tapered_Roof. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. select Leader. 2 On the Options Bar. Click to create the second leader point. Move the cursor to the left. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the left.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click the center of the tapered insulation to create the first leader point as shown. 5 On the Options Bar. Add spot dimensions to the tapered roof 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 422 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Click to place the spot dimension. expand Structural Plans. 6 Place the spot dimension as follows: ■ Move the cursor along the edge of the tapered roof. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative).

11 Place the spot dimension as follows: ■ Click the corner of the slab (grid location A1) to create the first leader point as shown. Working with Spot Dimensions | 423 . select Current Level.■ On the Design Bar. and for Relative Base. 10 On the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around the structural columns as shown. Move the cursor to the right. 9 In the Type Selector. click Modify. click 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Leader. . Click to place the spot dimension. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. Drag the leader to the right to place the dimension. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). Click to create the second leader point. 7 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the right.

select Leader. and double-click Foundation. 424 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 17 Place the spot elevation as follows: ■ ■ ■ Click the upper-right corner of the footing. 13 On the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around a footing as shown. Move the cursor up and to the right. Click to create the second leader point. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Add a spot dimension to the footing 12 In the Project Browser. click . select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). 15 In the Type Selector. click Modify.■ On the Design Bar. and Current Level for Relative Base. expand Structural Plans. 16 On the Options Bar.

Click to create the third leader point. click ■ . 21 On the Design Bar. enter TOF=. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. Change the spot dimension properties 18 Select the spot dimension. ■ Click OK. click Modify. Working with Spot Dimensions | 425 . for Single/Upper Value Prefix. ■ On the Design Bar. do the following: Under Text.■ ■ Move the cursor to the right. Notice that the elevation at the top of the footing is displayed. 19 On the Options Bar. click Modify.

click OK. Notice that the value of the spot coordinate displays as the cursor moves.Change the text orientation 22 Select the spot dimension. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ 426 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and then OK. 31 Place the spot coordinate as follows: ■ Move the cursor along the edge of the sloped beam. click . 23 On the Options Bar. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. Click Apply. 29 On the View Control Bar. for Detail Level. 25 In the Type Properties dialog. under Text. select Medium. 27 On the Design Bar. select In-line with Leader. and double-click South Elevation. Click the center of the sloped beam to create the first leader point as shown. click Edit/New. Add spot coordinates to a sloped beam 28 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Bold. For Text Location. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Coordinate.

Click to create the second leader point. For Elevation Indicator. Click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Bold. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the elevation indicator displays below the existing coordinates.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the right. Working with Spot Dimensions | 427 . enter EL. click Modify. click . click Modify. Click to place the spot coordinate. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. On the Design Bar. 33 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. Move the cursor to the right. and then OK. select In-line with Leader. 37 On the Design Bar. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. Change the spot coordinate orientation 32 Select the spot coordinate. For Text Location. under Text. click OK.

click Training Files.rvt. a new training file is provided. Annotating In this lesson. you learn how to use the beam annotation tool to tag all beams in a plan view. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You can save the open file if you wish. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.38 Click File menu ➤ Close. You learn how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Tag beams in a plan view Tag a beam system Tag beams by category Create a custom type mark in place of the beam tag Create a custom beam tag. and double-click Level 2. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Structural Plans. Annotating on page 428. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Structure. In the next lesson. 428 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . You also learn how to create a custom mark in place of an existing beam tag. and open Imperial\i_RST_Annotations. click Beam Annotations. Tag all beams in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Tagging Beams In this exercise. and add an end reaction annotation to specific beams in the structure.

The Beam Annotations dialog opens. NOTE For training purposes. 6 In the Beam Annotations dialog. click Beam Annotations. the tags that were placed in the previous steps have been removed from this view. and click OK. ■ ■ Tagging Beams | 429 . for Horizontal End Offset. do the following: ■ ■ Under Placement. Add an end-reaction value to specific beams 4 Select multiple beams located inside one of the bays as shown. 3 In the Beam Annotations dialog. In the Placement Settings dialog. Click OK. 5 On the Design Bar. Notice that a beam tag has been added to the top-middle location on all beams within the plan view. select All selected beams in current plan view. enter 1". select All beams in current plan view. do the following: ■ Under Placement. Click Settings. and click Remove existing beam tags and spot elevations.

under Analysis Results. click OK. Enter the reaction force 7 On the Options Bar. and click OK.0 kip for End Reaction . to specify the top-end annotation type as shown. Under Structural Framing Tag. click . under Select Element to Place. The end reaction value is added to the selected beams.This dimension sets the annotation offset distance measured from the beam start location as indicated in the dialog. enter 10. ■ ■ In the Select Annotation Type dialog. click the Level beams in plan tab. Click . and click OK. ■ ■ In the Beam Annotations dialog. ■ Under Annotation location and type. select Structural Framing Tag-w-End Reactions : Standard. click Structural Framing Tag. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 430 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .Live.

click Apply. click Modify. Create a custom type mark tag 10 Enter ZF (Zoom to Fit). enter W18. and click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. Tagging Beams | 431 . click 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Click one of the W14X22 beams. and on the Options Bar. click OK. 11 Right-click the open area above the model. click Edit/New. click Edit/New. and then OK.9 On the Design Bar. under Type Mark. click Apply. . under Type Mark. 12 Draw a zoom box that surrounds the upper beams between grids C and D as shown. 19 In the Type Properties dialog. enter W14. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. . 13 Click one of the W18X40 beams. and then OK.

click Edit Family. click . click the W18X40 beam tag. click OK. under Label. click Load into Projects. select the W14X22 beam tag. 29 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click OK. When prompted to open the Structural Framing Tag for editing. 28 On the Family Design Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and. for Value. and on the Options bar. 22 Click the structural label. Click Save. 27 In the Save As dialog.20 In the Element Properties dialog. You are now in the Family Editor. while pressing CTRL. and click OK. 31 In the Type Selector. Enter Structural Framing Tag . Apply the new type mark tag to all beams 30 In the plan view. click OK. 432 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . (Add 25 In the Element Properties dialog.by Type Mark for File name. and on the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select a folder location. click Yes.by Type Mark: Standard. select Structural Framing Tag . click parameter(s) to a label). Edit the beam tag family 21 Click one of the W18X40 beam tags. The new beam tag is applied to the selected beams. select Type Mark. 24 In the Edit Label dialog. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. under Category Parameters. click Edit. select the active file.

click ■ ■ (Filter). Select Structural Framing Tags. and draw a pick box around the entire model as shown. Tagging Beams | 433 . 33 On the Options bar. do the following: Click Check None to clear all items.32 Enter ZF. 34 In the Filter dialog.

Tag the beam system 37 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 35 In the Type Selector. and draw a zoom box around the beam system as shown.■ Click OK. click File menu ➤ Save As. The new beam tag is applied to all beams. 434 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .by Type Mark: Standard. select Structural Framing Tag . or close the exercise file without saving your changes. 36 To save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

expand Structural Plans. click Training Files. click Edit Label. and notice the tag for the specific beam system displays. 39 Click any beam within the beam system to place the tag. In the next exercise a new training file is provided. you learn how to create a custom beam tag that includes multiple categories and then apply the tag to different beam types. the existing beam tags have been removed for the following steps. click Beam System Tag. You are now in the Family Editor. When prompted to open the Structural Framing Tag for editing. click Yes. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 40 Click File ➤ Close. and on the Options Bar. Creating a Custom Beam Tag | 435 .rvt. You can save the open file if you wish. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Click the structural label. Move the cursor over the beams in the drawing area. Open the beam tag family 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_RST_Custom_beam_tag. Creating a Custom Beam Tag In this exercise. 2 Click one of the W14X22 beam tags. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and on the Options Bar. and double-click Level 2. click Edit Family.NOTE For training purposes. Creating a Custom Beam Tag on page 435.

and for Suffix. and select Break. for Prefix. for Spaces. add the following categories: ■ Under Category Parameters. ■ 5 In the Edit Label dialog. 436 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and for Suffix. and click OK. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. for Sample Value. select Number of studs. Select parameter 2. add the following Label Parameters: ■ ■ Select parameter 1. select 3. . Select parameter 3. do the following: ■ ■ Click the Annotation Categories tab. select Reference Planes. and click The new category is added to the label as parameter 2. select Camber Size. for Vertical Align. 10 Press VV (Visibility/Graphic Overrides). enter W14X22. select Top. click OK. click . for Prefix. (Add parameter). and click The new category is added to the label as parameter 3. Align the beam tag 7 Click the drag control for the label until the text is positioned on two lines as shown. Under Visibility. 8 On the Options Bar. Under Category Parameters. for Sample Value. under Graphics. for Sample Value. enter ) (right parenthesis).Add multiple categories to the beam label 4 In the Edit Label dialog. enter ( (left parenthesis). enter C=1/2". enter ] (close bracket). ■ 6 In the Edit Label dialog. enter S1. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. enter [ (open bracket).

View the framing schedule 16 In the Project Browser. View the properties for beam type S2 17 In the Project Browser. Creating a Custom Beam Tag | 437 . 13 Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW to move the text until the beam type is positioned just below the horizontal reference plane as shown. expand Structural Plans. and click Yes. 14 Click Modify. click Load into Project. and double-click Level 2.■ Click OK. 15 On the Design Bar. In the Reload Family dialog. and the camber size for each beam type in the structure. 12 Select the text on the beam label. Notice the Structural Framing Schedule includes the number of studs parameter. Notice that each beam tag now specifies a different camber setting based on the beam type. click Override parameter values of existing types. expand Schedules/Quantities. and double-click Structural Framing Schedule.

■ 21 Click File ➤ Save As. 19 On the Options Bar. do the following: Under Structural. notice that the Camber Size value reflects the parameters entered in the framing schedule. 22 Proceed to the next tutorial. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 438 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Worksets on page 439. and save the completed project in a folder location of your preference.18 Click one of the W18x40 beams. Click OK. click ■ .

this collection of building elements (such as roofs. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. however. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. and open Imperial\i_RST_Worksets.rvt. engineers commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional task. and they can publish work to a central file whenever they choose. All other team members can view this workset. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. Using Worksharing. Enable Worksharing 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and how to borrow particular elements from other users. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. etc. they cannot make changes to it. In this tutorial. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. to allow visibility control and ownership for each assigned element. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project. In Revit Structure 2009. 439 . In the next exercise. and to have all the elements coordinated by Revit Structure. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You begin by enabling Worksharing within a project and setting up the initial workset environment. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. They can also update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing.Worksets 12 On many building projects. beams. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network to their own hard drive.) is called a workset. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the central file. You can enable Worksharing for any project. slabs. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance.

the user name was changed in the Options dialog (accessible from the Settings menu). 5 Under Show. enter Beams and Columns. In this case. a fifth is assigned to the elevator shafts. a second user is assigned the roof. Project Standards. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. and Views. Therefore. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. and all team members must have access to all linked or imported DWG or RVT files. For training purposes. clear Families. TIP The initial owner name is assigned by the operating system of your computer. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. Only User-Created worksets should display. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. The project is subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. imagine 5 users including yourself. and notice all are editable by you. You cannot change your user name with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. For training purposes. 7 In the New Workset dialog. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog.2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. In this simple training project. and User1 is displayed as the present owner. a small number of team members are working on the structural model. 440 | Chapter 12 Worksets . under Show. 3 In the Worksets dialog. The Worksets dialog is displayed. a third is assigned all beams and columns. click New. a fourth is assigned the foundation and garage ramp. one team member is assigned to the slabs.

11 In the New Workset dialog. click New. Click OK. ■ 12 In the Worksets dialog. enter Foundation. 9 In the New Workset dialog. This improves performance because fewer components need to be generated in each view. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. click New. Click OK. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. The foundation should only be visible in specific views. 8 In the Worksets dialog. 13 In the New Workset dialog. Clear Visible by default in all views. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 441 . 10 In the Worksets dialog. enter Slabs. Click OK. enter Elevator Shafts. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. click New.■ Click OK.

Click OK. this improves performance. Click OK. 19 In the New Workset dialog. Clear Visible by default in all views. Click OK. enter Garage Ramp. enter Roof. The roof should only be visible in specific views. ■ 18 In the Worksets dialog. 15 In the New Workset dialog.14 In the Worksets dialog. Again. click New. click New. Again. this improves performance. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. enter Linked or imported DWG or RVT files. 442 | Chapter 12 Worksets . click New. 17 In the New Workset dialog. ■ 16 In the Worksets dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. The garage ramp should only be visible in specific views. Clear Visible by default in all views. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name.

You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. 27 On the right side of the dialog. 25 In the Worksets dialog. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. 23 Click Save. enter Worksets Project . NOTE Continue using the central file for the following steps.Central. select: ■ ■ ■ ■ User-Created Families Project Standards Views 26 Select all the worksets by pressing CTRL+A. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. Now that you have created the central file. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 443 . click OK Create the central file 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. for file name. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. The next step is to create the central file. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. click Non Editable. 22 In the Save As dialog. Check in the worksets 24 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. under Show. 20 In the Worksets dialog. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need.

Create a local file 32 Click File menu ➤ Open.In the Worksets dialog. 28 In the Worksets dialog. 35 In the Save As dialog. Navigate to the location of the central file Worksets Project . 33 Select the file. 30 In the Save to Central dialog. under Comments. enter Initial Central File Setup. 31 After the file is saved. click OK. Assigning Worksets on page 445. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central.Central on the network drive. and click Open. 36 Enter Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for File name. notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and also notice that all worksets are not available for editing. navigate to a folder on your local computer. and click Save. click File menu ➤ Close. 444 | Chapter 12 Worksets .

In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. 8 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. you enabled Worksharing on a project. 3 Click one of the structural columns as shown. Assigning Worksets In this exercise. and created new worksets to accommodate each team member. checked in all worksets. In the Worksets dialog. you assign the structural columns workset to User1. 6 Click OK. notice that all worksets are available for editing. click . You then created the central file. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. select Beams and Columns. and created a local file. 2 Click Cancel. 7 Click the highlighted column to deselect it. 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. for Workset. NOTE Continue using the local file Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for the following exercise. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Assigning Worksets | 445 .

The Worksets dialog. and click OK. 11 On the Options Bar. 9 Click Cancel. notice that User1 is listed. click . 446 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 13 Select Structural Columns. under Borrowers for Workset1. Assign the structural columns 10 Draw a pick box around the entire model to select all elements. 12 In the Filter dialog. click Check None.

and click Make Elements Editable. The puzzle-piece icons disappear. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click . select Beams and Columns. 15 On the Options Bar.All structural columns in the model are highlighted. for Workset. but the columns remain highlighted. and a workset puzzle-piece icon displays next to each column indicating it can be changed to editable. 14 Right-click one of the columns. Assigning Worksets | 447 .

and click OK. 448 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 18 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. 3 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. The columns and beams elements are now assigned for Workset1. under After save relinguish editable. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Making the Entire Workset Editable on page 448. Navigate to the location of the central file Worsksets Project-Central on the network drive. 19 In the Save to Central dialog. to save the local file. clear Borrowed Elements. 2 Click Open. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save.17 Click OK. you make the entire workset editable and assign individual elements to specific users. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Making the Entire Workset Editable In this exercise.

click Check None. Making the Entire Workset Editable | 449 . click . 8 In the Filter dialog. User1 is now listed as the Owner of Workset1. 7 On the Options Bar. notice User1 is listed under Borrowers for Beams and Columns. Assign the floor workset 6 Draw a pick box around the entire model to select all elements. 5 Click OK. and click the Editable on the right-side of the dialog. and select Floors. select Workset1. 4 In the Worksets dialog.In the Worksets dialog.

9 Click OK. All floors are highlighted. 12 Click OK. The slabs are now assigned for Workset1. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. for Workset. select Slabs. 450 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 10 On the Options Bar. click .

click . This is the keyboard shortcut for Visibility/Graphic override. 16 Click OK. and the garage ramp. click the Worksets tab. Making the Entire Workset Editable | 451 . assign the remaining worksets for the elevator shafts. 18 Enter VV. The roof is now assigned for Workset1. foundation. select Roof. 19 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 14 On the Options Bar. for Workset. Using the steps described in the previous procedure.Assign the roof workset 13 Select the roof as shown. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. Turn visibility on/off 17 Click elsewhere in the drawing area to deselect the roof.

and then click Apply and OK. 452 | Chapter 12 Worksets . clear the box next to the desired element. 22 Enter VV. 23 Check Beams and Columns. and Slabs. click the Worksets tab. Roof.20 Clear Beams and Columns. To turn off additional elements. Roof. The elements are now visible in the view. and Slabs. 21 The elements are now hidden from the view. Save to central file 24 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. and then click Apply and OK. and on the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

each user must check out worksets. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. This is a system setting. and check out worksets 6 Click File menu ➤ Open. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. User 2: Create a local file. one user has already created a local file. 4 Click the General Tab and.25 In the Save to Central dialog. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. and reload the latest changes. return to the Settings dialog. For training purposes. two users work on the structural model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. and proceed to Create a local copy. click Options. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. under User name. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. please do so before continuing. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. and reset the User name to your computer login name. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. 3 On the Settings menu. In the following section of this exercise.rvt. consider that person to be User 1. select: ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements 26 After the file is saved. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets project-Central. Use a second Revit Structure session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Structure window. 27 Under Comment. skip the following section. enter User 2. For training purposes. 2 Start a new Revit Structure session by double-clicking the Revit Structure icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. If you have not yet completed these exercises. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 453 . select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting the user name to User 2. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). make elements editable. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. Each modifies the structural model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. specifically sequenced. click File menu ➤ Save to save a local copy. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. Create a local copy 5 In this exercise. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. enter Reassigning elements to their own worksets. two users access the central file through a network connection. Using Worksets with Multiple Users on page 453. 28 Click OK. and click OK. instructions are staggered. Throughout the process.

click Options. 15 Select the Foundation workset. select the central file and. 24 Select any column on the foundation level as shown in the following illustration. and select Yes for Editable. You now have a local copy of the project. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. and click Save. 11 In the Save As dialog. open it now. In addition. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Beams and Columns. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 23 In the Project Browser. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. If it is not open. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. and click OK. and select Yes for Editable. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 8 Click Open. This file is for your use only. 14 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. 21 Select the Beams and Columns workset. If you only have one workset checked out. and move it. modify the structural model.7 In the Open dialog. 18 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. 22 Click OK. 12 In the File Save Options dialog. expand 3D Views. 454 | Chapter 12 Worksets . and click OK. under Open Worksets. select all the User-Created worksets. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. it becomes the active workset. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Foundation to Yes. and double-click 3D-Atrium. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. You are now the owner of that workset. 16 Click OK. select Specify. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Notice that the Foundation workset is checked out by User 2. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User 2. User 1: Check out worksets.

A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 27 In the Save to Central dialog. expand 3D Views. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. and double-click 3D-Atrium. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. and move it. 28 Click OK. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 455 . select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. select a footing. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser.

39 On the View menu. However. 37 In the Design Bar. and click OK. 35 On the Project Browser. select Yes for Editable. 40 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Roof. any elements added to the structure are automatically assigned to the active workset. under Structural Plans. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. 456 | Chapter 12 Worksets . click Slab. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Beams and Columns worksets. and sketch a new roof between any four beams. and check out additional worksets 32 Click File menu ➤ Reload Latest. You should turn on the visibility before adding a roof. Therefore. click Modify. you are asked if you want to make the Roof workset the active workset. This is because when the Roof workset was created. and click OK. select Roof to turn on its visibility. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. User 1: Reload latest worksets. The changes User 2 made are apparent.31 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. click the Worksets tab. 38 On the Design Bar. the Visible by default option was not selected. Even though the Roof workset is active. 33 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. 36 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. 41 Notice that the roof you added previously now displays. 34 Select Roof. Click Yes. click Pick Supports.

Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). 43 In the Save to Central dialog. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages.42 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. This exercise requires two users and. leave this file open in its current state. In this exercise. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. throughout this training. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. Each user checked out worksets. In the final exercise of this tutorial. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting the user name to User 2. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. 2 In the Worksets dialog. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. select them. There are specific instructions for each user. As each of you work. User 1: Check out worksets 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. modified the structure and published their changes back to the central file. leave this file open in its current state. At the appropriate point in this exercise. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 457. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. and click Open. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. you save the training file as a central file. two users worked on the same structure using worksets. you need to set up your central and local files. 44 Click OK. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 457 . you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. if any User-Created worksets are not open. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. In subsequent steps. Check out worksets. and these problems are rectified. Each user must have network access to the central file.

and select Yes for Editable. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. 458 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 11 Move the footing. click File menu ➤ Editing Requests. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 8 In the Project Browser. 4 Under Active Workset. verify that Editable Only is cleared. 12 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to move the footing. and click OK. You are now the owner of that workset. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 13 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. 6 In the Worksets dialog. User 2: Check out worksets 5 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. After you submit the request.3 Select the Foundation workset. expand 3D Views. You are now the owner of that workset. 7 Under Active Workset. 9 On the Options Bar. select the Beams and Columns workset. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. select Foundation. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. and click OK. and double-click 3D-Atrium. 10 Using the following illustration as a guide. At this point. select a footing. and select Yes for Editable. select Beams and Columns.

In this case. to Local. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 459 . 18 Click OK. and the other user granted it. click Check Now.14 In the Editing Requests dialog. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. and close 19 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. 22 Proceed to the next tutorial. select the following. In this multi-user exercise. 16 Click Close. and click OK. A message informs you that your request has been granted. you requested permission to edit the element. 15 Click Grant. User 2: Check for editability grant 17 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. 20 In the Save to Central dialog. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. select the request submitted by User 2. and notice the footing is in the new location. Project Coordination on page 461.

460 .

you begin by opening the Revit Structure file that contains the modified Revit Architecture file. levels. reviews each change individually. This task is accomplished using the copy monitor feature that was activated when the project was started. and columns for any future modifications.rvt NOTE Because some of the changes from the architect involve elements that are monitored by the copy monitor feature of Revit Structure. In the tutorial. an interference check is run on the model to correct the placement of any architectural elements (door. walls. and the copy monitor feature was activated. or window) that might interfere with elements in the Revit Structure 2009 model. Coordination Review In this lesson. the architect’s file was imported into Revit Structure. all changes are documented using the Revit Structure revision system feature. Once each change has been reviewed. you run an interference check to verify that the changes do not interfere with structural elements of the model. When the modified file is brought back into Revit Structure. depending on the impact to the design. In this tutorial.Project Coordination 13 You have received the latest model from the architect and changes have been made to the design. floors. and determines the impact of each modification on the structure. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the copy monitor feature automatically notifies you of the changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_Coordination. Starting a New Project on page 149. which can be accepted. Finally. 461 . This feature enabled the engineer to monitor the project grids. Finally. rejected. or postponed. the structural engineer imports the modified Revit Architecture model. a warning is displayed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK to open the file. click Training Files.

under Structural Plans. and click OK. and then click OK. 462 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. 8 On the View Toolbar. Selecting this discipline allows the architectural walls to be visible. 4 Select the linked file i_RBD_After. The modified Revit Architecture file will now be visible along with the Revit Structure file. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the building at grid line B.1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Apply. select the Revit Links tab. and notice the duplicate grid lines and the relocation of the stairway. Click . select Coordination for Discipline. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Level 3. 5 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click . under Graphics. 7 Enter ZF. This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit.rvt.

and draw a zoom box around the lower levels of the elevator shaft 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. click the Model Graphics Style control. Close all additional views that may have been opened accidentally. click Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 463 . The Revit Architecture file is highlighted. The Level 3 Plan view and the 3D view are displayed in separate windows.9 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the elevator shaft is visible as shown. On the View Control Bar. . and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft. 12 In the Structural Plan: Level 3 window: ■ ■ ■ Select . and the Coordination Review icon displays on the Options Bar. click as shown. . Click to select the linked file. and click Wireframe. 10 On the Toolbar. Click between grid lines A and B until the Revit Links box is displayed. 13 On the Options Bar.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Floors ➤ expand Monitor Floor Sketches. Click the message Floor: Floor: 6" Concrete.The Coordination Review lists all messages that require some type of action. Review change to Floor Sketch 15 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the 3D window is visible. press SHIFT. and a custom message that pertains to each New/Unresolved category. In the Action column. The selected floor from the structural model is highlighted in the 3D window. ■ Click the first message under Monitor Floor Sketches. ■ 464 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . Actions include: Postpone. 14 Click the 3D Views: 3D window to deselect the plan view. and then click Show. These messages identify elements that were deleted. Accept Difference. The structural engineer should address each message individually and take some form of action to resolve the conflict. select Copy Sketch to Floor: 6" Concrete. Display the review message for any individual floor by expanding Sketches are Different. or changed in some way from the architect’s file. Notice each floor is highlighted on the 3D view. 16 In the Coordination Review dialog. moved. Reject. and click Apply. and click Show. select the remaining messages.

select Modify Grid B. The grid line is adjusted to accommodate the architect’s change. Review location of elevator walls 19 On the Toolbar.The concrete floor sketches for all levels of the structure will be adjusted to accommodate the architect’s floor sketch change. Review location of grid B 17 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the plan view is visible. Grid B from the architect’s model is highlighted on the Level 3 window. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 465 . ■ For Action. Click the message i_RBD_After. do the following: ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Grids ➤ Maintain relative position of Grids ➤ Grid moved. and click Show. 18 In the Coordination Review dialog.rvt: Grids: Grid:B. and click Apply. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft in the plan view. click .

do the following: ■ Under New/Unresolved ➤ Walls. and select the remaining messages. press SHIFT. and click Apply.20 In the Coordination Review dialog. There are 4 changes involving the elevator shaft walls. expand Maintain wall position. Click the first message under Wall centerlines are different. For Action. Select one of the messages and notice the wall is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 plan view. ■ ■ 466 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . select Modify Wall Basic Wall: Generic 8" Masonry.

Click the Add Comment field.8" Masonry. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save As. In the Edit Comment dialog. enter Need to discuss with architect. and OK.The elevator walls on the structural model will be adjusted to accommodate the architect’s change. 22 In the Coordination Review dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK. click Apply. Review wall modifications 21 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the lower floors of the 3D View are visible. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 467 . and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Coordination-in progress. Click the message Walls: Basic Wall: Foundation .rvt. Click the Add Comment field. The structural engineer will discuss this change with the architect before proceeding. Select Postpone for Action. Click the message Walls: Basic Wall: Generic . Click OK. In the Coordination Review dialog.12" Concrete. enter Need to discuss with architect. Select Postpone for Action. ■ ■ In the Edit Comment dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Walls ➤ Monitor Wall Sketches ➤ Sketch is missing.

Interference Check on page 468. select i_RBD_After. 468 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . The next step is to select the architect’s file so it can be checked against the structural project.24 Proceed to the next exercise. you use the interference tool in Revit Structure to check on 2 potential problems with the stairway. 2 On the right-side of the Interference Check dialog.rvt 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Interference Check ➤ Run Check. i_RST_Coordination-in progress. and the second is a structural brace that interferes with a door opening in the stairway. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.rvt for Categories from. Interference Check In this exercise. The first is the possible interference between the stairs and a relocated structural column. The default table compares elements within the same project. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

Run interference check on columns and stairs 3 In the list for the current project.Notice the categories for the architect’s file differ from the current Revit Structure project. Interference Check | 469 . and Stairs for the Revit Architecture project. select Structural Columns.

4 Click OK. expand the message for Level 3 Stairs as shown. do the following: ■ Under Structural Columns. 5 In the Interference Report dialog. 470 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . A report is generated showing all instances of interference between columns in the structural project and the upper-left stairway in the Revit Architecture project.

Each representing a different level. Under Save as type. ■ Select i_RBD_After. Click Save. Interference Check | 471 . The report provides detail on the interference and should be used to discuss the problem with the architect. Click Export to generate an interference report. Notice the column of the structural model is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 window. enter Columns vs. ■ ■ Export the Column interference report 6 In the Export dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. Under File name.html). select a folder location on your local computer.rvt: Stairs: Stair: 7" max riser 11" tread. and that it interferes with the stairway. Stair Check.There are 7 instances of interference between structural columns and the upper-left stairway. select Revit Interference Report (*. Notice the stairway of the architect’s model is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 window Select Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange Column: W10X33.

and Doors for the Revit Architecture project. 9 In the Interference Check dialog. 472 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . 10 Select Structural Framing ➤ Vertical Bracing for Current Project. There is 1 instance of interference between structural bracing and the door for the upper-left stairway. 11 Click OK.7 In the Interference Report dialog. click Close. Run interference check on vertical bracing 8 Click Tools menu ➤ Interference Check ➤ Run Check.rvt for Categories from. select i_RBD_After.

■ Click Export to generate an interference report. Select i_RBD_After. Notice the brace from the structural model is highlighted on both the 3D view and Structural Plan view windows. select a folder location on your local computer.12 In the Interference Report dialog.rvt: Doors: Door Single. Under File name. Under Save as type. Interference Check | 473 . also the brace interferes with the opening. Door opening. Export the Brace and Door interference report 13 In the Export dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. enter Brace vs. select Revit Interference Report (*. Select Structural Framing: L-Angle: L4X4X3/4 ■ . do the following: ■ ■ Under Structural Framing ➤ expand Doors.html). Notice the door from the architect’s model is highlighted on both the 3D View and Structural Plan view windows.

the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. a new training file is provided. When you use this option. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. Using Revision Tracking on page 474. For example. and enter Moved Grid B west by 2'. You can create a sequence of revisions. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. Add a revision for grid B 3 Click on the value for Release Date. 474 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . 4 Click on the value for Description. 14 Click File menu ➤ Save and save the file in a folder of your preference. click Training Files. The report provides detail on the interference and should be used to discuss the problem with the architect. yet as concise as possible. Specify a revision numbering method 1 On the Settings menu. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. click Revisions. This is the date the revisions were identified. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the title block of each project sheet. click Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you select By Project.■ Click Save. 15 In the Interference Report dialog. 2 In the Revisions dialog. and enter 2/15/06. When Issued is selected. verify that By Sheet is selected for Numbering Method.rvt. if the active revision is number 1. In general. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. 16 Proceed to the next lesson. Using Revision Tracking Revit Structure provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. Setting Up a Revision Table Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the revision is locked and issued to the field. In the next lesson. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. and open Imperial\i_RST_Revision. 6 Verify that Visible is selected.

under Sheets (all). and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. 5 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. double-click S. you can add a revision cloud to the 3D view once it is placed on a sheet. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. and select Activate View. click Revision Cloud. However. Sketching Revision Clouds on page 475. click near grid line B. 4 In the drawing area. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. Revision clouds have read-only properties. 3 Right-click the view on the sheet. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.1 . You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D model views. In most instances.Level 3 Framing Plan. and OK. Each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 6 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. including revision number and revision date.If Visible is not selected. Add a revision cloud for grid B 1 In the Project Browser. Sketching Revision Clouds | 475 . 7 Click Apply. you indicate the changes made by the architect graphically with a revision cloud.

and enter Moved Stair exit 2' west. yet as concise as possible. Add Remaining Revisions In this exercise. click Finish Sketch. NOTE At this point. the revision is locked and issued to the field. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. Add Remaining Revisions on page 476. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and enter 2/20/06. In this tutorial. When Issued is selected. 476 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . 3 Click on the value for Release Date. Add a revision for the elevator stairs 1 On the Settings menu. the revision for grid line B should be issued to the field to prevent any changes to the revision cloud. click Revisions. click Add: New. 6 Verify that Visible is selected.rvt. the revisions to the project will be issued after all the revision clouds have been drawn. the remaining revisions for the project are documented.rvt. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table.7 On the Design Bar. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save As. In general. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. i_RST_Revision-in progress. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 In the Revisions dialog. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified grid line. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. 4 Click on the value for Description. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Revision-in progress.

This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. 8 In the drawing area. click Finish Sketch. Add a revision cloud for the elevator stairs 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 14 Click on the value for Description. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. and enter Research brace. click Revision Cloud. Add Remaining Revisions | 477 . In most instances. click Add: New. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud.If Visible is not selected. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. and enter 2/21/06. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified stairs. Add a revision for the brace interference 12 In the Revisions dialog. 11 On the Design Bar. click above the elevator shaft. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. 13 Click on the value for Release Date.

20 In the drawing area. If Visible is not selected. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. In most instances.In general. When Issued is selected.Stair Shafts Sections. the revision is locked and issued to the field. 16 Verify that Visible is selected. yet as concise as possible. 478 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . 19 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 21 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. under Sheets (all). click above the brace. double-click S. 22 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. Add a revision cloud for the brace interference 17 In the Project Browser. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. and select Activate View. click Revision Cloud. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. 18 Right-click the center view on the sheet. 15 Verify that Issued is cleared.2 .

Add Remaining Revisions | 479 . A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. 25 Click on the value for Release Date. 27 Verify that Issued is cleared. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. When Issued is selected. Add a revision for the door interference 24 In the Revisions dialog. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review.23 On the Design Bar. 26 Click on the value for Description. 28 Verify that Visible is selected. click Finish Sketch. The revision cloud is displayed around the brace. yet as concise as possible. the revision is locked and issued to the field. click Add: New. and enter Research door. and enter 2/22/06. In general. revision descriptions should be comprehensive.

Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. 480 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . 30 Right-click the right view on the sheet. 35 On the Design Bar. The revision cloud is displayed around the door. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Finish Sketch.rvt. and select Activate View. you apply a revision tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. Add a revision cloud for the door interference 29 In the Project Browser. 31 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. 34 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. In most instances. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. i_RST_Revision-in progress. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it.If Visible is not selected. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. under Sheets (all). 36 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click S.Stair Shafts Sections. 32 In the drawing area.2 . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click Revision Cloud. Tagging Revision Clouds on page 480. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 33 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click above the door. 37 Proceed to the next exercise.

The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud for grid line B. and because the revision is the first in the project. 6 Click to place the tag.rvt. Because you chose to number by sheet.Level 3 Framing Plan. under Sheets (all). 5 In the drawing area. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Leader. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. Working with Revisions In this exercise. double-click S. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. Working with Revisions | 481 . and select Activate View. and lock it from further changes. 7 Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add revision tags for all remaining revision clouds. you first view the revisions that were created in the previous exercise. and then issue the revisions to create a record. the cloud is tagged as number 1. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. i_RST_Revision-in progress. Working with Revisions on page 481. 2 Right-click the view on the sheet.Place a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. click Tag ➤ Tag By Category. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.1 . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

2 Select . 6 Select Issued for each revision entry. you can no longer modify it. Issue a revision 5 After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. under Sheets (all). On the Settings menu.1 . 3 In the Project Browser. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area.View the revisions 1 In the Project Browser. 482 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . double-click S. under Sheets (all). you prevent further changes to the revision.2 .Stair Shafts Sections. and click OK. and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown. NOTE After you issue a revision. You do this by issuing the revision. 4 Select .Level 3 Framing Plan. and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown. double-click S. click Revisions. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds.

7 Click File menu ➤ Close. Working with Revisions | 483 . Structural Analytical Modelling on page 485. 8 Proceed to the next tutorial. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing.

484 .

When working with the analytical model. the template is still applied to the 3D view. You can apply a template to an existing or new view. Discipline. To update a view. The physical model that is used for documentation. NOTE Reapplying a view template overrides previous view property modifications and View templates can only be applied to geometric views. loads and load combinations. Revit Structure View Templates provide initial conditions for a view.Structural Analytical Modelling 14 In this tutorial. The analytical model consists of structural components. interaction with steel detailers and fabricators and also the analytical model that can be consumed by multiple 3rd party analysis software. Detail level. As you create objects and the physical model. the View Template saves and applies only common properties. You can save the View Template from one type of view and apply those same properties to any other geometric view. geometry. Though the View Range property applies only to plan views. Views and View Templates are not linked. material properties. you can apply that same template to a 3D view. Because each view in Revit Structure consists of different properties. quantity take off. Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process Revit Structure combines 2 models. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. Revit Structure applies only the properties applicable to both. You can also apply an existing view’s view properties using the Apply View Template command. component properties. All views created with that template are not automatically updated. you learn some basic concepts of the Revit Structure 2009 analytical model and how to prepare the model to be analyzed by a third party analysis software. 485 . you can reapply the modified template. if you save a template from a plan view. the analytical model is created automatically based on engineering rules and logical relationships between the structural objects. For example. View Templates help standardize the look of all views.

The Structural Analytical Normal view template will present structural components in this new analytical plan view with both the analytical model and the physical model displayed as shown. Apply the view template 1 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template.rvt. select Structural Analytical Normal or Structural Analytical Stick. 486 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and run an analytical consistency check on the analytical model shown below. 2 In the Select View Template dialog. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Analytical_Checks. you learn how to check member supports. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Analytical Checks In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The Structural Analytical Stick view template will present structural components in this new analytical plan with only the analytical model displayed as shown. Analytical checks should be run at different phases of the project and the model adjusted accordingly. click Training Files.

5 Close the Warning dialog. Notice that the structural element is highlighted on the model as each warning is selected. This tutorial will run both the Member Supports Check and Analytical/Physical Model Consistency Check for all elements selected from the Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings dialog. A Warning dialog appears notifying you that there are structural elements that may not be supported properly. wall. applying either the stick or normal analytical view template to the view will cause loads to be displayed. or isolated). to view each warning. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. select the Analytical Model Settings tab. Check member supports 3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Check Member Supports.NOTE If the visibility of loads is tuned off in the view. Verify analytical settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. Revit Structure checks for instances where a structural element (column) is missing a foundation support (slab. 4 In the Warning dialog click . Analytical Checks | 487 . Review support warnings 6 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. under the Analytical Model Settings tab.

Click Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange-Column: W10X33 ■ ■ Click Show. 488 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .7 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Structural Element may not be supported ➤ Warning 1. Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog.

The unsupported element is highlighted and displayed in the drawing area. Analytical Checks | 489 . 9 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Circular Support Chain Detected ➤ First Warning Click Structural Framing: W-Wide Flange-Column: W18X40 ■ Click Show. Notice the column is not supported by an isolated footing. Review circular reference warnings 8 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings.

14 On the Design bar. 13 Place an isolated footing at each of the following grid locations: E-1. click Modify. D-4. and H-4. double-click Level 2. D-2.■ Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog. Correct member supports 11 In the Project Browser. click Close. under Structural Plans. 490 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . E-3. Correct circular reference 15 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. 16 Correct the placement of the structural beams as shown. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. 10 In the Warning dialog. Notice the highlighted beam requires an adjacent beam for support on one end. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Ground Level. Notice that there are missing isolated footings at specific grid locations. H-3.

3 In the Warning dialog. This indicates the specific element has a physical length but no analytical length. Revit Structure checks for consistency between the analytical and physical models. Review warnings 5 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. Click Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange-Column: W10X49 Analytical Checks | 491 . and double-click 3D. A Warning dialog appears notifying you that there are model elements that have a zero-length. expand 3D Views. 6 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Zero-length Analytical Model Detected ➤ first Warning. 2 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Analytical / Physical Model Consistency Check. click to view each warning. 4 Close the Warning dialog. Notice that the structural element is highlighted on the model as each warning is selected.Run a consistency check 1 In the Project Browser.

under Analytical Model. Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog. notice that Ground Level is selected as the value for Top Vertical Projection. click . and on the Options Bar. 492 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 7 In the Warning dialog. The Zero-length element is highlighted and displayed in the drawing area. In the Element Properties dialog.■ ■ Click Show. click Close. 8 Select the column that was previously highlighted.

12 Press CTRL. and select the 3 columns identified in the warning dialog as shown.9 In the Element Properties dialog. Correct zero-length elements 10 Enter ZF (Zoom To Fit). click OK. Analytical Checks | 493 . 11 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible as shown.

Load Cases on page 494. for Top Vertical Projection. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. Load Cases In the Structural Settings dialog. click OK. 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. The Warning dialog does not appear. a new training file is provided.13 On the Options Bar. you edit and add load cases. In the next exercise. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. click . The following illustration shows the Structural Settings dialog with the Load Cases tab selected. This indicates the zero-length warnings have been fixed. select Top of Column. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Analytical / Physical Model Consistency Check. You can save the open file if you wish. 14 Under Analytical Model. 494 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .

5 Under Category. you add or delete load natures. Load Cases | 495 . Add a Load Case 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. edit. Revit Structure provides a default number. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM3. NOTE The Case Number column of the table is read-only. you learn how to add new load cases. In this table. or delete load cases. The second table is the Load Natures table. Revit Structure provides several default load case types that you can use to generate loads in the model. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this table. Add a load nature 1 Click in the Load Natures table. A new load case is added to the bottom of the table. Select an existing load case record in the table. 4 Click in the name cell of the new load case. In this exercise. and rename it to Roof Hung. The selected load case is copied in the table. you add. A new load nature record is added to the bottom of the table. and the Add button changes to Duplicate.rvt. then click Duplicate. select the Load Cases tab. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. select Dead Loads. 2 Click Add. NOTE You can also create a new load case with the Duplicate command. click Training Files.The first table is the Load Cases table. 3 Click Add.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 496 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and wind loads to the model.Analytical. Revit Structure has several coordinate systems for loads: ■ ■ ■ project coordinate system current work plane host work plane The project coordinate system displays in the view when you click Loads on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. A host for a load has its own work plane.rvt. NOTE The new load nature is now available under the Nature column of the Load Cases table. expand 3D Views. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise. and enter an appropriate name.rvt Change the coordinate system orientation 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Loads to the Model Loads are added to the model using a coordinate system. expand Views (all). and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_SAM3-in progress. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. Hosts include slabs and beams. Then you create load combinations for use by analysis and design software. 4 Click OK to close the Structural Settings dialog. perpendicular to the host’s work plane. The orientation of the project coordination is as illustrated: A view has a work plane that can be used for object placement. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. and double-click View 1 .3 Click in the cell of the new load nature. Adding Loads to the Model on page 496. Loads are placed perpendicular to the view’s current work plane. using the project coordinate system. live loads. and loads can be placed by default. you will be adding dead loads.

and click OK. Adding Loads to the Model | 497 . 8 On the Options Bar. . click Loads. click the Model Graphics Style control. 3 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the model so the garage sloped slab is visible.2 On the View Control Bar. click (Area Load). and click Hidden Line. select Top of Slab for Vertical Projection. select 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 9 Click the garage sloped slab. TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option. 4 Select . draw a zoom box around the garage sloped slab and select it. under Analytical Model. 5 On the Options Bar. Use the tooltips to be sure you click the correct option.

11 Select the load. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Views (all). . click Loads. Add an area load at level 2 using slab as host 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 2-Analytical. 10 On the Design Bar. The load coordinates are now parallel to the project. Notice the coordinate system indicates the load is perpendicular to the host (ramp).The load is placed on the garage sloped slab. click 13 Click OK. 498 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Structural Analysis. expand Structural Plans. select Project for Orient to. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. click (Area Load).

double-click Level 2-Analytical. 4 In the Type Selector. 6 On the Design Bar. Adding Loads to the Model | 499 .0300 ksf for the Fz 1 parameter. 10 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click Element Properties. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. Add wind load at Level 2 9 In the Project Browser. 5 Select the Level 2 slab perimeter as shown. and click OK. enter -0. select Area Load: Area Load 1. click Modify to exit the Loads tool. click Loads. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Right-click on the load you placed.TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option. under Structural Plans.

click Modify. enter Wind Load. TIP You may need to press TAB to highlight the line load. and click OK. 14 Right-click on the Line Load 1. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting Line Load 1. 17 In the Element Properties dialog.11 On the Options Bar. and click Element Properties. click Edit/New. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. as shown. 12 Sketch a line load from one corner of the slab to the other.0400 kip/ft for Fx 1 500 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 16 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option. 13 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ Enter 0 kip/ft for Fz 1 Enter 0. click (Line Load).

20 In the Project Browser.■ Select WIND1(3) for Load Case. and double-click View 1 .Analytical. 19 On the View Control Bar. draw a zoom box around the beams on the east side of the structure as shown. expand Views (all). expand 3D Views. click the Model Graphics Style control. and click OK. 21 Select . and click Hidden Line. under Structural Plans. Adding Loads to the Model | 501 . double-click Level 2 .Analytical in order to view the added loads. 18 In the Project Browser.

22 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 502 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 23 Draw a temporary grid as shown. click Grid.

29 Select . 26 On the Design bar. 28 Double-click the new elevation bubble. 25 Place the framing elevation symbol so that it will snap to the temporary grid approximately as shown. 24 On the View tab of the Design bar. The elevation view opens.This grid is drawn for reference only. and press DELETE. click Modify. Adding Loads to the Model | 503 . 27 Select the temporary grid. click Framing Elevation. draw a zoom box around the lower floors of the structure as shown. and will be deleted in a later step.

33 Drawing the load from one corner of the flange to the other. 31 On the Options Bar. select the edge of the flange as the starting point for the load. click Loads. You will see the load is oriented to project orientation. The load projection plane is now oriented to the workplane of the temporary grid line plane to which the framing elevation was pointing. 32 On Level 2. under Structural Analysis. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. 504 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option. click . click (Line Load). select Workplane for Orient to. 34 Select the load. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. as shown. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option.

Load Combination | 505 .36 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. enter 1. Load Combination on page 505.rvt. click Structural Settings. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 3 Click Add in the Load Combination section. 4 Under Name. 8 Click Add. and click Add. 5 Click on the Edit Selected Formula table. 10 Under Case or Combination. enter DL+LL.rvt Add a DL + LL combination 1 On the Settings menu. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. enter 1. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Under Factor. 9 Under Factor. 7 Under Case or Combination. You edit and add load combinations in the Structural Settings dialog. select LL1.4. click the Load Combinations tab. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_SAM3-in progress. select DL1. Load Combination In this exercise.6. Notice that the Formula field under Load Combination changed automatically to show the new factor. you add a load combination to your model for use by the analysis and design software.

and click Add. 23 Select Row 2. select WIND1.2.3.Add a DL + LL + wind combination with a factor 11 Click on the Load Combination table. enter 0. 13 Click on the Edit Selected Formula table. 25 Under State.5. select DL1. 12 Under Name. enter 1. 506 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 14 Under Factor. 20 Under Factor. select Ultimate. enter DL+LL+WIND. 24 Under Type. and click Add. 22 Click on the Load Combination table. select LL1. 17 Under Factor. Add a LL1 combination with a factor 16 Click Add. Add a WIND1 combination with a factor 19 Click Add in the Edit Selected Formula table. select Envelope. 21 Under Case or Combination. and enter 1. 18 Under Case or Combination. 15 Under Case or Combination.

26 In the Structural Settings dialog. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 In the Select Items to Copy dialog. Scroll down the list of items. click OK. and select Load Types. Transfer Project Standards In this exercise. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. Transfer Project Standards on page 507. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. you transfer the load combination table to a new or existing project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Transfer Project Standards | 507 . Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. select the file that contains the load table. ■ ■ ■ Under Copy from. 2 Click File menu ➤ Transfer Project Standards. Click Check None.rvt Importing load types and combinations from a previous project 1 Open an existing Revit Structure project or create a new project.

6 On the Structural Settings dialog. click Overwrite. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. 508 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 4 In the Duplicate Types dialog.■ Click OK. click the Load Combinations tab.

you document the analysis by adding an annotation. Documenting the Analytical Model on page 509. and creating an analytical schedule. Documenting the Analytical Model In this exercise. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save. expand Views (all). Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. 3 Click the Wind Load to place the tag. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. expand Structural Plans. and double-click Level 2 Analytical.The load combinations are displayed. click Tag ➤ By Category. Documenting the Analytical Model | 509 .rvt Add annotation 1 In the Project Browser.

6 Click on the drag control for the wind load tag and position approximately as shown.4 Click the Area Load to place the tag. click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar. 510 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .

select Line Loads and click OK. 11 Using the same process. right-click on the Design Bar. select Fx 1 and click Add. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Fx 2 Fy 1 Fy 2 Fz 1 Fz 2 Nature 12 Under Scheduled fields. 8 In the New Schedule dialog. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. Define the fields 9 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.Create a load schedule 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The Fx 1 field is moved under Scheduled fields. Documenting the Analytical Model | 511 . 10 Under Available fields. click the Fields tab. and click View. under Category.

under Structural Plans. the geometry of the analytical model may be adjusted in relation to those elements that it joins. In addition. double-click Ground Level . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 14 Click File menu ➤ Save. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model on page 512. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. Revit Structure provides a reset tool to reset analytical models back to their original location relative to the corresponding physical model. 2 Zoom into the column at grid line F .rvt Align the analytical beam 1 In the Project Browser. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model There are some structural configurations that are not suitable for direct integration with structural analysis and design software.13 Click OK.3. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. A schedule is created that includes the analytical elements in the project. 512 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 15 Proceed to the next exercise.Analytical. Manual adjustment is required before a structural model is input into the analysis and design software. For this reason.

4 Press TAB. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model | 513 . 5 Press TAB.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Adjust Analytical Model. and select the corner endpoint of the analytical plane of the slab. and select the endpoint of the analytical line of the beam.

Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model on page 514. For example. In the next exercise. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model The analytical model that is generated in Revit Structure has discrepancies that are not suitable for direct integration with structural analysis and design software. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Click File menu ➤ Close.The analytical model lines and planes are now connected at the same location for analysis purposes. a new training file is provided. ■ Creating beams The corresponding beam to slab projection planes are matched. You can save the open file if you wish. NOTE The auto-detect feature automatically adjusts the analytical model when creating the following structural elements within a project. setting both planes to level 2 as shown: ■ Creating columns Places the analytical model of columns and walls in the same plane as shown: ■ Creating slabs and walls 514 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Revit Structure provides the capability to automatically adjust the analytical model to reduce or eliminate these discrepancies for newly created elements as well as the ability to disassociate or reassociate the auto-detect parameter for existing elements.

despite any variation in wall thicknesses or projection plane location as shown: If a wall and slab are joined. the top or bottom plane of the wall’s analytical model will coincide with the slab analytical model as shown: If a wall has a portion that extends beyond the roof (commonly known as parapets).Aligns the vertical and horizontal analytical projection plane of walls. it can be excluded in the wall’s analytical model to exclude loads that extend above a level with framing members. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 515 .

Auto-detect tolerances 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Auto_Detect. They include distances for the analytical-to-physical model and analytical adjustments. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog.rvt.If the analytical edge of slab coincides with the beam or wall analytical model. 516 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . select the Analytical Model Settings tab. 3 Click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. or it can be trimmed back the analytical/physical model of the slab as shown: NOTE The following adjustments to the analytical model are applied to an existing project to better demonstrate the auto-detect feature. This exercise applies the auto-detect feature within the tolerances specified in this dialog. the exterior of the wall can be defined as the analytical projection plane. and the auto-detect tolerances for both horizontal and vertical planes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.

2 On the Toolbar. 4 On the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around one of the beams. click . double-click Level 2. click as shown. 5 Move the cursor over the top of the beam as shown. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 517 . . and draw a zoom box around the lower-left corner of the structure 3 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view.Adjust the beam to slab vertical offset 1 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans.

The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab. a single beam is selected 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click . click . and on the Option Bar. under Analytical Model. NOTE The properties for all beams of the same type should be changed. 8 Click the slab. 6 Click the beam. 518 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and then click OK.The dot located at the top of the beam. represents the vertical projection plane of the beam analytical model. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. select Top of Slab. for Vertical Projection. select Auto-detect. and on the Option Bar. and then click OK. under Analytical Model. For demo purposes. for Vertical Projection.

double-click Level 2 . 11 On the Toolbar. and click Zoom in Region. click . 13 Draw a zoom box around the column as shown. and draw a zoom box around the column at grid location A3. Notice the green line representing the analytical model of the concrete wall is not aligned with the blue dot representing the analytical model of the column. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 519 .Analytical. Adjust the column to wall horizontal offset 10 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. The dot located at the top of the slab. right-click. represents the vertical projection plane of the analytical model.The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab. 12 In an empty part of the drawing area.

and on the Option Bar. select Auto-detect. under Analytical Model.14 Click the column. Adjust the vertical alignment of different wall types 17 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. click . The geometry of the column and wall are now joined. aligns with the horizontal projection plane of the wall. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft located on the lower-right side of the structure as shown. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Join Geometry). 520 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 18 On the Toolbar. double-click Level 2. for Horizontal Projection. The horizontal projection plane for the column. and then select the column. select the wall. and then click OK. click . 16 On the Tools toolbar.

19 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 521 .

These lines represent the vertical projection plane of the upper and lower wall analytical model. click . 21 Press TAB. and select Chain of Walls or Lines. select Auto-detect. 22 On the Option Bar. for Horizontal Projection. and then click OK. 522 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Check the Status Bar to verify you are selecting the chain of walls and not a single wall.Notice the solid green lines are not aligned. under Analytical Model. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Move the cursor over the lower wall. The dotted green line represents reference plane 1.

26 Click the upper wall. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 523 . 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Option Bar. and then click OK. and click Zoom in Region. click . 24 In an empty part of the drawing area. for Horizontal Projection.The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the vertical projection plane of the upper wall. select Plane 1. right-click. under Analytical Model. 25 Draw a zoom box around the center of the upper and lower walls as shown.

The vertical projection plane for both the upper and lower walls are now aligned with vertical projection plane 1. 29 In an empty part of the drawing area. 30 Draw a zoom box around the intersection of the beam and column. double-click Section 3. right-click. 524 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and click Zoom in Region. Adjust the vertical alignment of a wall and slab 28 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section).

34 In the Element Properties dialog. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 525 . select Bottom of Slab. select Auto-detect. 31 Click the lower wall. Adjust the horizontal alignment of the slab to wall 33 Click the slab. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. click .The brown line represents the analytical model of the slab. and on the Option Bar. click . under Analytical Model. under Analytical Model. Notice the green line extends to the top of the beam. for Top Vertical Projection. and on the Option Bar. and the green line represents the analytical model of the wall. and then click OK. and then click OK. for Vertical Projection. The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the horizontal projection plane of the slab.

under Analytical Model. 35 Click the slab. click No. 39 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Option Bar.The horizontal projection plane for the slab (brown line) is now aligned with the vertical projection plane of the wall (green line). You are now in sketch mode and the slab perimeter appears in the drawing area. Notice the analytical line of the wall moves with the analytical line of the slab. 41 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section). and then click OK. 36 In the Go to View dialog. 42 Click the lower wall. and on the Option Bar. for Analytical Slab Edge. click . click Finish Sketch. under Analytical Model. 37 Select the left sketch line of the slab as shown. In the Revit dialog. for Horizontal Projection. and then click Open View. select Auto-detect. 38 On the Option Bar. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Section 3. select Structural Plan: Level 2 . and then click OK.Analytical. 40 On the Design Bar. select Exterior Face. click . 526 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . click .

select Top of Wall. click . and then click OK. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. for Top Vertical Projection. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. select Auto-Detect Horizontal Projection. under Analytical Model. Adjust the column to the lower wall analytical projection 44 Click the column. and on the Option Bar. click . and on the Option Bar. 46 Click the lower wall. and then click OK. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 527 . under Analytical Model.The horizontal projection plane of the slab is now aligned with the exterior face of the wall.

528 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and draw a zoom box around the beam located in the upper-left corner of both views as shown. double-click Level 3 . 49 Enter ZF. 51 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 52 On the Toolbar. Close any additional open windows.Analytical. 50 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. Adjust the horizontal alignment of a beam 48 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. double-click Level 3. Both windows will be visible in the drawing area. click .The vertical projection plane of the column (blue line) is now aligned with the exterior face of the wall (green line).

and then click OK. Press TAB. do the following: ■ ■ Move the cursor over the beam. 54 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Option Bar. . Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the shape handle and not the beam. click Notice the beam is highlighted in both open views. select Auto-Detect. and select the beam shape handle. ■ Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 529 . for Horizontal Projection. under Analytical Model.53 Click the beam. 55 In the Level 3 window. Extend each end of the beam as shown.

530 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Boundary Conditions on page 531.Notice the beam in the analytical view remains unchanged. a new training file is provided. In the next exercise. 56 Click File menu ➤ Close. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. You can save the open file if you wish.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. under Visibility. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Structural Foundation. 6 Draw a zoom box around the columns located on the lower-left side of the structure as shown. 4 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. select Fixed. 2 Enter ZF. click Apply. you add a boundary condition to your model for use by the analysis and design software. right-click.Boundary Conditions In this exercise. right-click. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and then click OK. and click Zoom in Region. 9 In an empty part of the drawing area. click Boundary Conditions. and click Zoom in Region. 8 On the Options Bar. Add a point boundary condition to the base of a column 1 In the Project Browser ➤ 3D Views. Boundary Conditions | 531 . 10 Draw a zoom box around the base of one of the columns.Analytical. and for State. click Training Files. double-click View 1 . click (Point Boundary Condition). 11 Click the end of the blue line (representing the analytical model of the beam) to place the point boundary condition. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Boundary_Conditions. 5 In an empty part of the drawing area.

12 Repeat this technique to add a fixed boundary condition to the next closest beam as shown. 532 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . select Pinned. 14 On the Option Bar. press CTRL. and select the other symbol. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Click one of the boundary condition symbols. and then click OK. click . under Structural Analysis. for State.

click (Line Boundary Condition). and draw a zoom box around the foundation. and for State. 18 On the Toolbar. 17 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view until the foundation wall is displayed as shown. select Pinned. Boundary Conditions | 533 . Add a line boundary condition to the footing 16 Enter ZF. click . 19 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Boundary Conditions. 20 On the Options Bar. 21 Click the green line (representing the analytical model of the foundation) to place the line boundary condition.Notice the boundary condition now displays a pinned state symbol.

23 Proceed to the next exercise. a new training file is provided. or member addition. In the next exercise. Export the model to analysis software 1 Click Tools menu ➤ External Tools ➤ Send Model. NOTE The External Tools menu is only available once an approved 3rd party analysis software application has been installed. The application programming interface (API) starts. 2 Proceed to the next tutorial. 534 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Size changes to your model and geometric modifications to your model involving member deletion. via an Application Programming Interface (API). Exporting Revit Structure Files on page 535. All views. that you confirm in the analysis software. If you choose to have the API open the software and run your model. click Help ➤ Structural Analysis Partners. You can open the analysis software or write to an export file for later use. For more information. and detail sheets are updated according to changes that you import into Revit Structure. Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software on page 534. sections. Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software Revit Structure links to an analysis and design software. In addition. You can save the open file if you wish.22 Click File menu ➤ Close. elevations. including structural plans. the API also returns you to your Revit Structure model and updates it. are imported back into Revit Structure. member relocation. some internal analysis software parameters are imported into Revit Structure.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. You then select a 2D structural plan view and export the file as a DWG format. In this tutorial.Exporting Revit Structure Files 15 Your Revit Structure 2009 project can be exported into several different AutoCAD formats. or you can export a 3D view directly into AutoCAD Architecture. Finally. expand 3D Views. and open Imperial\i_RST_Export. You can export a 2D view (plan. 535 . which is imported into AutoCAD 2007. Export CAD formats 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to export your project into both 2D and 3D formats for improved coordination with architects and engineers.). you export sheets from the project and import them into AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 as 2D images.rvt. and double-click 3D . maintains the properties of all structural elements as true AutoCAD Architecture objects. Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007 Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. section. you begin by exporting a 3D view of the structural model as a DWG format and importing the file into AutoCAD Architecture 2007.Atrium. You can also export the project drawing sheets and import them as 2D images. etc. sheet. Exporting CAD Formats In this lesson. or schedule into AutoCAD. click Training Files. elevation. Revit Structure.

NOTE You can only export the 3D model in a 3D view. click Short. select a folder on your local computer. 536 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . Under Save as type. The existing file name is automatically shortened. do the following: ■ Under Solids (3D views only). ■ ■ Click Options.dwg). select AutoCAD 2007 DWG Files (*. 3 In the Export dialog.2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. do the following: ■ ■ Under Save in. select Export as AutoCAD Architecture and AutoCAD MEP Options. Under File naming. 4 In the Export Options dialog.

NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture. Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007 | 537 . 8 Navigate to the file location. 7 Click File menu ➤ Open. select AutoCAD Architecture objects. click Save.■ ■ Under Prefer. and click Open. View the 3D file in AutoCAD Architecture 2007 6 Open AutoCAD Architecture 2007. Click OK. 5 On the Export dialog.

10 Minimize the AutoCAD Architecture program. the Revit Structure model appears as shown. and braces are converted to the corresponding type of AutoCAD Architecture structural member. Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD on page 539 538 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . 11 In Revit Structure. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Export-in progress. Revit Structure columns.rvt. click File menu ➤ Save As. beams. and notice it is a true AutoCAD Architecture structural element. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.When the file is opened in AutoCAD Architecture 2007. 9 Select a beam as shown.

Click Save. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Save in.dwg). select a folder on your local computer. i_RST_Export-in progress. Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD | 539 .Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD Training File ■ Continue to use the training file that was saved in the previous exercise. clear the existing name and enter Framing Plan Level 2. Under Save as type. 1 In the Project Browser. click Long (Specify prefix for all exports).rvt. 3 In the Export dialog. Under File name. expand Structural Plans. and double-click Level 2. select AutoCAD 2007 DWG Files (*. 2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. Under File naming.

rvt. 8 In Revit Structure. i_RST_Export-in progress. the Revit Structure exported Level 3 Plan appears.If the view was set to wireframe. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture. Exporting Sheets on page 540 Exporting Sheets Training File ■ Continue to use the training file that was saved in the previous exercise. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. When the file is opened in AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007. View the 2D file 4 Maximize the AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 program. 6 Navigate to the file location. 7 Minimize the AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture program. a warning dialog appears. click Hidden Line Removal. On the View’s export mode dialog. and click Open. click File menu ➤ Save. 5 Click File menu ➤ Open. 540 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files .

clear Views.Export sheets 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. you can flatten xrefs by selecting the Export each view or sheet as a single file option as shown. Select each sheet. Under Export Range. and click OK. select a folder on your local computer. NOTE If you are exporting to a DWG file. click Selected views/sheets ➤ Select. 4 On the Export dialog. 3 In the View/Sheet Set dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Under Save in. do the following: ■ ■ Under Show. Exporting Sheets | 541 . click Save. This option is automatically selected for DXF files and not available for DGN or SAT files. 2 In the Export dialog. Click No when asked if you want to save the settings for use in a future Revit session.

5 Close the Revit Structure file. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture.If the view was set to wireframe. click Hidden Line Removal. 542 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . 7 Click File menu ➤ Open. navigate to a folder of your preference and rename the file. a warning dialog appears. If you wish to save the changes. and click Open. On the View’s export mode dialog. 8 Navigate to the location of the files saved in the previous exercise. View the Revit Structure sheets in AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 6 Maximize the AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture program.

Exporting Sheets | 543 . they appear as shown.When the sheets are opened in AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture.

544 .

or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. You provide the information necessary to describe uniquely the family geometry. each with a different size.rfa extension.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Structure to help you manage your data and make changes easily. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. There are. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. because there is only one file to track. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. exceptions to this rule. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. You also learn about the Family Editor. Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Structure is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. thus the term family. however. For example. The different file types become much easier to manage. such as a curved beam. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . Even though various types within a family can look different. In this tutorial. Using the Family Editor. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Structure recognize it as a particular component type. and when and how to use it. In this lesson. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. and roofs are examples of these types of families. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. 545 .About Families and the Family Editor 16 All elements in Revit Structure 2009 are “family based. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. shape. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects required to create the particular family type. Walls. material set. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Structure and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. if you create a family called wide beams that includes types with several sizes. In addition. they are still related and come from a single source.

generic. has wall types that define interior. but you cannot create new system families. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. exterior. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a component family based on a variety of family templates. floors. Standalone families include columns. Host-based families have components that require hosts. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. Family templates are either host-based or standalone. 546 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . and partition wall styles. and beam. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. foundation.Revit Structure has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Structure and comprise principle building components such as walls. The following dialog box shows how you can select a specific family template to start your family design project. for example. while many more are stored in component libraries. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. The basic walls system family. and roofs.

The following illustration shows host-based openings in a wall. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. transfer them from one project to another. Introduction to Families | 547 . You create in-place families only within the current project. and the category that you use determines the appearance and display control of the component within the project. custom step footing. and also a standalone pile cap family component.rfa extension.Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . The following illustration shows an in-place step footing. You can load them into projects. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. for example. so they are useful for objects unique to that project.

3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. 548 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . In the final exercise. or you can load it using the Load From Library. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. In this exercise. you learn about the Family Editor. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. To add a family to your project. However. elevation. you can drag it into the document window. 2 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. how to access it. it is saved with the project. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. how to access it. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. Load Family command on the File menu. you learn when to use the Family Editor. such as plan. and when to use it. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. After the family has been loaded in the project. or 3D. you learned about the different types of Revit Structure families and when to use them. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. In this section. reload the family in the project to see the updated family. 4 Select the family file name and click Open.Add a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. if you change the original family.

With Revit Structure open. navigate to a family file. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. create a component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. and click Open. it opens within the Family Editor. it will be available within the Type Selector.When to use the Family Editor During the design process. To start a new family. you can double-click any file with an . In this case. open it in the Family Editor.rfa extension and it opens Revit Structure in the Family Editor. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. you can click File ➤ Open. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. and click Open. Also consider any internal family libraries that exist on the network. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with subcategory and entity visibility settings. 3 Next. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. 2 If there is not a component family loaded in the project. 2 Define subcategories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. Within the Windows® environment. If you find a close match. such as newsgroups. if you have exhausted your external resources. modify it as needed. There is a logical thought process to follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. 5 Finally. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. It will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. consider checking the Web library and other Web resources. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. you will need a specific component for your design. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. When the family opens. presume it is a bay window that you require. Introduction to the Family Editor | 549 . and then load it into the project. 9 Save the newly defined family. try to find the component that most closely resembles it. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. select the appropriate template. 4 If you cannot find the component you require.

550 .

In the first exercise. non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib to the deck profile.Creating Components in the Family Editor 17 In this tutorial. you create the following families: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ a custom metal deck profile. When you create an in-place family. you create a custom. not within the Family template (. Modifications to the existing families are saved as a family (. Creating Custom Families In this lesson. In the second exercise. a reinforcement layout with overlapping rebar. you create a custom opening in a castellated beam family.rft file). a custom castellated beam. a custom titleblock. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family In this exercise.rft) template for use in other projects. and an in-place family for a step-footing. Using the installed templates. you learn how to create specific Revit Structure 2009 Families. 551 . you modify the profile for a non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib. you customize 2 different families with the Revit Structure family editor. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. you create it within the project file.

4 On the Annotations Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.Open the metal deck family profile 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Delete the same parameter on the opposite side of the profile. 6 On the View Control Bar. right-click. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\Form Deck_Non Composite. and click Zoom to Fit. do the following: ■ ■ Under Visibility. click Training Files. select 1 1/2" = 1' 0" for scale. Click Apply. and press DELETE.rfa. 5 In an empty part of the drawing area. click Dimensions and Reference Planes. Delete vertical reference planes 7 Select parameter wr as shown. and then click OK. 8 Delete additional vertical reference planes until the view appears as shown. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. 552 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

12 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor inside the profile. and click to place the dimension as shown. click ■ ■ ■ (Create Angular Dimensions). click Dimension. 11 Place a dimension for the angle as follows: Click the horizontal reference plane. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 553 .Modify the angular reference plane 9 On the Design Bar. Click the angle. 10 On the Options Bar. click Modify.

and drag them approximately as shown. 17 Click the top and bottom dimensions. 16 On the View Control Bar. 554 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Zoom to Fit. Repeat this technique to add a dimension for the angle on the opposite side of the profile. enter 66.13 Select the angled reference plane. 15 In an empty part of the drawing area. select 6" = 1' 0" for scale. and press ENTER. 14 Select the angular dimension and click the lock symbol to lock the angle to the horizontal reference plane. right-click.

and add a dimension as shown.18 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the profile base. and press DELETE. Repeat for the dimension on the opposite side. Place new dimensions 19 On the Design Bar. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 555 . click Dimension.

Dimension and constrain the dovetail 27 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. click . Sketch the dovetail reference planes 21 On the View Toolbar.20 Add 2 dimensions from the center reference plane to the bottom of each side of the profile as shown. and click the EQ symbol to apply equal constraints. 28 Add a dimension from the top of the profile to the dovetail horizontal reference plane as shown. click Dimension. 556 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Not a Reference. under Other. 25 Select the reference planes and on the Options Bar. 23 Draw 1 horizontal and 4 vertical reference planes approximately as shown. click . 26 On the Element Properties dialog. and draw a zoom box around the top of the profile. 24 Press ESC. click Ref Plane. and then click OK. for Is Reference.

33 Click the EQ symbol to constrain the dimensions as shown. 31 Select the dimension line. 30 Select the horizontal reference plane.The dimensions displayed in the following steps are provided for reference only and can be customized based on your requirements. and enter 0' 11/32". 32 Repeat the previous technique to add the remaining dimensions for the dovetail as shown. and press ENTER. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 557 . These dimensions refer to the positioning of the dovetail in relation to the profile center reference plane. and click the lock symbol to lock the distance to the horizontal reference plane. click the dimension. 29 Press ESC.

38 Using the split tool. trace the line between the dovetail and the existing element as shown. 558 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Sketch the dovetail 34 On the Design Bar. click Lines. and click Delete Inner Segment. 39 Press ESC. 36 Click Modify. 35 Sketch the dovetail by snapping to the intersections of the vertical and horizontal reference planes as shown. 37 On the Tools toolbar click (Split). Create parameters a and b 40 Select the lower dovetail dimension as shown.

under Parameter Data. 44 On the Options Bar. under Parameter Data. 42 In the Parameters Properties dialog. click Label ➤ Add Parameter.41 On the Options Bar. enter b for Name. enter a for Name. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 559 . and then click OK. 45 In the Parameters Properties dialog. and then click OK. click Label ➤ Add Parameter. 43 Select the upper dovetail dimension as shown.

enter 0' 4 1/2". for a. 49 On the Options Bar. 48 Select the dimension as shown. 51 In the Family Types dialog. 47 In the Family Types dialog. and select wr. Click Apply.Define wr parameter 46 On the Design Bar. and OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Name. ■ Under Other. Flex the new dovetail profile 50 On the Design Bar. click Label. for wr. 560 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Under Other. click Family Types. enter 0' 2". do the following. click Family Types. select 2" X 6".

63 In the Project Browser. and enter 2" x 5". and click OK. Under Other. Under Other. click OK. Under Other. in the Imperial Templates folder. 61 In the Choose Template dialog. 66 On the Options Bar. enter 0' 5". 62 In the New Project dialog. and for File Name. for Sr. and then click OK. click the Imperial Library folder. 64 On the Design Bar. and click Open. under Structural Plans. double-click Level 2. click (Rectangle). enter Form Deck_Non Composite_Dovetail. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Undo). for a. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 561 . 55 Click Profiles ➤ Structural folder. 65 On the Design Bar. 58 Click File ➤ Save. enter 0' 2 1/2".rte. Create new parameters 56 On the Design Bar. Notice that the dovetail adjusts automatically to the new parameters. 52 On the Toolbar. Click Apply. The slab size should be approximately 55' 0" long by 35' 0" wide. click Browse. enter 0' 2 1/2". click Finish Sketch.rfa. 60 In the New Project dialog. Create a new project 59 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. select Structural Analysis-Default.■ ■ Under Other. Click Apply. You are now in sketch mode. click Lines. 68 On the Design Bar. for b. do the following. 67 Draw a slab in the center of the drawing area. 54 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. and click Save. click Slab. for b. 57 In the Family Types dialog. select Rename. enter 0' 2". Under Family Types. click Save the new profile 53 Click File ➤ Save As. click Family Types.

double-click Section 1. 70 Click above the slab and draw a section line through the slab approximately as shown. 562 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . For Detail Level. under Sections (Building Sections). 71 In the Project Browser. click Section.The slab is created. select Wireframe. select 1" = 1' 0". do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. For Model Graphic Style. and in the Type Selector. 72 Select the slab. 73 On the View Control toolbar. Create a section view of the slab 69 On the Design Bar. select Fine. select Floor: 3" LW Concrete on 2" Composite Metal Deck.

select the new metal deck profile file. 83 Proceed to the next exercise. and open the new family file. ■ ■ ■ . 78 In the Type Properties dialog. click Load into Project. and on the Options Bar. double-click Section 1.rvt. click 77 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. The file should still be open. Under Structural Deck Properties. The new profile is applied to the slab. you create a custom opening in a castellated beam. open the file from the saved folder location. and open Imperial\i_RST_Custom_Beam. Under Layers. under Sections. Customizing a Castellated Beam on page 563. do the following. for Deck profile. click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Click OK.Apply the custom family to the metal deck 74 Click the Window menu. select Layer 3. If there are multiple files open. select the slab project from the available files. The new non-composite metal deck family is loaded into the slab project. 81 In the Element Properties dialog. 76 Select the slab. under Construction. Customizing a Castellated Beam In this exercise. 79 In the Edit Assembly dialog. select Edit for Structure. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 80 In the Type Properties dialog. 75 On the Families Design Bar. click OK. 82 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. Customizing a Castellated Beam | 563 . If it is not.

4 Position both dialogs so the opening is visible in the drawing area as shown. and on the Options Bar. . e2 = Space between voids (web post length).Modify the beam opening 1 On the Options Bar. Refer to the following diagram to identify and define the parameters for the beam opening. and draw a zoom box around one of the openings in the 2 Select the beam. 564 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . dt1 = Tee depth top beam. click Edit/New. b = Length of sloped portion. ■ ■ ■ ■ e1 = Tee length. click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click castellated beam.

For dt2. enter 0' 3". Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 565 . For e2. For b. enter 0' 6". click Training Files. under Construction.■ dt2 = Tee depth bottom beam. you create a custom reinforcement layout with overlapping rebar. click OK. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. click Rebar Lines. enter 0' 4". Click Apply. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout on page 565. Notice the opening in the beam changes based on the new parameters. enter 0' 3". enter 0' 5 1/2". For dt1. Open the 2-dimensional (2D) rebar family 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout In this exercise. Sketch the rebar 3 On the Design Bar. and open Imperial\2D Rebar Shape Template. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For e1. and then click OK. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rft.

and draw a horizontal line to create the top surface of the rebar.4 On the Options Bar. click ■ (Draw). ■ Click and draw a second horizontal line to create the bottom of the rebar. 5 Draw the overlapping rebar as one continuous line. as follows: Click to the right of the vertical reference plane. ■ Click and draw a vertical line to create the inside loop. 566 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

click Dimension.■ Click and draw a second vertical line to create the outside loop. 8 Place dimensions on the rebar sketch as shown. 6 On the Design Bar. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 567 . click Modify. ■ Click and draw a horizontal line to complete the rebar sketch. Place dimensions 7 On the Design Bar.

for Label. Create parameter labels 10 Select the upper horizontal rebar dimension as shown.Make sure you snap to the reference plane when placing the dimensions. 568 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 11 On the Options Bar. select B. 12 Select the inside vertical rebar dimension as shown. 9 Press ESC.

13 On the Options Bar. select D. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 569 . select C. for Label. 16 Select the outside vertical rebar dimension as shown. for Label. 15 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the bottom horizontal rebar dimension as shown.

in the Choose Template dialog. and click Open. click OK. select B. enter Square. 22 In the Save As dialog. 19 On the Options Bar. 26 In the New Project dialog. 570 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 24 In the New Project dialog. Create a new project 23 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.rte. for File name. select Structural Analysis-Default. 21 Navigate to a folder of your choice. for Label. select C. 18 Select the inner horizontal rebar dimension as shown. for Label. 25 In the Imperial Templates folder.17 On the Options Bar. click Browse. and click Save. Save the new profile 20 Click File ➤ Save As.

positioned in the right-side of the drawing area. 29 On the Design Bar. The file should still be open. scroll down the list of available shapes. click Slab. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 571 . and be certain that the Square. click (Rectangle). The active rebar shape is highlighted. You are now in Sketch mode. Sketch a slab 28 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Load the overlapping rebar into the new project 33 Click the Window menu.27 In the Project Browser. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. 31 Draw a slab in the center of the drawing area. double-click Level 2. Launch the rebar shape browser 36 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 37 Click on the Rebar Shape Browser. The slab is created. click Load into Projects. under Structural Plans. NOTE You can launch or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking Place rebar parallel to the slab on the Options Bar. 34 On the Families Design Bar. 32 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 30 On the Options Bar. The new overlapping rebar family is now loaded into the slab project. and select Rebar Shape: Square. open the file from the saved folder location. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. click Lines. and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. If it is not. click Finish Sketch. select the new project.rfa file is open. 35 In the Load into Projects dialog.

Notice that the rebar shape is positioned over the slab. select Rebar Bar: #10. 44 Select the rebar.38 On the Options Bar. 572 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 40 Hover over the section view. select Detail Level: Fine. for Placement Plane. 42 Click ESC. select Near Cover Reference. Modify rebar layout 43 On the View Control Bar. 41 Click to place the rebar. 39 In the Type Selector.

Because in-place families interact with the structural model according to their assigned family category. 45 Select one of the shape handles and change the position or shape of the rebar as shown. Creating In-Place Families | 573 .Notice that the rebar shape handles appear. you start with an incomplete foundation wall. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. click Modify. you create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family (. 47 Proceed to the next lesson. Creating In-Place Families on page 573. 46 On the Design Bar.rft) template.

4 Click the foundation wall.Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create new family category 5 In the Project Browser. select Wall Foundation: Bearing Footing . 3 In the Type Selector. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and open Imperial\i_RST_In-Place-Footing.rvt. The footing is placed at the base of the foundation wall. and draw a zoom box around the foundation steps as shown. Place the foundation wall 1 In the Project Browser. you create a step footing on an existing foundation wall.36" x 12". click . 6 On the Options Bar. click Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. click 3D Views ➤ 3D. 574 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Training Files. click Foundation ➤ Wall.

select Structural Foundations. select Pick a plane. and click OK. Make sure the entire footing is selected. Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 575 . and click OK. 12 Press TAB. 9 In the Name dialog. click Create. 11 In the Work Plane dialog. and click OK.7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Sketch the extrusion 13 Click the corner of the footing to start the extrusion sketch as shown. 8 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. 10 On the Design Bar. enter Structural Foundations 1 for Name. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and select the bearing footing as shown.

576 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Cast-in-Place Concrete. click Finish Family. click Finish Sketch. under Materials and Finishes. click OK. 15 On the Options Bar. click Extrusion Properties. 22 On the Family Design Bar. Change extrusion properties 17 On the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. for Name. select Concrete .14 Using the drawing tools provided with Revit Structure. and select Multiple. Copy extrusion 23 Select the extrusion. 21 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. enter -3' 0". click . 19 In the Materials dialog. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK. The dimensions have been added for reference purposes only. 25 Click the corner of the step foundation and the extrusion as shown. click the value for Material. click Modify. sketch a solid extrusion as shown. 16 On the Design Bar. for Depth.

27 Click to place a third copy of the extrusion as shown.26 Click to place a second copy of the extrusion as shown. Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 577 .

and click Multiple Join. 31 Select the lower extrusion as shown. click (Join Geometry). 578 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 30 Select the wall foundation as shown. Join extrusion elements to the footing 29 On the Options Bar.28 Press ESC. 32 Select the middle extrusion as shown.

Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 579 . click Modify. click (Join Geometry).33 Select the upper extrusion as shown. 36 Select the middle extrusion as shown. 37 Select the lower extrusion as shown. Join extrusion elements to each other 34 On the Design Bar. and click Multiple Join. 35 On the Options Bar.

39 Press ESC. click 3D Views ➤ 3D. 580 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 40 In the Project Browser.38 Select the upper extrusion as shown.

click Lines. text. Creating a Titleblock Family | 581 . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise.rft. and labels. navigate to the Titleblocks folder. 5 Specify the upper-left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. 2 In the New dialog. You customize the titleblock with a new text style.36 x 24. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom D-size sheet. and click Open. graphics. 4 On the Options Bar. select D .Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. Sketch the inside border 3 On the Design Bar. and enter -1/2" for Offset. and your project data. The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. click . The titleblock has linework. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Titleblock. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the D-size titleblock template. and then specify the lower-right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle.

and click to draw a new vertical line. 11 Draw a horizontal line 3'' below the last horizontal line as shown. click . 12 Draw a horizontal line 3'' above the lower inside border as shown. and click . . click 9 Enter 0 for Offset.Add vertical and horizontal lines 6 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. and enter 4 1/2" for Offset. 582 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 7 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. 10 Draw a horizontal line 4'' below the upper inside border as shown.

select the second and third horizontal lines.13 On the Design Bar. 15 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet. 24 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. 18 On the Options Bar. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 583 . and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. 26 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 20 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. 25 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. 14 In the Type Selector. and. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. 22 On the Options Bar. click . 16 On the Design Bar. enter 3/4" for Offset. select Wide Lines. click Modify. 27 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. 19 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 21 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. click Modify. select Title Blocks. while pressing CTRL. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. NOTE The wide line style is not visible until the titleblock is loaded into a new project. 23 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 17 In the Type Selector. and enter 0' 1/2" for Offset.

enter 3/8" Bold for Name. under Text. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. you add a company logo. 584 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. and select Bold. 4 Zoom in on the logo. 3 Place the image in the upper-right corner of the sheet as shown. text notes. Create a new 3/8'' text style 5 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. click Import/Link ➤ Image. select Company Logo. click . enter 3/8" for Text Size. 11 Click OK twice.jpg. click Text. navigate to Training/Common. 2 In the Open dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Name dialog.The titleblock linework is now complete. and labels to your titleblock. and click Open.

18 Select the drag handle. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. Press ENTER to add each new line of text. select Text: Text Note 1. and add an address and phone number as shown.Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. click Modify. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 585 . 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. 17 On the Design Bar. and click outside of the text box to complete the text. and drag the text note down as shown. in the text box. and select the last text note.

click Text. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Edit toolbar. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line.19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. and select the consultant text note. click . address. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. 586 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Add consultant name. select Constrain and Multiple. 24 On the Options Bar. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. click Modify.

and enter Sheet Number. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 3/16" for Name. select Text: 3/16". 33 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. and click to specify the first copied text note position. 32 In the Name dialog. click . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 587 . enter 3/16" for Text Size. 36 Draw a text box in the lower-right space of the titleblock. 34 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. Create a new 3/16'' text style 28 On the Design Bar. under Text.26 Move the cursor down 4''. 27 Move the cursor down another 4''. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. click Text. 29 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the second copied text note location. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate.

and enter Checked By:. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label. The label displays a default value wrapped to 2 lines. and enter Date. 41 On the Options Bar. 588 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .37 Draw a text box in the next space up. and click OK. 42 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Date field. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. click Label. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. select Project Issue Date. and enter Drawn By:. and click to specify the label location.

45 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Drawn By field. and click OK.NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. click Edit/New. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog. click Duplicate. click . select Checked By. enter 3/8" for Text Size. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog. 50 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Drawn By. 53 In the Name dialog. and click to specify the label location. enter 3/8" Label for Name. 47 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Checked By field. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 589 . under Text. click Label. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a new 3/8'' label style 49 On the Design Bar. 55 Click OK twice.

select Project Number. 57 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Sheet Number field. and click OK. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field.Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. select Label: 3/8'' Label. and click to specify the label location. select Sheet Number. click Center and Middle. 590 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 59 On the Options Bar. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. 62 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click OK.

click Label. 71 In the Name dialog. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. 73 Click OK twice. and select any labels that may need to be moved. and click to specify the label location. so that they are all aligned. 77 In the Select Parameter dialog. select Project Name. Add Project Path label 74 In the Type Selector. and click OK. select File Path. select 1/16” Label. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 591 . click . click Modify. Click Modify. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. 78 On the Design Bar. 72 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a 1/16” label style 67 On the Design Bar.63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. 76 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. select Client Name. click Left and Middle. and click OK. and click OK. 66 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog. 68 On the Options Bar. enter 1/16" for Text Size. enter 1/16" Label. click Duplicate. and click to specify the label location. under Text. 75 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. 65 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. and click to specify the label location. 70 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Modify. click Load. The titleblock graphics. and labels are now complete. and click OK. and then click OK. click Sheet. 5 In the Open dialog. verify that default. 2 In the New Project dialog. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. enter Name for Drawn By. click .rte is the Template file and that Project is selected under Create new. select it. navigate to the location of Training D-Size Titleblock.rfa. 7 Click OK. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. under Other. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the titleblock. 11 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet. select Training D-Size Titleblock.rfa file. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise.79 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training D-Size Titleblock. Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar. and click Open. text. 592 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson.12 On the Settings menu. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 593 . click Project Information. For Client Name. enter January 1. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. For Project Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter In Progress. 2005. For Project Status. enter Office Building. For Project Number. 14 Click OK. enter Jane Smith. enter 2005-01.

594 .

Truss Building 18 In this tutorial. The lines in the layout determine the placement of the sub-elements that comprise the truss: top chord. you learn how to use the truss building capabilities of Revit Structure 2009. you select the truss family type and then specify the truss start point and endpoint in the drawing. Add a roof truss by defining the span in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. placing them on the layout lines specified for the selected family. This lesson comprises the following truss building exercises: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add multiple trusses to an existing project by specifying the spans Create a custom truss by modifying the brace parameters Change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to a roof Create a custom truss family using the Family Editor Create a truss using the drafting tools provided with Revit Structure Adding Trusses to a Project In this exercise. Working with Trusses In Revit Structure you add a truss to your structure by using the Truss tool. and web members. bottom chord. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 595 . and open Imperial\i_RST_Add_Truss.rvt. under Structural Plans. which creates the truss according to the layout and other parameters specified in whichever truss family type you select. double-click Roof. Revit Structure then creates the structural framing elements as necessary to draw the truss. To use the Truss tool. you add predefined trusses to multiple locations within an existing project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.

4 In the Type Selector. Under Dimensions. click . click ■ ■ ■ . for Bearing Chord. 8 Click the column at grid location A2 to select the endpoint of the truss span. 6 In the Element Properties dialog.2 On the View toolbar. 596 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 5 On the Options Bar. for Truss Height. Click OK. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. select Top. 7 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the start point of the truss span. and draw a zoom box around the columns on the upper-left corner of the model as shown. click . do the following: Under Structural. enter 6' 0". 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the View toolbar. click Truss.

Adding Trusses to a Project | 597 . delete the extra flange at column location A1. 11 Press DELETE.The truss is placed between the columns. Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned. Notice the extra flange at column locations A1 and A2 that will not be necessary for this span. Modify the truss 10 Click the flange located at column location A2 as shown. 12 Using the same method.

select Multiple. click (Copy). 15 On the View toolbar. 16 On the Options bar.Copy the single truss 13 In the Project Browser. 17 Click the column at grid location A1 as shown. under Structural Plans. double-click Roof. 14 Select the truss placed in the previous steps. 598 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .

click (Copy). 19 On the Design Bar. 24 While pressing CTRL. click . Copy multiple trusses to the opposite end of the structure 22 In the Project Browser.18 Click the columns at grid locations A2 and A3 to place copies of the original truss. 25 On the View toolbar. 20 On the View toolbar. 23 Select the truss placed between grid location A1 and A2. click Modify. Adding Trusses to a Project | 599 . select the remaining trusses. under Structural Plans. 21 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). double-click Roof.

600 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. 31 In the Type Selector. 28 On the View toolbar. click Modify. and then click the column at grid location E1 to select the copy endpoint as shown. Add multiple trusses by defining the span in 3D view 30 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Truss.26 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the copy start point. . click 29 Enter ZF. 27 On the Design Bar.

click ■ ■ ■ . Click OK. for Truss Height. 35 Click the top endpoint of the column at grid location B4 to place the truss as shown. do the following: Under Structural. Under Dimensions. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. for Bearing Chord. 34 Click the column at grid location B1 as shown.32 On the Options Bar. enter 6' 0". select Top. Adding Trusses to a Project | 601 .

D4.C4. 37 Using the same method. and D1. 38 On the View toolbar.36 Enter ZF. add trusses between columns C1. click 39 Enter ZF. 602 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . .

click shown . Adding Trusses to a Project | 603 .Modify each truss 40 On the View toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the end of one of the trusses as 41 Select the flange at one end of the truss.

enter 90. a new training file is supplied. delete the flange on the opposite end of the same truss. 45 Click File menu ➤ Close. Under Diagonal Webs. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. you create a custom truss for both the short and long spans by modifying the truss type parameters.500.42 Press DELETE. 44 Using the same method. Customizing Truss Parameters on page 604. for Angle. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Click OK. You can save the open file if you wish. for Structural Framing Type. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. In the next exercise. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 43 Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned. 2 In the Type Selector. Create a new truss type for the short span 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Short Span. enter Howe Flat Truss . click Truss. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. and open Imperial\i_RST_Customize_Truss_Parameters. click Duplicate.rvt. 6 In the Name dialog. and repeat for the remaining trusses.500. ■ ■ ■ 604 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . Customizing Truss Parameters In this exercise. Under Bottom Chords. click Edit/New. do the following: ■ Under Vertical Webs. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. click . 3 On the Options Bar. for Structural Framing Type. click Training Files.

8 In the Element Properties dialog. Customizing Truss Parameters | 605 . draw a zoom box around one of the short trusses. 11 In the Type Selector. select Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss .Short Span. . Apply the new truss type 9 In the Project Browser. . under 3D Views. click OK. The truss changes to the new type. 13 On the View toolbar. 12 Using the same method. and then NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a chord or web. click 14 Enter ZF. 10 On the View toolbar. double-click 3D. change the remaining short trusses to the new type. click select the truss as shown.

click . 24 On the View toolbar. draw a zoom box around one of the long trusses. for Structural Framing Type. Click OK.Roof Span. 17 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 20 In the Name dialog.Create a new truss type for the roof span 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. 19 In the Type Properties dialog. Apply the new truss type 23 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. enter Howe Flat Truss . and click OK. . Under Diagonal Webs. click select the truss as shown. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. for Structural Framing Type. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and then 606 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 16 In the Type Selector.500. click Truss. double-click 3D.500. do the following: ■ Under Vertical Webs. click OK. under 3D Views.

select Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss . click 28 Enter ZF. 26 Using the same method. change the remaining long trusses to the new type.NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a single truss flange. 25 In the Type Selector. 27 On the View toolbar. The truss changes to the new type. Customizing Truss Parameters | 607 .Roof Span. .

rvt.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_Truss_Change_Shape. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to an existing roof. a new training file is supplied. Modifying the Shape of a Truss on page 608. Modifying the Shape of a Truss In this exercise. double-click 3D. 2 On the View toolbar. click Training Files. and then select the truss as shown. draw a zoom box around a truss on the upper-left corner of the structure. 608 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . under 3D Views. You can save the open file if you wish. In the next exercise. Select all trusses 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click .

Attach the roof 4 On the Options Bar. All instances of the truss will be highlighted.3 Click Edit menu ➤ Select All Instances. (Attach/Detach Top Chord). Modifying the Shape of a Truss | 609 . click 5 Select the roof as shown.

and draw a zoom box around a roof truss as shown. 610 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . You can save the open file if you wish. 10 On the View Control Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. vertical webs. and diagonal webs of each truss will attach itself to the shape of the roof. 8 On the View Control Bar. View the custom truss 7 Select the roof. In the next exercise. 9 On the View toolbar. a new training file is supplied. click Modify. Creating a Custom Truss Family on page 611. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. click . Notice the shape of the top chord and structural webs are modified to match the roof profile.The top chords. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 On the Design bar.

rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rft located in the Imperial folder.Creating a Custom Truss Family In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. and place dimensions to each reference plane as shown. Sketch web reference planes 4 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. 5 Sketch 5 vertical reference planes approximately as shown. 3 Open Structural_Trusses. Open the truss family 1 Click File ➤ New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the Revit Structure Family Editor to create a custom truss family. click Dimension. click Ref Plane. and open Imperial\i_RST_Truss_Custom_Family. 6 On the Design Bar. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 611 .

7 Click the EQ symbol to apply equal constraints. 10 Sketch the truss top chord as shown. 612 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . Sketch top and bottom chords 9 On the Design Bar. 8 Using the same method. place additional vertical reference planes to complete the web pattern as shown. click Truss Top Chord.

14 Click the intersection of the bottom chord and the first vertical reference plane to set the start point of the first truss web as shown. click Truss Web. 12 Sketch the truss bottom chord as shown. 15 Snap to the intersection of the top chord and reference plane as shown.11 On the Design Bar. Sketch truss webs 13 On the Design Bar. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 613 . Truss Bottom Chord.

17 On the Design Bar.rvt. select Family Files (rfa). and click OK. For File name. navigate to a folder of your choice. add remaining truss webs to complete the pattern as shown. For Save as type. click Modify. 21 In the Load into Projects dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Save in. 19 In the Save As dialog. select i_RST_Truss_Custom_Family. Save the new truss family 18 Click File menu ➤ Save As.16 Using the same method. 614 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . You are now in the project file. Load the truss into the project 20 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. enter Custom_Truss. Click OK.

under Structural Plans. select Custom_Truss. 27 In the Project Browser. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 615 . 28 Repeat the same method to place additional trusses as shown. 23 On the Design Bar. 26 Click the column at grid location A4 to establish the endpoint of the truss as shown.Place the custom truss 22 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D. 24 In the Type Selector. 25 Click the column at grid location A1 to establish the start point of the truss. click Truss. double-click Level 2. under 3D Views.

in the Imperial Templates folder. click Grid. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools on page 616. 3 In the Choose Template dialog. click Browse. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools In this exercise. you add braces to form the steel truss. select Structural Analysis-Default. double-click Level 2. a new training file is supplied. Finally. and a framing elevation. 7 Draw 2 grid lines approximately as shown. you open a new project and create the top and bottom chords using the beam tool. Create grids 5 In the Project Browser. 616 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . In the next exercise.rte. create column grids. You can save the open file if you wish. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. click OK.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. Create a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog. 4 In the New Project dialog. under Structural Plans. and click Open.

and press ENTER. click Ref Plane. click Structural Column. 16 Place a horizontal reference plane above Level 2.a. select W-Wide Flange Column: W10 x 49.) 13 Click the Framing Elevation symbol. (The dimensions are displayed for reference purposes only. 17 Click the dimension. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 617 . and drag the blue handles beyond each column as shown . under Elevations (Interior Elevation). 9 Select each grid line. Place support columns 10 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. and place approximately as shown.Add framing elevations 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Type Selector. enter 5' 0". Sketch horizontal reference planes 14 In the Project Browser. double-click Elevation 1 . click Framing Elevation. 12 Place 2 columns on each grid line spaced approximately 70' 0" apart as shown.

Place multiple reference planes using the array tool 23 Select the reference plane on the left column as shown. 21 Snap to the center of the left column and draw a vertical reference plane that extends beyond the top horizontal plane as shown. 18 Place a second horizontal reference plane above the first. click Ref Plane.The dimensions are displayed for reference purposes only. 618 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 19 Click the dimension. Place vertical reference planes 20 On the Design Bar. 22 Press ESC. and enter 15' 0".

click Beam. 25 Click the left vertical reference plane to identify the array start point. Place top and bottom chords 28 On the Design Bar. 27 Enter 7 for array count. 26 Drag the array to the right. and snap to the center of the right column to identify the array length. and press ENTER. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 619 . click . The array is complete.24 On the Tools toolbar. select W-Wide Flange: W12 x 26. 29 In the Type Selector.

31 Using reference planes as a guide. 34 Using the vertical reference planes as a guide. Fix corner joint 35 On the View toolbar. When placing braces. and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the 620 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 33 In the Type Selector. create the top and bottom chords of the truss by placing beams as shown. select W-Wide Flange: W12 x 26. make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes. create cross-braces by placing braces as shown. . select 3D Snapping. click truss as shown. make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes. click Brace. When placing beams.30 On the Tools toolbar. Place braces 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

36 On the Design Bar. then select the edge of the top chord as shown. 38 On the Tools toolbar. click . and sketch a vertical ref plane as shown. 39 Select the vertical ref plane. click Ref Plane. 37 Snap to the outer surface of the brace. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 621 .

double-click 3D. View the truss 41 In the Project Browser.40 The edge of the top chord will align with the vertical brace as shown. 622 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . under 3D Views.

Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 623 . 42 Click File menu ➤ Save. 43 Save the file to a folder location of you choice.The completed truss is displayed. You have completed the Truss Builder tutorial.

624 .

Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. For example. In this tutorial. Using design options. and each option set can have multiple schemes. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). After you and the client agree on the final design. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. 625 . These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file.Creating Multiple Design Options 19 When working with a building model. At any time in the design process. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. In addition. you can have multiple sets of design options.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.In this particular case. the roof and structure systems must work together. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. In the second exercise. make your final design decision. 2 In the Design Options dialog. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. under Option Set. therefore. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). The client has asked you to create various options. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. the only available command is to create a new option set. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. TIP In this exercise. each is constructed for interchangeability. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars. click Training Files. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. click New. you can edit it. 626 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . After you create a design option. you design each of the structural options. In the first exercise in this lesson. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. you set up multiple design option sets. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. each with multiple design options. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. In the final exercise of this lesson. and delete the unwanted options from the project. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. With the second option.

and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. click 12 On the Options Bar. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. and the third column centered between the two. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. click Edit Selected. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. expand Views (all). make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. 9 On the Design Bar. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. select Round Column: 03" Diameter. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. Creating the Structural Design Options | 627 . The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. add three columns. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. 4 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Edit toolbar. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. In this case. expand Floor Plans. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. click Modify. 7 In the Type Selector. 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar.3 Select Option 1 (primary). In the following illustration. By selecting Multiple. click Column. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). or add a dimension string between the columns. and click Close. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. 5 On the View menu. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. select: ■ ■ ■ . TIP To center the middle column.

628 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. 17 Zoom out and. When you are finished. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. they are difficult to see in this view. A copy of the three selected columns is added. 18 On the View toolbar. using the same technique. click .TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. Because of the size of the columns.

22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. Adding a beam is a two-click process. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. Use the following illustration as a guide. and click at its center to set the beam start point.Notice the 12 columns that you added. The first click specifies the beam start point. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. double-click TOP OF CORE. Next. 21 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 19 In the Project Browser. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. select Round Bar : 2". In it. click Beam. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. Zoom in on the upper right column. 20 On the tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. The second click specifies the end of the beam. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. you add the beams that span the columns. 23 On the Design Bar. Creating the Structural Design Options | 629 .

30 On the View toolbar. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. move down to the next set of columns.25 On the Edit toolbar. click . This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. and select the center of the column to add a copy. and click the center point. click 26 On the Options Bar. select: ■ ■ ■ . 28 Zoom out. 630 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . zoom into the left column.

click New. enter Structure for New. and click OK. under Option. under Option. 40 In the Rename dialog. click New. 37 Select Option 2 and. enter Roofing for New. select Option 1 (primary). enter Beam for New. 45 Under Roofing. 32 In the Design Options dialog. 36 In the Rename dialog. under Option. 38 In the Rename dialog. and click OK.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. 33 Click Finish Editing. click Rename. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Creating the Structural Design Options | 631 . enter Brackets for New. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. click Rename. click Rename. and click OK. name the option Louvers. click Rename. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. under Option Set. 41 Under Option Set. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. not a new option set. There should now be two roofing design options. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). and click OK. and click OK. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. click Rename. 34 In the Design Options dialog. 46 Under Option. click New. under Option. under Option Set. 43 In the Rename dialog.

name the option Sunscreen. under Floor Plans.47 Under Roofing. This allows you to more easily manage the project. 48 Under Option. 53 In the Project Browser. select Beam. 52 Click Close. you create the second design option. 632 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . and click OK. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. it will resemble the following illustration. double-click ROOF TERRACE. 51 Under Edit. click Rename. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. Under Now Editing. select Edit Selected. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. When finished. select Option 2. under Structure. 50 In the Design Options dialog. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed.

55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. Refer to the following illustration. Creating the Structural Design Options | 633 . The second click represents the plane that is moved. 58 On the Tools menu. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. click Align. select Roof Beam. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 56 In the Type Selector. click Component. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to.

61 On the Design Bar. on the Edit toolbar. 634 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 62 Select the beam and. click Modify. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. Click to indicate the end point of the move. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. The first click sets the move start point. The second click represents the move end point.60 After aligning the beam.

That is because the brackets option is set to primary. click . Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. click Save As. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. i_Urban_House-in progress. 69 Click Close.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. click Finish Editing. 68 In the Design Options dialog. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. which is visible by default. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. and click Save. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 70 On the File menu. name the file. 67 On the Tools menu. 66 On the View toolbar. you need this file in its current state.rvt. Notice that even before you close the dialog. Creating the Structural Design Options | 635 . Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system.

click Component. 4 Under Edit. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. you design each of the roofing options. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. expand Views (all). you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. a Louver system. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The second roofing system. open it now. expand Floor Plans. place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. select Rafter 2 x 10. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. and double-click TOP OF CORE. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. 6 In the Project Browser. The first option. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. do so now. If you need to add dimensions. 5 Click Close. 2 On the Tools menu.rvt. 10 Referring to the following illustration. delete them after the rafter is in place. under Roofing. In the next exercise. With the second option. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. select Louvers (primary). 8 In the Type Selector. you set up multiple design option sets. the other for beams. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial.In this exercise. 3 In the Design Options dialog. Under Now Editing. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. click Edit Selected. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. each with multiple design options to pick from. Sunscreen. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. 636 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options .

click Modify. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. and click OK. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart. 16 On the Options Bar.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select 2nd for Move To. Enter 5 for Number. under Other. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. 15 On the Edit menu. enter 38' 6" for Length. Select Constrain. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 637 . click Array. click . click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. 13 On the Options Bar. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam.

and press ENTER.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. you can enter 3 3. you do not need to type the foot and inch markers. TIP When entering a dimension value. when the listening dimension displays. rather than entering 3' 3". For example. The space separates feet and inches. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. 638 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . enter 3' 3".

and click OK. click Component. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. Select 2nd for Move To. and press Enter. when the listening dimension displays.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. click . enter 1’. and select the louver you just placed. click Modify. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 20 In the Type Selector. 23 On the Options Bar. Enter 34 for Number. under Other. 22 On the Design Bar. 25 With the louver still selected. select Louver 2 x 6. 27 For the array starting point. and. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 639 . 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 On the Options Bar. click the Edit menu. Select Constrain. and click Array.

The louver roof system is complete. click . 30 On the Tools menu. 29 On the View toolbar. click Finish Editing. 640 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Design Options ➤ Design Options.Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart. 31 In the Design Options dialog. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. under Edit.

you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 641 . click . click Edit Selected. select Sunscreen. then you can modify it through the dimension. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. 43 On the Design Bar. You will fix this in a later step. This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. 41 Select the top of the left column. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. and the third point defines the arc. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. 34 In the Project Browser. the top of the next column on the right. In this case. 39 On the Design Bar. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. and then click Close. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. and click OK. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. 40 On the Options Bar. click Properties. and double-click West. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. The first two points define the ends of the line.Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. click Lines. 33 Under Editing. Click OK. expand Elevations. Therefore. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. under Roofing. 36 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. 37 In the Work Plane dialog.

48 On the Design Bar. you designed each of the roofing options. 45 Click OK. click Trim/Extend. Under Constraints. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. click Save. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. a Louver system. 52 On the File menu. The arcs should connect. click Finish Editing. then the center arc. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 51 In the Design Options dialog. 49 On the View toolbar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. The first option. The second roofing system. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. Sunscreen. and then click Close.44 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. Under Constraints. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. 46 On the Tools menu. The louver roof system is complete. under Edit. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. 642 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . In this exercise. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. Select the right arc. you need this file in its current state. click . was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers. enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End. 50 On the Tools menu. click Finish Sketch.

Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. under Views (all). you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. click Visibility/Graphics. 2 In the Project Browser. 11 On the View menu. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. you select a design. secondary. click Visibility/Graphics. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Primary Option. After exploring the combinations. and click Rename. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 4 In the Project Browser. 9 Click OK. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. under 3D Views. do so now. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. expand 3D Views. Managing Design Options | 643 . and click OK. under Views (all). 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. and last options. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. right-click {3D}. make it part of the building model. click the Design Options tab. 7 On the View menu. 10 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). double-click Secondary Option.Managing Design Options In this exercise. and delete the discarded design options. under Views (all). 5 Right-click each of the copies. double-click Primary Option. click the Design Options tab. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. under 3D Views. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. and click Duplicate. tertiary. and click Rename.

under 3D Views.13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 18 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). click the Design Options tab. 19 On the View menu. 15 On the View menu. double-click Last Option. under 3D Views. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Views (all). 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Design Options tab. 644 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . and click OK. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Tertiary Option. and click OK. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. click Visibility/Graphics.

select Make Primary. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. This was the client choice for structural. but should be accepted as part of the building model. select Beam. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. since you no longer need them. 27 In the alert dialog. the beam option becomes part of the model. click Delete. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. The set is deleted. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design.At this point. 23 In the Design Options dialog. 25 Select Structure. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. click Yes. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Delete to remove the views that used options. 26 Under Option Set. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 30 Under Option Set. click Accept Primary. Because the client has selected the design option. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. click Yes. the current primaries are no longer options. In this case. An alert is displayed. 24 Under Option. 29 Select Roofing. click Close. Managing Design Options | 645 . In your design options. 31 In the alert dialog. 22 On the Tools menu. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. under Structure. double-click Primary Option. 33 In the Design Options dialog.

you selected a design. made it part of the building model. and deleted the discarded design options. click Save. In this exercise. After exploring the combinations. 646 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 35 On the File menu. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations.The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model.

modify their visibility. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. This maximizes efficiency. In the final lesson. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. You position the building models on the site plan. Comparison of alternatives on a site. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. In this tutorial. 647 . and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. In these situations. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. performance. and manage the links throughout the project. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 20 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus.

You link two building models to the project.Linking Building Models In this lesson. and the other is a townhouse. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence.Center to Center: Revit Structure places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. 648 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . One building model is a condominium. NOTE The center of a Revit Structure model is the center of the model geometry. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. modify their visibility. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. You position the building models on the site. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Structure 2009 to automatically place it. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another.

Select c_Site.■ Auto .By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. c_Townhouse. 4 On the File menu. click Open. RELATED See the lesson. click Save As. click Open. click Training Files. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. you can do so. Auto . Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. 2 On the File menu. with write permission. NOTE Revit Structure projects have an internal coordinate system. click Close. however. this option will place the link at a predefined location. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 665. ■ ■ Manual . If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. and save the file there. 8 Clear Read-only.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Structure Files. and open Common\c_Site. right-click. and click Properties. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. this system is not exposed to the user. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 649 . 5 On the File menu.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu.rvt. select the three files. All three files now reside. c_Condo_Complex. in the Model Linking folder that you created.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Structure model. ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. This option is grayed out.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. Otherwise. and click OK. Manual .

Notice the blue detail lines. For Positioning. and double-click Level 1. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. 10 In the Project Browser.■ Click Open. 13 Click Open. 11 On the File menu. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. expand Views (all). select Auto . 650 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . expand Floor Plans.Origin to Origin. click Import/Link ➤ Revit.

similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. After you specify the location to move to.Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. The linked model moves as one object. The Move command requires two clicks. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. After you select it. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. The first click specifies the move start point. Standard move commands work with linked building models. 15 On the Edit toolbar. 17 For the move endpoint. The second click specifies the move endpoint. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 651 . 16 For the move start point. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. click (Move).rvt displays in the Type Selector.

21 Click Open. and select c_Townhouse. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. select Auto .18 On the View menu. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.Origin to Origin. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. For Positioning. The townhouse building model displays above the site model. 652 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

click to specify the rotation start point. and click to specify the end of the rotation. you first specify the rotation start point. To rotate an object. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. click (Rotate). the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise.23 On the Edit toolbar. In this case. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. when the vertical line displays. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 653 . 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise.

Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. click (Move). 654 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration.

and the second click specifies the copy-to point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 655 . select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. 30 For the starting point. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. click (Copy). The first click specifies the start point. The Copy command works much like the Move command.

36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. under Identity data. click Rotate. 37 On the View toolbar. 32 On the Edit menu. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. 656 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . enter Townhouse A. and click OK. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. click (Default 3D View). click . 34 On the Options Bar. use the Move command to make any adjustments. for Name.

do so before continuing. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. If you have not completed the previous exercise. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. they were placed too low within the site topography.38 On the File menu. In this exercise. After linking the files. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 657 . and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. you linked two separate Revit Structure 2009 models into a site model. click Save. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. 2 On the SteeringWheels. In this exercise. In the next exercise. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. you need this project file open and in this view. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. click and hold Orbit. When you originally linked the files. click (SteeringWheels).

In this case. and click to select it. under Views (all). TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. when it highlights. 658 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. expand Elevations. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. 7 On the Tools toolbar. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. you first select the plane you want to align to. and click to select the line. When using the Align command. Click the Revit Links tab. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. 3 In the Project Browser. and double-click South. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and then select the plane that you want to align.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. To do this. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. and click OK. click (Align). In the steps that follow.rvt.

Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. This would over-constrain the model. 9 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project.

11 Return to the South elevation view. Both townhouses should be at the proper level.

12 On the View toolbar, click 13 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels).

14 On the SteeringWheels, click and hold Orbit, and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.

15 On the File menu, click Save.

Repositioning Linked Building Models | 659

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. As you can see, each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. In the next exercise, you modify how the linked files display within the host project.

Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility
In this exercise, you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. After you link a Revit Structure 2009 project file within another project, you can independently control the visibility settings, detail level, display settings, and the halftone settings for each linked project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South. 2 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 4 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. When you link a file, the defaults are set to By host view for all options. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse.rvt, click By Host View. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. If the Basics page is set to Custom, then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View, By linked view, or Custom. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. 8 For Annotation Categories, select <Custom>. 9 Under Visibility, scroll down and clear Levels. 10 Click OK. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display.

NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views.

660 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex.rvt.

Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 14 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 16 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project, and click OK. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. With linked files, you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. Using the Custom option, you can also apply halftone to individual categories. Notice both townhouses display in halftone.

Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 20 For c_Townhouse.rvt, under Display Settings, click By Host View. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, on the Basics tab, select Custom. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. 23 In the Model categories list, select <Custom>. By default, the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. By selecting custom under Model Categories, you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. You can click the value for Detail Level, and then set the detail level to coarse, medium, or fine. In this case, no detail level changes are required. 24 Click OK.

Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 661

Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range, phase, and phase filter of a specific link. 25 On the Revit Links tab, under Visibility, select c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings.

26 Under Display Settings, click Custom for the Townhouse link. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. By default, the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. In most cases, this is preferable. However, there are situations, on a sloped site for instance, where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. In this case, the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. 28 Select By linked view for View range. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. In this case, the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed, with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. With the Show All filter applied, all new, existing, demolished, and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. All other components are grayed out. 29 Click OK. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK. 31 On the File menu, click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. In the next exercise, you manage the linked files.

Managing Linked Building Models
In this exercise, you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. After you link a Revit Structure 2009 project into another project, a connection to the linked project continues to exist. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified, those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened.

662 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu, click Manage Links. 2 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab. Notice the Loaded, Locations Not Saved, and Saved Path fields are read only. They supply information regarding the links. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. In a shared coordinate environment, any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. As links are moved to new locations in the host project, you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. You learn more about this in the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. 3 Under Path Type, notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. The default path type is Relative. In general, you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory, the link is maintained. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location, the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. 4 Under Linked File, select c_Condo_Complex.rvt. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. 5 Click Unload. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. 6 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. 7 Click OK. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project.

Managing Linked Building Models | 663

TIP In the Manage Links dialog, you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases, you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. In these cases, you should consider the following:

Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model, you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. In the Import/Link RVT dialog, click the arrow next to the Open button, and select Specify. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files, you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. To do this, go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects, the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated, you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. When you initially place the link, both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. However, link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. In general, you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset.

TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file, it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. If you choose not to open that workset, the link is not loaded. 8 In the Project Browser, expand Revit Links, right-click c_Condo_Complex.rvt, and click Reload. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location.

9 On the File menu, click Save As.

664 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

10 In the Save As dialog, navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise, name the file Site_Project, and save it as an RVT file. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models, it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. In this exercise, you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. In the next lesson, you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. If you intend to complete the next lesson now, leave the project file open in its current view.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models
In this lesson, you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. When used in conjunction with model linking, you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. When you share coordinates between projects, you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. In essence, you are establishing a shared origin point. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. When Revit project views are exported to DWG, project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 648, and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous lesson, do so before continuing.

Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates
In this exercise, you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. The host file consists primarily of site components. When you link a Revit Structure 2009 project into another project (the host project), you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models, the host project coordinates are used. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 665

When you are working in the host project, you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. In this case, the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson, Linking Building Models on page 648, and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the lesson, do so before continuing. If you have closed the project, open it before continuing. Training File
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open.

Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

2 On the Tools menu, click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. As indicated in the Status Bar, you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. 3 In the drawing area, click the Condo Complex. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project.

666 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, select Location 1, and click OK. On the Status Bar, notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Structure is waiting for you to select another link. 5 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates
When a Revit Structure 2009 model is linked into a host project, it is placed at a specific location. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host, this location is not saved outside of the host project. However, if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project, then the location becomes saved in the linked file. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location, but can have multiple additional locations. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. These three locations can be named Lot A, Lot B, and Lot C. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. In this exercise, you specify and save the two townhouse locations, even though both models originate from one linked file. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1, move the cursor over the left townhouse and, when the edges highlight, click to select it.

2 On the Options Bar, click

.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 667

3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. 4 Under Value, click Not Shared for Shared Location. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models, a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. This is a one-time operation. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog:
■ ■

Select Publish the shared coordinate system. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location, click Change.

6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Rename. 7 In the Rename dialog, enter Lot A for New, and click OK. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK. 9 In the Select Location dialog, click Reconcile. 10 In the Element Properties dialog, notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A, and click OK. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. After a link instance is assigned a shared location, changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. When constraining a link to a location, you have only two choices:
■ ■

Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. Record the current position as a location. .

12 On the Options Bar, click

13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, click Not Shared for Shared Location. In the Choose Location dialog, notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. 14 In the Choose Location dialog, select Move instance to. Notice the OK button is not active. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. You created the Lot A location in previous steps, and the left townhouse resides at that location. 15 In the Choose Location dialog, select the second option, Record current position as. Notice the OK button is still not active. Because Lot A is currently in use, you cannot redefine its location. 16 Click Change. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate, enter Lot B for Name, and click OK. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, make sure Lot B is selected, and click OK. 19 In the Select Location dialog, click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. Save locations 21 On the File menu, click Manage Links. 22 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab, and then select the townhouse project.

668 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

23 Click Save Locations. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK. When you create a location, it is not automatically saved within the linked file. To explicitly save a location, you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files, you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. 25 In the Manage Links dialog, notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. 26 Click OK. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. When you release the mouse button, a warning displays. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. You are given the opportunity to save the new location, ignore the warning, or cancel the action. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. When you relocate a project, the active location position is moved, although it may appear that the linked files are moving. By relocating a project, you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 30 On the Tools menu, click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. This is a two-click process. The first click specifies the move start point. The second click specifies the move endpoint. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol.

32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 669

Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up, and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin.

33 On the Edit menu, click Undo to return the origin to its original position. 34 On the File menu, click Save. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK. 36 On the File menu, click Close. NOTE In the following exercise, you work in one of the linked projects. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Structure. In this exercise, you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects.

Working with a Linked Building Model
After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared, the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. When opening the linked file, you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. Also, if other models were linked into the same host, you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. In this exercise, you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing. Training File

On the File menu, click Open.

670 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

■ ■

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select c_Townhouse and click Open.

Link a project 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Floor. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project.rvt file. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. In addition, the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project.rvt file. 2 On the File menu, click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select c_Condo_Complex. For Positioning, select Auto - By Shared Coordinates. Click Open.

Because this building model only has one named location, it is placed automatically within the host project. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model.

The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. The current active location is Lot A. Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. 6 Select Lot B, and click Make Current. 7 Click OK. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B.

Working with a Linked Building Model | 671

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you worked within a project that is linked within another project. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. In the next exercise, you manage the shared locations.

Managing Shared Locations
The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. In this exercise, you create a new location, orient a view to true north, and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate. 3 In the Name dialog, enter Lot C, and click OK. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. In the host file, you can select Lot C if necessary. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu, click View Properties. 6 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select True North for Orientation, and click OK. 7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project.

672 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu, click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. On the Options Bar, notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. 10 On the File menu, click Close. You can save the file if you wish. In this exercise, you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin.

Scheduling Components of Linked Files
In this exercise, you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing. Training File
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open.

Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 673

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Doors, and click OK. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 5 Under Available fields, select Count, and click Add. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order:
■ ■ ■

Family and Type Comments Cost

7 Select Include elements in linked files.

674 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

click Save. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 675 . 12 Select Grand totals. and then click OK twice. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. select Family and Type for Sort by. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. and click Properties.8 Click OK. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. 14 On the File menu. clear Itemize every instance. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. expand Schedules/Quantities. 13 On the File menu. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. right-click Door Schedule. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. You have completed this tutorial. In this exercise. click Close. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project.

676 .

demolish existing construction. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. You customize the display of phased work to highlight demolition work. footings. complete with schedules. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. In the lesson and exercises that follow. and then add new building model elements. braces and footings) to phases. assigning building elements to the appropriate phase: ■ Existing: Includes the original brick-clad building with structural walls and non load-bearing internal partitions. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. You create new phases. You then create schedules for the phased steelwork and 3-dimensional views of the phased construction and place them on a drawing sheet for a specific phase. Phase 1 (south): Includes new steelwork and footings for the existing building. and create plan views for each phase. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. You create new phases. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation.Project Phasing 21 In any project. Phase 2 (north): Includes new steelwork. ■ ■ 677 . as well as a covered walkway. beams. you renovate a building to convert it to a shopping mall. and a non load-bearing brick panel wall for a new building to be constructed north of the galleria. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. Using Phasing In this lesson. Also includes demolition of all internal walls for the existing building. You create and manage 3 project phases. the galleria. In this tutorial. In the second exercise. assign new building model elements such as steelwork (columns. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. you work with a building information model that requires renovation. a floor slab. For the client.

Existing phase Phase 1 (south) 678 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing .

Phasing Your Model | 679 . The default structural project template has 2 phases: Existing and New Construction. and modify graphic overrides to highlight demolition work. You create a new sheet on which you place the schedules and 2 views of the building model. After you assign building elements to phases. You create new phases for the project timeline. you create new phase-specific views. you create structural schedules for a specific phase of the project. The finished sheet Phasing Your Model In this exercise. you begin with all the building elements drawn as new construction. Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. use phase filters to control what displays in each phase.Phase 2 (north) After you add phases to the project.

Verify the current phase is New Construction 1 In the Project Browser. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. By default. When you create a new structural project. and open Common\c_STR_Project_Phasing. if a view is assigned to a Phase 1 setting. 680 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . and the Phase Demolished value is None. TIP Available phases and view phase settings can be changed in a project template so they are available for each new project. The Show All filter means that all building model elements (new. then new building elements are assigned to Phase 1.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Phasing. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. They can also be added or edited in an existing project at any time. Every building element has a Phase Created and a Phase Demolished value so you can assign a creation and a demolition phase to new work. As you add new elements to the building model. You can also use the Demolition tool to select building elements for demolition. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. For example. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. notice that the Phase Created value is New Construction. demo. the current phase linework is displayed as black. A phase view can show work in the current phase and work from previous phases in the project timeline. expand Views (all). 4 Click Cancel. 2 phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. click .rvt. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. In the Element Properties dialog. These values let you assign creation and demolition phases in a timeline. or temporary) are visible in this phase. click Training Files. Any new elements that you add to this view are assigned the New Construction phase value. 6 On the Options Bar. This phase assignment is controlled by a Phase setting within the view properties. while previous phase linework is displayed as gray. and double-click Floor. existing. Demolition work is represented by a black dashed line. expand Floor Plans.

There are now 3 phases in your project: Existing. Assign selected building elements to the Existing phase 15 In the Project Browser. You do not see a change in the graphics because all the building elements are new to Phase 1 (south). demo.7 Click Cancel. All building objects that were assigned to New Construction are now assigned to Phase 1 (south) because you changed the phase name. and click OK. and enter Phase 2 (north) under Name. you will see a visual confirmation of the change as the building elements disappear from the view. Now you are seeing only work that is new to Phase 1 (south) of the project. Phase 1 (south). Phasing Your Model | 681 . which means that work assigned to Phase 1 (south). click the New Construction field. scroll down the list of Instance Parameters until you see the Phasing heading. All of the building elements in the project are currently assigned to Phase 1 (south). so Phase 1 and Phase 2 occur after the Existing phase. as you change selected building elements to the existing phase. is visible in this view. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ Existing: Existing building Phase 1 (south): Existing building with new steelwork and demolished walls Phase 2 (north): New building with steelwork and exterior panel wall 14 Click OK. on the Project Phases tab. Add and edit phases 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 11 Enter Phase 1 (south). 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Under Insert. 10 In the Phasing dialog. click After. 13 Click in the Description fields for each phase. expand 3D Views. or temporary work (created and demolished in same phase). 18 Select Show New for Phase Filter. click Modify to clear the command. With the phase Filter set to Show New. The Phase value is Phase 1 (south) and the Phase filter is Show All. existing earlier phases. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click 3D. The phases are on a timeline with later phases lower on the list. and Phase 2 (north).

22 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. The footings are hidden and cannot be selected. right-click one of the rectangular footings. and click Hide Object.19 Click the ViewCube to adjust your view as shown. click Hide/Isolate. 21 On the View Control Bar. 682 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . and click Select All Instances. 20 In the drawing area.

as shown. 30 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click . 28 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. 29 On the View Control Bar. Only elements new to Phase 1 (south) are displayed. The continuous footing foundations. select Show All for Phase Filter. 26 On the Options Bar. and openings. and previously you hid the rectangular footings to make sure they couldn’t be selected. and click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.23 Use a crossing window to select the existing building. which are the building elements that comprise the existing building. are selected and are displayed in red. 25 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. This filters out the steelwork. and click OK. click . The building elements that you assigned to the Existing phase are no longer displayed in the drawing. under Phasing. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 Click OK. click Hide/Isolate. Phasing Your Model | 683 . 24 On the Options Bar. walls. clear Structural Columns and Structural Framing. under Phasing. select Existing for Phase Created. 27 In the Element Properties dialog.

You have reassigned building elements to 3 phases. Phase 1 (south) with demolition. After you create the views. 34 Use a selection window to select the structural elements. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 On the Options Bar. it requires separate plan views for the Existing. the building is displayed as shown. Because this is a renovation project. and the footings north of the galleria. 33 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. click . the walls. the slab. under Phasing. 37 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.Now you can see the Existing phase displayed with gray linework in the view. and click OK. you modify phase and phase filter properties 684 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . You see work for Phase 1 (south) and the existing phases. and Phase 2 (north) project phases. Because the active phase is Phase 1 (south) and the phase filter is set to Show All. select Phase 2 (north) for Phase Created. You do not see future phases such as Phase 2 (north). All of the structural elements are still assigned to Phase 1 (south).

right-click Existing. Phasing Your Model | 685 . it might be desirable to show previous phases or demolition. enter Existing. select Phase 1 (south) for the Phase value. and temporary) are shown in the same timeline. 50 In the View Properties dialog. 41 In the Project Browser. 39 In the Rename View dialog. shows as black. Because this is a phase-specific view. and click Rename. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. new. under Floor Plans. You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter is set to Show All. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. right-click Copy of Existing. and click OK. 44 Repeat the process to create a view named Phase 2 (north) Manage the phases for a view 45 In the Project Browser. 48 In the Project Browser. You now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and for Phase 1. and click OK. under Phasing. double-click Existing. select Existing for Phase. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. which will include planned demolition. and click OK. and click Duplicate. under Phasing. The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black. and click OK. 40 Click No. 46 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click . In a phase such as Phase 1. Create phase-specific plan views 38 In the Project Browser. The line style of the new work.to determine which phase is shown and which building elements (existing. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. under Floor Plans. a graphic override is used to make “older” existing elements use the gray line style. Demolish the interior walls 51 On the Tools toolbar. 42 In the Project Browser. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. demo. 43 In the Rename View dialog. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. double click Phase 1 (south). Because of this time relationship. 49 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. in phase 1. enter Phase 1 (south). Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing construction. right-click Floor. under Floor Plans.

52 Referring to the walls displayed as dashed lines in the following illustration. click Filter 1. double-click Phase 2 (north). Create a custom phase filter 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. under Demolished. As you click each wall. 63 Click on the Demolished line color and change it from black to red. 60 Under Filter Name. however. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. you demolish all elements hosted by it. When you demolish the host. select Phase 2 (north) for the Phase value. Graphic overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status: existing. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements. 59 In the Phasing dialog. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. 53 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and Temporary. Because the Phase value is Phase 1 (south) the walls are demolished in this phase. it is displayed as a dashed line. Existing. Demo Red. and select Show All for Phase Filter. 56 Click OK. 61 For the Filter Name. Notice that the openings display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. select Overridden. That is because the openings are wall-hosted elements. 58 In the Phasing dialog. click New. Demolished. View graphic overrides 62 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. In this case. 64 Click OK twice. under Phasing. The default phase filters are displayed. The line style of the current phase is displayed as black and previous phases are displayed as gray. demo. New. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. and enter Demo Red. click the Phase Filters tab. 686 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override to highlight the demolished walls in red. select the interior walls one at a time. new or temporary.

Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing construction. under Phasing. Create phase-specific 3D views 69 In the Project Browser. double-click Existing. 71 Name the views Existing. Phase 2 (north). 83 Select Coordination for Discipline. 67 In the Element Properties dialog. You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter is set to Show All. select Demo Red for Phase Filter to show work that is demolished with the red line color from the graphic overrides. 70 Right-click on each of the copies. Because of this time relationship. 74 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click 3D and click Duplicate. 81 In the Element Properties dialog. Do this 3 times so you have 3 copies. This displays both architectural and structural building elements. under 3D Views. under Phasing. in phase 1. a graphic override is used to make “older” existing elements use the gray line style. The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black. double-click Phase 1 (south). click View menu ➤ View Properties. 77 Select Coordination for Discipline. The line style of the new work. Phase 1 (south). 76 Under Graphics. 79 In the Project Browser. 73 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and Show All for Phase Filter. shows as black. and click OK. 75 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under 3D Views. 82 In the Element Properties dialog. Phasing Your Model | 687 . under 3D Views. the demolished walls are displayed as red. 66 To assign as specific phase filter to a view. double-click Phase 1 (south). Manage the phases for the 3D views 72 In the Project Browser. Because you changed the override. The override settings for Show All and Demo Red are the same. select Phase 1 (south) for Phase.Apply the Demo Red graphic overrides to a view 65 Under Floor Plans. and the Show All phase filter includes the override for demolition. which will show both architectural and structural building elements. under Graphics. select Existing for the Phase value. select Shading for Model Graphics Style. select Shading for Model Graphics Style. under Phasing. 78 Click OK. and click Rename. 68 Click OK. 80 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.

84 for the Phase 2 (north) view. and footing schedules for a single phase of a project. as well as 2 views of the building model. you can do so at this time or you can continue in this file for the next exercise.84 Click OK. You create a new sheet on which you place the schedules. you created a building model with 3 distinct phases and created 3 plan views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. 86 If you wish to save this file. framing. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules In this exercise. You created a custom phase filter with graphic overrides to show demolition work in red. 85 Repeat steps 81 . assigning Phase 2 (north) as the Phase. you create column. In this exercise. You finished the exercise by creating 3d phased views suitable for a client presentation. The finished sheet 688 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing .

and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Length TIP Press and hold CTRL to make multiple selections under Available Fields. You can drag a column grid line to adjust the width of a column. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 689 . Select Grand totals. click Training Files. select the following fields. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Select Length for Then by.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Fields tab. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. 5 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 7 In the New Schedule dialog. Clear Itemize every instance. Create a structural column schedule for Phase 1 (south) 1 On the View tab of the Design bar. Click OK. click Schedule/Quantities. and open Imperial\i_STR_Project_Phasing_Schedules.Phase 1 for Name. Click OK.Phase 1 for Name. Create a structural framing schedule for Phase 1 (south) 6 On the Design Bar. 4 Under Available Fields. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. click Schedule/Quantities. select Structural Framing. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Enter Framing . 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Structural Columns. Enter Columns .

17 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. 14 Under Available Fields. 19 In the Sheet Title dialog. right-click Sheets (all). click the Fields tab. Select Grand totals. Click OK. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ Count Family and Type 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 18 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 13 In the Schedule Properties dialog. right-click the new sheet. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. Click OK. Select Grand totals. you drag the schedules and project views onto the sheet. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ Count Family and Type 15 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select the following fields. Create a sheet and then add views and schedules 16 In the Project Browser.8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. expand Sheets (all). Click OK. Clear Itemize every instance. Use the following illustration as a guide as you complete the steps to create your sheet. click the Fields tab. Create a footings schedule for Phase 1 (south) 11 On the Design bar. Clear Itemize every instance. Next. select the following fields. and click New Sheet. and click Rename. select Structural Foundations.Structural for Name. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. Enter Footings . 9 Under Available Fields. enter Phase 1 .Phase 1 for Name. 690 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . click Schedule/Quantities 12 In the New Schedule dialog. click OK.

In this exercise.20 In the Project Browser. you created 3 custom structural schedules for a specific project phase and placed them on a sheet. and click to place it. and click to place them. and click to place it. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 691 . and drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet. 21 Under 3D views. 23 On the sheet. drag each of the 3 schedules onto the sheet. expand Floor Plans. select each schedule one at a time. and move the column controls to adjust column width. 22 Expand Schedules. drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet.

692 .

You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model. Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting. Daytime rendering of the pool house 693 .Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 22 In this tutorial. you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Structure 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model.

You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. When you complete these changes. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall. In this exercise. you: ■ ■ ■ change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. you specify options that define the model environment. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. After you create the perspective view. you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. the pad.Nighttime rendering of the pool house You learn to create and apply materials to the building model. and create the perspective view that you want to render. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. and then render a final exterior view. add trees to the building site. 694 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 695 .rvt. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Pool_House. View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

7 Click OK 3 times. 10 On the Render Appearance tab.Teak. (Element You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall. 696 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .3 In the drawing area. 9 In the Materials dialog.Teak.Teak. satin-finished teak. verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood . Solid material is currently a light stained teak. click Edit. select the wooden screen wall. click Replace. and on the Options Bar. for Structure. Solid. select Wood . Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. click Edit/New. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Properties). for Materials. The design calls for the use of a dark stained. Solid. The Wood . 5 Under Construction. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog. so you can change the render appearance for the material.

select Satin Varnish. The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category. and click OK. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click <By Category>. click Edit/New. 19 On the Render Appearance tab. click (Element Properties). click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss. and click Update Preview. You do not want the medium gloss finish. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area. and click OK. but it is the closest material to what you want. 22 On the Design Bar. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 697 . 18 In the Materials dialog.Cast-in-Place Concrete. for the Structure [1] Material value. select Concrete . 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. for Structure. and click . and on the Options Bar.11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. which is using a default material. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 13 Click Update Preview. select Broom Straight. for Finish. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish. and review the material patterns. select the pad. click Edit. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Click the Graphics tab. 16 Under Construction. 21 Click OK 4 times. click Modify. for Finish. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material.

By selecting this option. 698 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 30 In the Render Appearance Library. You create a black anodized aluminum material. Anodized . the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. click Aluminum Anodized Black. and click OK. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog.Black. enter Metal . select Metal . review the material appearance (color and pattern). 25 In the Materials dialog.Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog. click Replace. and click OK. and click OK.Aluminum. 27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. for Name. click (Duplicate).Aluminum. 24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. 29 On the Render Appearance tab. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall.

Black. 38 At the top of the Rendering dialog. select Region.32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 33 In the Object Styles dialog. and click 34 In the Materials dialog. . select the Material value. for Curtain Wall Mullions. (Show Rendering Dialog).Aluminum. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 699 . 35 Click OK twice. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. select Metal . click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. 36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. Anodized . Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar.

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen. the faster the image renders. mullions. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image. NOTE The smaller the region. 700 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly. and pad).

providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process. select Medium. after the rendering process completes. 44 To display the building model. and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress. Adding Trees to the Site on page 701. click Show the model.42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog: ■ Under Quality. The higher the quality. you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project. Under Lighting. ■ ■ 43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays. select Sunlight from top left. Refer to the Revit Structure Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save. on the Rendering dialog. for Setting. select Exterior: Sun only. for Scheme. the longer the rendering process will take. For Sun. under Display.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. Adding Trees to the Site | 701 . Several quality settings are available.

In a later exercise. when you render an exterior view of the model. and double-click Site. the RPC model is used in the rendering. expand Views (all). imperial components and units are used in this lesson.rvt. but any type and size can be used. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps. NOTE For simplicity. 702 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway. c_Pool_House_in_progress.

See Loading Families in the Revit Structure 2009 Online Help. as shown. select RPC Tree . click Site Component. right-click in the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector.3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.) 6 In the Type Selector. and click Site. Adding Trees to the Site | 703 . TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project. they can be loaded from the Content Library. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio.Deciduous : Red Maple . (Exact placement is not important. select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. near the walkway. similar to the locations shown. and place 2 trees in the project.30'.

for Height. select RPC Tree . 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.25'. and on the Options Bar. select RPC Tree . enter 18'.7 In the Type Selector. and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.Deciduous : Scarlet Oak . 13 Click OK twice. click Rename. click Edit/New. 11 In the Rename dialog.Deciduous : Honey Locust . enter Honey Locust .42'. click (Element Properties). You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 12 In the Type Properties dialog.18'. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. for New. Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 704 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

17 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. Creating a Perspective View on page 705. Creating a Perspective View | 705 .15 On the Design Bar. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise.

Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. on the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. click Camera.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera.rvt. The perspective view displays. 706 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . c_Pool_House_in_progress. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera.

and adjust the field of vision. in the Project Browser.3 Zoom out. and click Show Camera. double-click Site. and select the crop boundary. If the camera is not shown in the view. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. under Floor Plans. as shown. as necessary. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D View 1. Depending on camera placement. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. With the camera shown. Creating a Perspective View | 707 . the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground.

enter Exterior . Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 709. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 708 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Rename. 7 In the Rename View dialog. 10 Save the file. double-click Exterior . 8 In the Project Browser.Day. right-click 3D View 1. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window.6 In the Project Browser.Day to open the view. and click OK. under 3D Views. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition.

modify render settings. double-click Exterior . Creating the Exterior Rendering | 709 . You then duplicate the view. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. under 3D Views. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser.Day. and render a daytime view of the exterior.rvt. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise.

In this case. 710 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 8 Under Quality. select Medium. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. 5 In the Rename dialog. 7 In the Rendering dialog. select Sky: Cloudy. enter Spring Equinox . You create a location and time for the rendering. and click Render. click (Show Rendering Dialog). You adjust cloud settings as required. for New. NOTE If a background image is required. select Spring Equinox. 3pm. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. for Sun. under Background. 6 Click OK twice. under Lighting. see Orienting to True North for Solar Studies. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. for Setting. select Edit/New. and click Rename. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings.Santa Monica. 3 In the Rendering dialog.

10 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the rendering.png). 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. For Files of type.9 In the Rendering dialog. After the image is rendered. click Export. click Desktop. click Show the model. select Portable Network Graphics (*. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Structure session is open. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. Click Save. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 711 .

highlight 9 :Sconce Light . and click OK. press and hold SHIFT. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . 25 Using the same method. select the first light. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 712 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Day view to Exterior . for Name. enter Pool Lights. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. and click OK. To select a sequential list. under Lighting.120V through 35 :Sconce Light .Flat Round : 60W . click New. under Group Options. and select the last light. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. under Ungrouped Lights. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view.120V. 16 With the Exterior . verify that Pool Lights is selected. enter Pool House Lights. and click OK.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. click New. right-click Exterior .Flat Round : 60W .Flat Round : 60W .Night. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. under Group Options. for Scheme. on the View Control Bar. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. under 3D Views. for Name. under Ungrouped Lights. 22 Using the same method. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights .Day. add 30 :Sconce Light . click Dialog). select Exterior: Artificial only. and click Move to Group. To create a similar view using different rendering settings.Night view open. click Render. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click OK.Flat Round : 60W . add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group.Night. 27 In the Rendering dialog.Exterior . you duplicate the view and change the settings.120V to the Pool Lights group. and click Artificial Lights.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . dialog.

the exposure can be modified to improve the output. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. for Exposure Value. click Show the model.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View | 713 . After the image is rendered. and click OK. In this example. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Structure session. 30 In the Rendering dialog. enter 4. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. you change the brightness of the exposure. 32 Save the file. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. click Adjust Exposure. under Image. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View on page 713.

Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and finally. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. render the views. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. define the perspective view and rendering settings.rvt. Adding RPC People In this exercise. 714 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

5 On the Design Bar.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the figure. and on the Edit toolbar. select RPC Female : YinYin. the person’s line of sight. Exact placement is not important. click Modify. 4 In the Type Selector. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. and place the component inside the pool house. click Component. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. under Floor Plans. Adding RPC People | 715 . 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. ■ (Rotate). double-click Level 1.

under Parameters. 13 On the Design Bar. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. click (Element Properties). 14 Save the file. you can enable this option. By default. 12 Click OK 3 times. under Identity Data. select Cast Reflections. click Edit. In order to see the figure’s reflection. click Modify. on the Options Bar. 716 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 10 In the Type Properties dialog. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. click Edit/New. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. for Render Appearance Properties.

and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. click Camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point.15 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 717. c_Pool_House_in_progress. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 717 . you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. and click Properties. select Section Box. and click OK. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. under 3D Views. under Extents. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click 3D View 1.The perspective view displays. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. 718 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 4 In the Project Browser.

you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 719 . under Floor Plans. select the section box. 9 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Project Browser. 11 In the 3D view. double-click South. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. double-click Level 1. in addition to the 3D view.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. In order to accurately adjust the section box. under Elevations (Building Elevations).

12 In the floor plan view. 13 In the South Elevation view. select the section box. size the box as shown. 720 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Hide in view ➤ Category. right-click. 14 In the 3D view. size the box as shown.

18 Proceed to the next exercise. To create a daytime view. and curtain walls. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. and render the interior view. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior.15 Maximize the 3D view. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 721 . Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 721. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. doors that contain windows or glass. 17 Save the file.

6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 2 In the Rename View dialog.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 722 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 3 On the View Control Bar. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. under 3D Views. click (Show Rendering Dialog). You can specify a lower quality. c_Pool_House_in_progress. enter Interior . Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. for Scheme. under Lighting. 8 In the Rendering dialog. 7 Under Quality. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. click Render. After these settings are established. clear Pool Lights. 5 Click Artificial Lights.Night. 4 In the Rendering dialog. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. and click OK. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. you turn them off for this scene. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and click OK. for Setting. and click Rename. right-click 3D View 1. select Interior: Artificial only. select Draft. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level.

for Sun.Night. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Copy To Custom. 13 In the Rendering dialog. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. For sunlit interiors. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. select Spring Equinox . You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. for Scheme. The preset schemes are read-only. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . 3pm. 17 In the Rendering dialog. click 14 For Setting.Santa Monica. and click OK. see the Revit Structure Online Help. and click Render. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. You create a view for the interior during the day. select Edit. select Curtain Walls.9 Close the Rendering dialog. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render.Day. For more information on daylight portals. right-click Interior . select Region. but the space will receive standard daylighting. the daylight portals can be turned on. Creating the Interior Rendering | 723 . Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. (Show Rendering Dialog). The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. In this case. you must create a custom setting. select Interior: Sun only. By default they are turned off. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. in order to turn on daylight portals. for Daylight Portal Options.

Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. enter 10. click Properties). (Element 724 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 20 In the Rendering dialog. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. enter 1. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. select the column on the right. click Adjust Exposure. and on the Options Bar. click Show the model. and close the Rendering dialog. In the next steps. Click OK.18 In the Rendering dialog. under Image. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. For Saturation.

enter 90. 23 With the column still selected.22 In the Element Properties dialog. add a bump map to create texture. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. For Bump. 29 In the Rendering dialog. For Rotate. click (Show Rendering Dialog). for Resolution. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. for Setting. As size and DPI are increased. For Amount. 32 In the Rendering dialog. 24 In the Materials dialog. Creating the Interior Rendering | 725 . click the dimensions for Size. Click OK. and click OK. under Output Settings. select Wood. enter 5''. 30 In the drawing area. select Based on wood grain. For Width. select High. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. select Printer. and on the Options Bar. the render time increases significantly. select Unfinished. select the crop boundary.6. select Scale (locked proportions). You change the varnish setting. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. 26 Click Update Preview. 28 In the Rendering dialog. click OK. clear Region. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. and click Render.

you rendered an exterior and an interior view. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. elevation. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. The walkthrough path is a spline. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Structure 2009. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. or section view. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 726 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player.The rendered image displays. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. Usually. independent of the Revit Structure software. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. but you can also define it in a 3D. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. In a plan view.

expand Views (all). 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room.rvt. click Training Files. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. If you prefer to use metric values. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click the tab in the context menu. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. and open Common\c_Townhouse. and change unit formats as desired. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. and ends in the far corner of the living room. Creating a Walkthrough | 727 . and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. expand Floor Plans. on the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Walkthrough. verify that Perspective is selected. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. right-click in the Design Bar. proceeds through the dining room. click Settings ➤ Project Units. and double-click 1st Floor.

728 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. click Finish. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. on the Options Bar. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. and double-click Walkthrough 1. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown.

click Edit Walkthrough. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. If it is not. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). on the Options Bar. for Width. Creating a Walkthrough | 729 . 11 Under Change. and click OK. and for Height. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. enter 1. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. 14 Click . enter 16''. 17 Click . for Frame. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. and click OK. click the dimensions for Size. 13 On the Options Bar. select the crop boundary. 12 On the View menu. enter 9''. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). verify that Field of view is selected. and select the crop boundary. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog.

under Floor Plans. under Extents. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. 730 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . double-click 1st Floor.rvt. clear Far Clip Active.The walkthrough plays. press ESC. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 730. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. click Edit Walkthrough. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. and click OK. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. proceed to the next exercise. click (Element Properties). Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. c_Townhouse.

and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. for Controls. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 731 . 6 On the Options Bar. and drag it to the location shown. You can move any camera target or key frame position. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. 7 Click the third key frame position. select Path.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location.

then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. If you are unsure of what option to use. 3 Under Format. reducing the size of the image. Recording the Walkthrough on page 732. c_Townhouse. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. specifying the number of frames. for Frames/sec. double-click Walkthrough 1. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. shading with edges. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. without opening Revit Structure 2009. on the Options Bar. or rendering. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. The walkthrough is recorded. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. select <Shading>. and save the exercise file with a unique name. shading. 732 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click File menu ➤ Save As. 8 If you want to save this exercise. click Edit Walkthrough. for Model Graphics Style. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. and click OK. and click Save. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. under Output Length.rvt. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. hidden line. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. for Compressor. under Walkthroughs. . When you export the walkthrough. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. 9 To play the walkthrough. enter 15. and click OK.

Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. You do not need to create the work plane. you learn how to add fascia. shed. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. In this exercise. including hip. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Structure 2009. In this lesson. gable. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this tutorial. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. gutters. and low sloped roofs. Before you can sketch the roof profile. you learn to create several different types of roofs. In addition. mansard. and soffits to the roofs that you create.Roofs 23 In this lesson. 733 .

and double-click Level 1. 734 | Chapter 23 Roofs .rvt. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 5 In the Go To View dialog. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 1'6'' to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. 4 Click OK. and click OK. click Ref Plane. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. expand Floor Plans. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. 1 In the Project Browser. select Name. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. expand Views (all). and open Imperial\i_Roofs. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

Creating an Extruded Roof | 735 . 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 1'6" to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. and so on). This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. centerline. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face.TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. click the blue square on the witness line. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 1'6" below Level 2.

12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Chain. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. click Lines. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. 16 On the View toolbar. sketch the roof profile.Next. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 736 | Chapter 23 Roofs .

click Modify. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. expand Sections (Type 1). so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. 21 In the Project Browser. Next. 17 On the Tools toolbar. press CTRL. Creating an Extruded Roof | 737 . and select the second wall. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. 19 On the Tools toolbar. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and then select the exterior face of the wall. 18 Select the edge of the roof. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. and double-click Section 1. click (Join/Unjoin Roof).Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. press TAB. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. The roof should resemble the following illustration. expand Views (all).

click model. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected.24 On the Options Bar. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 738 | Chapter 23 Roofs . (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 738. 26 On the View toolbar. click Attach for Top/Base.

and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. verify that Defines slope is selected.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 739 . click Pick Walls. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Yes. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. sketch the roof footprint. the roof is automatically created on the lowest level of the house and a notification dialog is displayed. expand Views (all). Next. Because you are in a three-dimensional view. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. and double-click Garage Roof.rvt. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. expand Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. i_Roofs. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line.

By default. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 741. 13 On the Design Bar. 14 When you see the informational dialog. click the model. click (Properties). and on the Options Bar. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. under Dimensions. enter 6'' for Rise/12" to change the roof slope. 740 | Chapter 23 Roofs . the roof slope has a 9'' rise over a 12'' run. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. and click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. select both slope definition lines. click Finish Roof.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. click Modify. clear Defines slope. Next. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the View toolbar. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. 11 Press CTRL. 12 In the Element Properties dialog.

click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and double-click Level 3. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. click Pick Walls. 3 On the Options Bar. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. expand Floor Plans. i_Roofs. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. 6 Click to select all the walls. Next. press TAB. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. clear Defines slope. When you complete the roof. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 741 . you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. sketch the chimney opening.

sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. add new slope lines to the roof. click Finish Roof. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. click Modify. 10 On the View menu. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines Slope. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. Next. 13 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. select Defines Slope. 18 On the View toolbar. 17 When you see the informational dialog. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. click (Rectangle). click Lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 9 Using automatic snaps. 742 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Options bar.7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 743. and double-click Level 2. i_Roofs.19 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. select Defines slope. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Pick Walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. and click (Pick Lines). 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 743 . close the roof sketch. 3 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. clear Defines Slope. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. expand Floor Plans. click Lines. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other.

click (Trim/Extend). and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. and click OK. 11 To trim the first line segment. 744 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 10 On the Options Bar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 14 Under Constraints. using the following illustration for guidance. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. click Roof Properties. click Finish Roof. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. raise the roof 2' above the current level. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. Next. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. enter 2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. 9 On the Tools toolbar. Next. select the left vertical slope definition line. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch.

) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 17 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. click Modify. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 745 . 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. join the two remaining walls to the roof. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. click (SteeringWheels). Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 21 Click (SteeringWheels). (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels.16 On the View toolbar. 18 On the Design Bar.

i_Roofs. Next.Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. 746 | Chapter 23 Roofs . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 746. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs.rvt. 23 On the Tools toolbar. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof.

expand Floor Plans. Next. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 747 . press TAB. click Pick Walls.1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Options Bar. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. clear Defines Slope. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. you add a slope-defining line. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 To trim the first line segment. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. select the left vertical roof line. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. and double-click Level 2. expand Views (all). 9 On the Options Bar. enter 0' 0'' for Overhang. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 8 On the Tools toolbar. Next. click (Trim/Extend). 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way.

click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. click Roof Properties. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 13 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. expand 3D Views. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. i_Roofs. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 748. 16 Under Constraints. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. select Defines slope. 4 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. enter -2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. (SteeringWheels). 14 Enter 6" for the rise value to change the roof slope. 748 | Chapter 23 Roofs . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. click 20 On the View toolbar. and press ENTER.rvt. and double-click 3D. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. and click OK. click Finish Roof to complete the roof.12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 2. click (Default 3D View) to display the model.

Next. click Split Walls and Lines. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. Next. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . and enter 2' 0'' for Offset. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 749 . 11 On the Design Bar. add two new slope arrows. 9 On the Tools menu. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. 12 On the Options Bar. Before you can add slope arrows.5 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. click (Pick Lines). To help locate the position of each split. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. you need to add two reference planes. click Slope Arrow.15 to add the second slope arrow. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. click Ref Plane. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 7 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. clear Defines Slope. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail.

i_Roofs. 1 In the Project Browser. select Defines Slope. expand Floor Plans.Begin the tail at the right reference plane. enter 6'' for Rise/12". enter 12'' for Rise/12". 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 20 Under Dimensions. the adjacent eave heights must align. and click 19 Under Constraints. 750 | Chapter 23 Roofs . (Properties). you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. select Slope for Specify. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. When eave heights differ. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 750. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. under Dimensions. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. and then click OK. select both slope arrows. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 18 Press CTRL. When you sketch a hip roof. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and move the cursor to place the arrow. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. click Align Eaves. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). When aligning eaves. on the Options Bar. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. expand Views (all). 6 With the two gable end lines selected. and double-click Garage Roof. (Properties). click Edit. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. The eave lines display with a dimension. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. 5 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

click Training Files. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 751. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. 10 On the Options Bar. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. 12 On the Design Bar. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 14 If you want to save your changes.Next. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. Creating a Mansard Roof | 751 . select a method to align the eaves. on the File menu. 13 On the View toolbar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_Mansard_Roof. click Finish Roof. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

under Constraints. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof.1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). expand Views (all). 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click North. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. expand Elevations. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. 6 On the View toolbar. and double-click Level 3. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. 7 In the Project Browser. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Modify. 3 Select the roof and. (Properties). 752 | Chapter 23 Roofs . expand Floor Plans. on the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Next.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. click . 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Save As. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. and select the remaining three lines. under Dimensions. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 17 On the View toolbar. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 754. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and then select Defines slope.10 On the Options Bar. on the File menu. Creating a Mansard Roof | 753 . click mansard roof. press TAB. click (Pick Lines). 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. click Modify. click Finish Roof. and click OK. enter 3'' for Rise/12". 14 On the Options Bar.

2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Roof.rvt. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Floor Plans. click Pick Walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. After you add the roof. 3 On the Design Bar. 754 | Chapter 23 Roofs .Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. click Training Files. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. you add a roof to a building shell.

verify that Defines slope is not selected. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. click (Trim/Extend). Because the walls are not continuous.4 On the Options Bar. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. 7 On the Tools toolbar. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 755 . select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. 5 In the drawing area.

and click OK. for Type. 11 On the Design Bar. Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. select Steel Truss . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Roof. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar.EPDM. click Roof Properties.8 Select the walls to create a closed loop.Insulation on Metal Deck . double-click the section head to open the section view. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. 756 | Chapter 23 Roofs .

16 On the Options Bar. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line Creating a Low Slope Roof | 757 . you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. In the next steps. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. and click to select it. click (Draw Split Lines).The roof has been created. under Floor Plans. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. double-click Roof. 18 Move the cursor down. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. 17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line.

20 Using the same method. move the cursor horizontally to the left. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc.You create a split line vertically down the center. Next. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. on the Options Bar. The roof is now divided into 6 sections. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. (Add points). 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. 758 | Chapter 23 Roofs . and select a point on the opposite roof line.

23 On the Options Bar. click (Modify Sub-Elements).In this exercise. exact placement of the points is not important. enter -2''. You modify the points individually. Layout tools in Revit Structure such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. 25 Using the same method. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 759 . and press ENTER. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. for the dimension. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. 24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof.

click Modify. 29 On the Design Bar. enter 4''. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. 760 | Chapter 23 Roofs . including the interior edges of the roof regions. 27 Press and hold CTRL. and select all of the roof edges. click (Modify Sub-Elements). Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER.The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. for Elevation.

click Edit. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 View the results in the section view. under Construction. for the Thermal/Air Layer. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. and on the Options Bar. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. for Structure. 31 Select the roof slab.Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. In some cases this type of slope is desired. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 761 . 35 Click OK 3 times. click (Properties). You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. select Variable. The slab has not responded exactly as intended. click Edit/New. The entire slab is sloped. By making the insulation layer variable.

Creating Fascia. 37 If you want to save your changes. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and soffits in Revit Structure. and open Common\c_Condominium. and click Open. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. 762 | Chapter 23 Roofs . Gutters. and Soffits In this lesson. After you create a roof. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\Families\Profiles\Roofs. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As.rfa. 3 Press CTRL. gutters. you learn how to create roof fascia. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Properties). Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. gutters. and soffits. click Training Files. Creating Fascia. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 5 On the Options Bar. select Fascia-Built-Up. Gutters.rfa and Gutter Profile-Cove. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. click Training Files. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. on the File menu.The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. you can easily create its fascia. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and Soffits on page 762. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia.

and click OK twice. Creating Roof Fascia | 763 . under Construction. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 In the Name dialog. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia.7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Creating Gutters on page 764. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. select Fascia-Built-Up: 1 x 12 w 1 x 8 for Profile. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. enter Built-up Fascia. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building.

2 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. under Construction. select Gutter-Bevel: 5'' x 5'' for Profile. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. . select Metal-Aluminum for Name. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 3 In the Properties dialog. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. 10 Click to place the gutter. and click OK three times. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. click (Properties).Creating Gutters In this exercise.rvt. click in the Value field for Material. click Duplicate. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. click Edit/New. c_Condominium. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. 764 | Chapter 23 Roofs .

Creating Soffits In this exercise. click Pick Roofs. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click Roof. you learn how to place a roof soffit.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating Soffits | 765 . 3 On the Design Bar. Creating Soffits on page 765. expand Views. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. c_Condominium. expand Floor Plans.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. 1 In the Project Browser. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise.

7 On the Tools menu. and double-click 3D. click Join Geometry. click Finish Sketch. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Project Browser. and then select the soffit to join them.4 Select the roof. 766 | Chapter 23 Roofs . expand 3D Views. 8 Select the roof. expand Views (all). Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap.

on the File menu. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As. Creating Soffits | 767 .9 If you want to save your changes.

768 .

and modify repetitive units. In this tutorial. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. you not only simplify their placement. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods.Grouping 24 Using the grouping functionality in Revit Structure. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. or with those working on a different project. 769 . you also simplify the modification process. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. Creating. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. and typical office layouts. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. When you make changes to a nested group. hotel rooms. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. In another exercise. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. You mirror one instance of the group. After you create a model group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. By grouping objects. Modifying. the host group is also updated automatically. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. all instances in the building model are updated. For example. The new group is considered nested within the host group. In this exercise. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. place. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. you add the new model group to a previously created group. You can also nest groups within other groups. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose.

NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. click Training Files. enter ZR.rvt. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). 770 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and double-click First Floor. and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click in the drawing area. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. click (Group). 4 On the Edit toolbar. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. enter Typical Kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 771 . and click OK.

7 On the Design Bar.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. click Modify. 772 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. select the center control for the group origin. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.

Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. expand Model. 12 On the Design Bar. under Groups. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. and click Create Instance. Creating and Placing a Group | 773 . click Modify. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. right-click Typical Kitchen.

14 On the Edit toolbar. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. click (Mirror). 774 | Chapter 24 Grouping . select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. clear Copy. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection.

and on the Edit toolbar.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. click (Rotate). Creating and Placing a Group | 775 .

as shown.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. one mirrored. 776 | Chapter 24 Grouping . select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 20 On the Design Bar. and one rotated. click Modify.

Modifying a Group In this exercise. and click Save.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. Modifying a Group | 777 .rvt.rvt. When you finish editing. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. press TAB to highlight the wall. click Save As. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. and click to select it. name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. you make changes to an instance of a group.

Click icon to exclude in this group instance.).3 Click (Group Member. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 778 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 8 On the Design Bar.). press TAB. and click member to group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. press TAB. select the element. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. and click to select the wall. 7 Click (Group Member. click Modify. and click to select the door. 4 Move the cursor over the door. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance.). NOTE To display an excluded element.

click Modify. 13 In the Type Selector. clear Tag on Placement. move the cursor to the left. click Wall. 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. click Door. 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Group | 779 . select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''. 14 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall.

20 On the Options Bar.16 On the Design Bar. click Edit Group. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. move the cursor up. 22 In the drawing area. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. All other elements in the model are grayed out. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. click Modify. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. In edit group mode. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 780 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner.

to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 On the group editor toolbar. under Constraints. created in an earlier lesson.24 On the Design Bar. click Modify. which acts as the host. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. Nesting Groups | 781 . and click OK. for Unconnected Height. click Finish. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. (Element Properties). click 27 For Base Offset. enter 7'. enter 3' 4''. Nesting Groups In this exercise. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. and on the Options Bar. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. 25 Select the opening. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. you add the Typical Kitchen group.

3 On the Options Bar. select the Typical Kitchen group. 5 In the drawing area. in the Project Browser. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. under Floor Plans.rvt.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 4 On the group editor toolbar. 782 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click (Add to Group). Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. double-click First Floor. click Edit Group.

6 Press TAB. double-click Second Floor. 8 In the Project Browser. and each of the bifold doors. 7 On the group editor toolbar. select the wall between the folding doors. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. under Floor Plans. click Finish. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. Nesting Groups | 783 .

In the next exercise. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. such as door and window tags. such as text. double-click First Floor. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and filled regions. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. under Floor Plans. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. you add door tags to a group. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. 784 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

and select a point below the left elevator. click Finish Sketch. 7 On the Design Bar.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click to draw a rectangular region. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 785 . 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. click Filled Region. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left.

click Modify. click to add an arc leader. 9 On the Options Bar. and select the text note and the filled region. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. and click OK. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 14 On the Edit toolbar. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. click (Group). 16 In the drawing area. 12 Enter Tile. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 786 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and on the Design Bar. as shown. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. click Text. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft.

18 On the Design Bar. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. Because the detail group contains variables. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 21 In the drawing area. double-click Second Floor. and click Create Instance. expand Detail. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. 20 In the Project Browser. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. under Groups. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. under Floor Plans. click Modify. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 787 . 22 On the Design Bar.

rvt. as shown. under Floor Plans. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. clear Leader.manner that a drawing component can be added. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click First Floor. 788 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Tag ➤ By Category. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 3 On the Options Bar.

click Check None. double-click Second Floor. click (Group). and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. 8 In the Filter dialog. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. select Door Tags. and click OK. 11 In the Project Browser.7 On the Options Bar. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. click (Filter Selection). under Floor Plans. Using Attached Detail Groups | 789 . 9 On the Edit toolbar. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. for Attached Detail Group Name. and click OK. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser.

select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. 14 On the Options Bar. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Modify. and click OK. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. When you load the group from the library into a new project. 16 On the Design Bar. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. click Place Detail. Training File 790 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. therefore.

and click OK. click Desktop. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. for Create new. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. A warning dialog displays. and click Open. and click Save Group.rvt. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). verify that Same as group name is selected. 5 In the New Project dialog. under Groups\Model. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. verify that Project is selected. 12 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. and expand Model. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. In this case. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. 3 For File name. Saving and Loading Groups | 791 . You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. browse to the Desktop. and click Create Instance. click OK.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click Save. accept the default template file. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. click Modify. select 2 Bedroom Unit. expand Groups. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit.rvt.

26 Close the file with or without saving it. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. click Training Files. 17 On the Design Bar. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. verify that Attached Details is selected only. select the linked Revit model. and the link is removed. click Use Existing. and click OK.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group.rvt. 23 In the confirmation dialog. click Remove Link. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and on the Options Bar. 792 | Chapter 24 Grouping . expand Revit Links. 18 In the Project Browser. When a group is converted to a link. click OK.rvt file is added as a link to the project. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Bind. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. click Modify. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Link. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. 20 On the Options Bar. 24 In the message dialog.